The

MATERIALS ENGINEER
EXAMINATION REFERENCE
for CIVIL ENGINEERS
Volume 1.1
2 Edition

Philippines

Jose Reynaldo D. Cuna

Civil Engineer
Master Plumber
MSCE - Geotechnical Engineering Graduate
Ph.D. Geotechnical Engineering - Student
University of the Philippines - Diliman

“Never become so much of an expert that you stop gaining expertise. View life
inuous learning experience.”
-Denis Waitley
Page 11 The Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol, 1.1 - 2™ Ed The Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page I
Determination of Field Density using Sand-Cone Method 43

Table Of contents Worksheet Example for FOT 44

Compaction Test 46
Preface 1
Table of Contents 1 Moisture Density Relationship of Soil 47
Part 1 - Introduction to Materials Engineer Accreditation —1 Sampling and Field Testing for Concrete Mix 48
The Accreditation for Contractors’ Materials Engineer s 3 Slump Test 48
The Process of Application for Written Examination =~ -ee. 2 Compression and Flexure Test Specimen in the Field 50
Workflow Chart for the Accreditation of Contractors’ ME 5 Acceptance of Concrete 58
The Topics in the Written Examination — Sampling and Testing of Asphalt Core 53
Guide and Examination Techniques e 7 Test on Asphalt Drilled Cores 54
Department Order No. 98, Series of 2016 ~ wecee 8 PCCP Drilled Cores and its Evaluation 57
Procedure for Accreditation .. 9 Dynamic Cone Penetrometer and CBR Analysis 63
Renewal and Upgrading of Accreditation ) Part IV — March 2015 Contractors’ M.E. Examination 69

Classification of Contractor's ME ... 11 Answer Key, March 2015 Contractors’ M.E. Examination 80
PART II - The Materials Engineer in Quality Control PartV - September 2015 M.E. Examination 81
Implementation o Answer Key, September 2015 M.E. Written Examination 102
Sty Control Procedies w13 Part VI - March 2016 M.E. Examination 103
The Project Development in DPWH 20 Answer Key, March 2016 M.E. Written Examination 124
Basic Duties and Responsibilities of a Materials Engineer ~ ----- 21 Part VII-A — September 2016 M.E. Written Examination 125
Department Orders that are Essential for MEs N Answer Key, September 2016 M.E. Written Examination 146
PartIll - Common Field Tests ... 25, Part VII-B - Detailed Solutions and Explanations to 147
Sampling for Minimum Testing Requirements 26 September 2016 M.E. Written Examination
Table for Limitations and Variation in Blue Book ~ eeee 27 Part VIII-A — Various M.E. Examinations in 2017
Field Testing as Part of the Design . 29 Answer Key, Various M.E. Examinations in 2017
Common Field Tests as Part of Quality Control — 32 Part WII-:;.DVGV*:&:: :T::?::t I:':‘ds ?:l;':;;flons to Various
Definition of Terms 32 o
Method of Soil Sampling and Concrete .. " Part IX-A -- Various M.E..Ex:minatlon‘s in 201‘5
Answer Key, Various M.E. Examinations in 2018
L 2 Part IX-B — Detailed solutions and explanations to Various
Shipping Samples 37 M.E. Written Examinations in 2018
Reducing Field Samples of Aggregates to Testing Size 38 END NOTE
Common Field Tests for Road Embankment e 40 ABOUT THE AUTHOR
Allowable Tolerances to the Designed Level ... 42
Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 1

PART I

Quality Control Quality Assurance

Identifies defects Prevents defects

Product-oriented Improve Quality Process-oriented

Problem search Planning and systematic
and elimination activities

INTRODUCTION TO
MATERIALS ENGINEER ACCREDITATION
CONTRACTORS AND CONSULTANTS
There are two (2) types of accreditation as Materials Engineer. One is the
Government/ DPWH Materials Engineer who supervises quality assurance
of DPWH projects. This is to make sure that projects being constructed by
DPWH Contractors are in accordance with the DPWH Standard
Specifications for Highways, Bridges, and Airports Volume 2 (BLUE
BOOK). Second is the DPWH Contractors’ and Consultants’ Materials
Engineer who conducts/supervises sampling and materials testing or
commonly called quality control.
 Page 3
Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed
Page 2 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed
Commiss.ion
a. Photo copy of valid Professional Regulation
THE ACCREDITATION: (PRC) Identification Card as Civil Engineer (not
expired
Contractors’ and Consultants’ Materials Engineer and with signature)

latest Appointment (Copy of dJob

Accred_ited Materials Engineer is categorized as: Materials Engineer-1, and b. Photo copy of
Materials Engineer-I1. Both DPWH and Contractors/Consultants Materials Offer/Contract)
Engineers are categorized depending on the project cost limits.
be pasted %n the
¢. Two - 2"x 2" recent photographs (one to
one is for Notice of
Materials Engineer category depends upon the construction cost limit of the Application Form and the other
project/s to be handled. As per Department Order No. 98, Series of 2016, Examination Schedule)
Materials Engineer 1 supervises at most three (3) projects, with an
aggregate cost of not more than P200M. On the other hand, Materials d. One - 1"x 1" photograph
Engineer II supervise at most three (3) projects, with an aggregate cost of
, Quality Assurance
not more than P250M. 4. Proceed to the nearest DPWH - Regional Office
submi t the filled-up form at
and Hydrology Division (QAHD) and that an
ns. In the case
HOW TO BE AN ACCREDITED MATERIALS ENGINEER — I least one month prior to the examinatio
be able to visit his/her respective
aspiring applicant would not
requirements to:
To be accredited as Materials Engineer I (ME-1), a Civil Engineer must have region, he can submit the application form and
a raw score of at least 60 in the Written Accreditation Examination being
conducted every second Saturdays of March and September of every year in The Chief o
ion )
the Cities of Manila, Cebu, and Davao. Quality Assurance and Hj vdrology Divis
rtment of Publi c
Any nearest Regional Office of the Depa
The Application Process for Written Examination for ME-1 Works and Highways

Tl_me procedure and the things to consider when a professional engineer DPWH REGIONAL
OFFICES LOCATION/ADDRESS
wishes to be accredited as Materials Engineer - 1 are:
NCR 9nd Street, Port Area, Manila
1. Must be a CIVIL ENGINEER with an updated PRC License. CAR Engineer’s Hill, Baguio City
City,
a. It must be noted that the applicant shall not be an Aguila Road, Sevilla, San Fernando
employee or a job-order of the government at the time of L La Union
Sur,
application. This is to avoid conflict of interest and to Regional Government Center, Carig
prevent private entities from engaging the services of the a Tuguegarao City, Cagayan
engineer while still employed by the government. Please I Sindalan, San Fernando, Pampanga
n City
see Subsection 1.4 of D.O. 98, Series of 2016. IV-A Corner NIA Road, EDSA, Diliman, Quezo
A Civil Engineer who is an employee of DPWH is encourage n City
b. IV-B Corner NIA Road, EDSA, Diliman, Quezo
to take the examination on a different schedule, Rawis , Legaz pi City
\A
particularly, every second Saturdays of April and October. Fort San Pedro, Iloilo City
VI
For the Sabbath Keepers, ME written examination is moved South Road Properties, Cebu City
VII
to the following Monday of the scheduled examination day. Government Center, Baras, Palo, Leyte
FORM from DPWH Website. Fill-out VIII
2. Obtain an APPLICATION Tetuan, Zamboanga City
X
(type or print) all the applicable spaces of the Application Form City
X Engineer’s Hill, Bulua, Cagayan de Oro
legibly. See page 13 for the said form. Davao City
XI Ramon Magsaysay Avenue,
3. Attach to the Application Form the following requirements:
Page 4 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 5

XII Mabini St., cor. Alunan Avenue, Koronadal City

XIIT
Workflow Chart for the Accreditation of
Rosales Avenue, Butuan City
Contractors’ and Consultants’ Materials Engineers
5. The QAHD will be requiring you of your letter-white envelope
because they will send you the result 30 days after the conduct of Minimum Requirements: Where to File:
the examination or once it is available. Qualification:
The requirements must
a) Duly accomplished
Registered and application form be submitted to the
Application forms must be received by the DPWH Regional Office at Licensed Civil that can be secured Accreditation Committee,
least thirty (30) working days before the scheduled accreditation Engineer from any DPWH :>. thru the Chief of Quality
examination. Once your application form is received by the QAHD Regional Office Assurance and Hydrology
of the concerned Regional Office, they will endorse this to the BRS, Division of any DPWH
b) Xeroxed copy of
at least 30 days before the exam. Please note that BRS does not Regional Office.
valid PRC ID
accept direct submission of application without going through the
DPWH Regional Offices. ) Two (2) pieces of
2"x 2" photographs
You will need to go back to the DPWH Regional Office where you
f
-

submitted your application form to receive/get your Notice of

Examination (NOE) at least one week before the scheduled exam. o
Date and Place of Result of Examination: Department Order:
The Notice will confirm the date, time and place of examination.
Examination: A Department Order shall
The report of rating shall
Proceed to the designated location of the examination as early as The examination be released after 1-month be issued to examinees
6:30 am. Late applicants won't be able allowed to take the exam. shall be held on from the date of the who passed the
You will have to present the said Notice to the examination proctor/ every 2 Saturday accreditation examination. accreditation examination.
supervisor of the room where you'll take your examination. Failure of March and
to do so may cause other problems such as not being able to take the September and
examination. conducted
simultaneously in
Manila, Cebu City
Take the written examination for Materials Engineer for two (2)
and Davao City
hours (8am to 10am) on every second Saturdays of March and

i)
September every year in the location you chose in your application
form.

10. The result will be available 30 days or more after the conduct of the
I Reinstatement of
Certificates and IDs Renewal of Certificate Accreditation:
examination. You may have to call or visit the Region where you of Acereditation: of Accreditation:
submitted your application form. You may also visit or like our The accreditation shall be
The certificates and The certificate of reinstated upon request of
Facebook Page for the updates of the result of your exam. You may
1Ds of accreditation accreditation shall be the concerned materials
wait for the release of the Department Order signed by the Secretary shall be issued to renewed after three (3) engineer, supported with a
and visit the DPWH Website at www .dpwh.gov.ph. You may also applicants who meet years from the date it certification on separation
wait for the confirmation letter signed by the BRS Director the accreditation was issued upon request from government service
informing you of your result and if passed, your Certificate of criteria upon approval of the concerned signed by the head of office
Accreditation and ID will be shipped to you. of the Department Materials Engineer. or administrative officer of
Order. hisfher previous employer.
Page 6 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 7

The TOPICS in the WRITTEN WHAT TO DO ON THE DAY OF YOUR EXAMINATION

M.E. Accreditation Examination for Civil Engineers:
Be sure to be there as early as 6:30 to 7:00 AM to verify your room
1. Construction Materials Specifications assignment and other details. Bring your Notice of Examination (NOE) on
- Specifications according to DPWH Standard Specifications the day of your examination at the designated place as stated in your NOE.
Volume 2 (Blue Book) 2013 Edition; and Standard Specifications The place of your examination depends on what you have written in your
for Vertical Structures Volume 3 that is already being updated application form. You may bring with you your snack as it is not allowed to
by BRS and is soon to be released. You may acquire and leave the room during the examination.
purchase this book via our Facebook Page or if you want to
purchase it from DPWH itself, you can find it at Supply & The time of examination is 8:00 - 10:00 AM only. There are one hundred
Property Management Division (SPMD), DPWH Central Office, (100) questions that must be solved in two (2) hours. Meaning you will have
Bonifacio Drive, Port Area, Manila. to answer one (1) question in 1.20 minutes (72 seconds) only. You have very
limited time, so be sure to use it wisely.
2. Sampllng and Testing Procedures
Testing procedures according to American Association of State GUIDE AND TECHNIQUES IN ANSWERING THE WRITTEN M.E.
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) and American ACCREDITATION EXAMINATION
Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) adopted by the DPWH
Standard Specification for Highways, Bridges, and Airports, A. ANSWERING BASED ON FACTS
Volume 2 (Blue Book).
1. Provide yourself with adequate resources. Read books on topics that
3. Test Results Calculations/Interpretation/Evaluation
will be on the exam.
Practical questions on actual materials testing applications in 2. Get your facts straight. The only way factual questions can
the field. accurately test your knowledge is if they have supporting evidence
that is 100% correct. You should be able to distinguish facts from
4. DPWH Minimum Testing Requirements
- Indicated in Quality Control Program (QCP); Used as a guide on opinion.
Sharpen your memory. Recall your learnings. Test yourself.
the numbers of testing needed for the given quantity of
Read and understand the questions properly, as well as the given
materials.
choices. Don’t skip sentences.
5. Materials Quality Control Terminologies/Practices
Common terminologies and correct practices being used in the ANSWERING BASED ON GIVEN CHOICES
actual project.
Know what each multiple-choice question is asking. Read the
6. Duties and Responsibilities of Materials Engineer question properly. Don't get fooled into thinking youre asked
Practical questions about decision-making of a Materials something you aren't.
Engineer to assist the Project Engineer. It includes prevention Evaluate each answer to the multiple-choice question. The
and detection-decisions that are vital in carrying out the best of technique here is to analyze them by identifying each of their
the project. differences.
Eliminate each clearly wrong answer. This is similar to the previous
7. Quality Control Implementation/Documentation step.
If ap]l else fails, guess. Well, don't just blindly pick an answer. Make
Actual and correct quality control application and
an educated guess based on the connections of the choices to each
implementation in the project.
other.
Page8 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed

C. COMBINATION OF TECHNIQUES A AND B 1.3 Practical Examination

1. Analyze the question based on Technique A. Practical examination shall be administered to an accredited
2. Analyze the choices as mentioned in Technique B. Materials Engineer I applying for upgrading to Materials
3. If you do not get the answer, try to eliminate the choices that you Engineer I1. It shall be conducted at the Bureau of Research and
think is wrong. By doing so, you are giving a higher chance of Standards (BRS) Office in Quezon City or at a selected/identified
answering the correct one. DPWH Regional Office.
4. When solving for word-problems, you can use back-substitution to
fasten the solution. Remember, you have only two (2) hours to 1.4 DPWH Engineers and other government engineers are prohibited
answer the 100 questions. from taking the examination for the accreditation of
Contractors’/Consultants’ Materials Engineers to prevent
DEPARTMENT ORDER NO. 98, SERIES OF 2016 private entities from engaging the services of the former while
still employed by the government.
REVISED GUIDELINES ON THE ACCREDITATION OF
CONTRACTORS’ AND CONSULTANTS' 1.5 Accredited DPWH Materials Engineers who retired or decided to
MATERIALS ENGINEER leave DPWH may be considered as Contractors’/Consultants'
Materials Engineers corresponding to their rank upon request.
To ensure that only qualified and competent materials engineers will be
assigned by contractors and consultants to DPWH projects despite the 1.6 Other government engineers who were previously accredited as
significant increase in the number of projects to be implemented by the Contractors'/ Consultants' Materials Engineers but whose
Department, these Revised Guidelines on the Accreditation of accreditations were revoked per Department Order No. 60,
Contractors/Consultants' Materials Engineers are prescribed. Series of 2003 may be reinstated as Contractors’/Consultants'
Materials Engineers corresponding to their rank after separation
1.0 CRITERIA FOR ACCREDITATION from the government service upon their request, subject to the
approval of the Secretary upon recommendation of the
The ff)llo\v,vmg criteria shall be applied in the evaluation for Accreditation Committee.
accreditation of Contractors'/Consultants' Materials Engineers:
2.0 PROCEDURE FOR ACCREDITATION
1.1 Minimum Requirement
2.1 Accreditation Requirements
As a minimum requirement for accreditation of materials
engineers, the applicant must be a registered and licensed Civil Upon application for accreditation, the following must be
Engineer. This minimum requirement may be extended to submitted to the Accreditation Committee, thru the Chief of the
foreign applicants. Quality Assurance and Hydrology Division of any DPWH
Regional Office/s.
1.2 Written Examination
a. Duly accomplished application form that can be downloaded
A written examination shall be administered to all the through DPWH Website (www.dpwh.gov.ph) or can be
applicants. The raw score obtained in the examination shall be secured from any DPWH Regional Office.
converted to percentage (100% maximum) to obtain the total
score for accreditation. Photo copy of Professional Regulation Commission (PRC)
identification card.
Page 10 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 11

c. Two (2) passport size (or 2" x 2") photographs, one of which 4.0 CLASSIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'
should be pasted in the application form. MATERIALS ENGINEERS

2.2 Accreditation Examination 4.1 Materials Engineers shall be classified according to the results of
Written and Practical Examinations.
a. An accreditation examination shall be administered to all
qualified applicants. Two (2) examinations per year to be held 4.1.1 Written Examination
Applicants who got a score of 60% and above are
on the second Saturday of March and September will be given
simultaneously in Manila, Cebu City and Davao City. automatically accredited as Materials Engineer 1.

b. Applicants who applied but failed to take the examination 4.1.2 Practical Examinations
three (3) times without valid explanation shall be barred (For upgrading from Materials Engineer I to Materials 11
perpetually from taking the examination. only)

2.3 Issuance of Certificate of Accreditation a. Laboratory

The applicants will be required to demonstrate the
actual sampling and testing procedures of
a. A Certificate of Accreditation and an Accreditation ID. will be in accordance with the
construction materials
issued to all applicants who meet the accreditation criteria. their testing
existing standards to determine
capability.
b. The Certificate of Accreditation, unless revoked or suspended
for cause, shall be valid for three (3) years from the date it was
issued, and shall be renewed thereafter.
Field
The applicants will be required to demonstrate the
actual implementation of quality control supervision
3.0 RENEWAL AND UPGRADING OF ACCREDITATION and decision making in the project.

3.1 Renewal of certificate of accreditation of materials engineers Accredited Materials Engineer I may be upgraded to Materials
working abroad is not allowed. Likewise, materials engineers Engineer I by taking only a Practical Examination and not a
working in the Philippines should file their application for written examination. Applicants must obtain a total score of at
renewal of their accreditation certificate personally by presenting least 75% in the Practical Examination to qualify as Materials
their valid original Professional Regulation Commission (PRC) Engineer I
identification card.
Accredited Materials Engineer I who applied for upgrading but
3.2 Request for upgrading of classification, renewal of accreditation to Materials Engineer Il after two (2)
failed to be upgraded
certificate and reinstatement of accreditation must be addressed taking the Practical
from
successive attempts is barred
to the Chairman, Accreditation Committee for DPWH and
Examination for one (1) year and should take a refreshe r course
Contractors'/Consultants' Materials Engineers, Attention: The
Director IV, BRS, EDSA, Diliman, Quezon City. The Committee related to Materials Quality Control.
which was created to accredit DPWH and
Contractors'/Consultants' Materials Engineers shall carry out An aceredited Contractors/Consultants' Materials Engineer who
the evaluation for accreditation and recommend the issuance of enters the government service and wishes to be accredited as
certificates of accreditation for approval of the Secretary. DPWH Materials Engineer may apply for accreditation. His/her
score in the written examination will be considered and he/she
Page 12 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 13

must undergo the practical examination. However, in the case of

w?'“fim Ll
upgraded Materials Engineer Il who have undergone practical Department of Public Works and Highways
examination, he/she will be automatically conferred the same ACCREDITATION OF CONTRACTORS/CONSULTANTS’
rank. MATERIALS ENGINEERS
45 DPWH engineers who took the DPWH Materials Engineers APPLICATION FORM FOR WRITTEN EXAMINATION
examination and got a score of 60% and above but are separated Date of Examination
from government service can be accredited as
Contractors’/Consultants' Materials Engineers 1, without
undergoing practical examination for Contractors’/Consultants' Application Number
Materials Engineers. 2" x 2" Photo
with nametag
5.0 CRITERIA FOR THE ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACTORS’ AND Note: The examination
is for privately employed Civil Engineers only.
CONSULTANTS' MATERIALS ENGINEERS (Government, GOCC and Job Order Engineers are not allowed)

Accredited materials engineers may be assigned to DPWH projects,

subject to the following limits of assignment pursuant to D.O. 98, series
Name
of 2016 - Revised Guidelines on the Accreditation of Contractors’ and (First)
Consultants’ Materials Engineers. ’ PRC License Number : Valid Until
Classification " Limits of Assignment Home Address

a. Materials Engineer [ - One (1) project costing not more than Office Name
P150M, or Office Address.
- Two (2) projects, with an aggregate Position Home Tel. No.
cost of not more than P250M, or Office Tel. No. Mobile No. TIN Number
- Three (3) projects, with an aggregate Nationality Sex Civil Status Birthday
cost of not more than P200M.
Education
b. (Lim¥t to Tertiary Level Up)
Materials Engineer 11 One (1) project, no cost limit, or Year Graduated
Degree
- Two (2) projects, with an aggregate
cost of not more than P300M, or
- Three (3) projects, with an aggregate
cost of not more than P250M. Preferred Venue of Examination

[ manita D Cebu City [Joavaocity

Non-accredited materials engineers may be assigned to three (3) Date of Examination (Do no fill up):
projects, with an aggregate cost of P15.0M or below.
| certify to the correctness of the foregoing.
Signature over printed name
Date
 Page 15
ence Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
Page 14 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Refer

WORKS OF QUALITY CONTROL

PART II Quality Control work consists of all

manager or by those in his organizati
work elements carried out by the
on, which contribute to the quality
of

the output of the organization.

WORKS OF QUALITY ASSURANCE

by the
of all work elements carried out
Quality assurance work consists to the quali ty of
on, which contribute
manager or by those in his organizati Quali ty Contr ol
on. BY: J. R. Taylo r,
the output of some other organizati
System

quality control activities and specific

Therefore, in project implementation, g
(if the project is by contract) durin
steps undertaken by the contractor of mater ials and
control the quali ty
construction or maintenance, to
whic h Quali ty Assu rance refers to all the activities
workmanship,
Office nece ssary to verify, audit and
undertaken by the Implementing d/used in
and materials delivere
cvaluate the quality of work of contractor
THE MATERIALS ENGINEER IN QUALITY the project.

CONTROL IMPLEMENTATION THE PURPOSE OF QUALITY CONTROL

and extend the service life of any
QUALITY ASSURANCE « Toinsure the highest quality of work and
g to the prescribed plans
structure by constructing accordin and
the specific type of the structure
:::;;i;mtrxon. itis ;:wlmaintenance of a desired level of quality in a service specifications. The plans indicate well
cteristic in which it is built, as
'uct, especiallyy byby means
ans ofof &attentio: n to every stage of ¢ the process the specifications present the chara
ated into the work.
delivery or production. v et s gt as the materials that are to be incorpor
to
of construction materials and
QUALITY CONTROL « To check and regulate the use these , requi res
ruction. Fulfi lling
economize on the cost of const
—— g P S of mate rial s prior to and after placing to their final
. )b'].(’l"n of maintaining standards in manufactured products by testing a adequate contr ol
, every mater ial should be subjected
sample of the output against the specification. ’ position in the structure. Normally
before acce ptan ce.
to testing, inspection and verification
Tfho tufrm QUALITY is the characteristic of a product that provides a level
of performance in terms of service and life. “QUALITY” does not mean THE QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES
p?rfcct..Quality means that the project is constructed in the influence of
economics, aesthetics, safety, and performance level. 1. The Selection of Materials
of materials sources that will be
le;ahty Control is to re;ulate, This is accompanied by economical work, Information regarding the location
represented by the following*
safety, and beauty. Quality Assurance is the certainty that the materials incorporated into the work may be
areA regulated
¢ in :accordance with specifi
pecifications. WeVi are calling
i it accepte
with the inspection of the owner. ¢ prance
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 17
Page 16 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed

level of quality desired by the owner as established in the project

a. Raw materials such as soil, sand and bank or river gravel (with
little or no processing) specification. It is a check and balance system.
b. Materials that are processed without basically changing their
Contractor Quality Control is the builder’s task to regulate, test, and inspect
properties such as washed/manufactured sand, crushed rock completed
and gravel, and etc. his procedures, equipment, materials, and manpower so that the
facility will comply with requirements.
c¢. Manufactured materials such as bituminous materials, cement,
paint, structural reinforcing steel bar. r’s
d. Combination of materials that may be partly or totally Owner Quality Assurance is the owner’s task to verify that the contracto
that the complete d structur e or
manufactured, such as bituminous and Portland cement quality control system is functioning and
concrete. parts of the structure are of the specified quality.

new policy is that basic responsibility for quality control is on the

The
2. Handling and Storage of Materials
contractor. It requires establishment by each contractor of a working quality
n at all
control organization with responsibility for supervision and inspectio
Materials which are not properly handled are prone to disturbance the quality of work should be recognize d by
levels of the work. Control in
that may cause issues in the future. To avoid damage, it should be r as his inherent responsib ility whether or not
any well-meaning contracto
placed in a safe place protected from contamination or the action of document s. Most contracto rs are willing to accept
it is stated in the contract
water. Water may cause corrosion to the steel and may cause
this responsibility.
hardening to the cement. Thus, protection of the materials is highly
important and should be accessible to the project site. from
On the other hand, the owner or his representative should refrain
confined to check
interfering with the contractor’s work. His work should be
3. Sampling and Testing of Materials
or verification tests or inspection only whenever it has been ascertained that
there have been deviations from the quality control program and then the
._l\ll materials for testing require proper sampling. These are specified quality is not produced.
indicated in AASHTO and ASTM. Quality control also required
proper testing, construction method and workmanship.
Quality Control Program
Construction Quality Control — A Joint Effort of
The first step in construction quality control program is the preparation
r. He is required to submit it to the
the plan or program by the contracto
Formerly, inspection in a construction project was regarded as a PROMPT work
owner’s representative. The plan should include provisions on how the
action to assure compliance and minimize neglect of the requirements. This quantity, amount, and nature of testing work
should be inspected and the
concept is ironic considering that great emphasis is placed on the testing that would represent all the materials
to be done. It could be random
importance of awarding a contract to the most responsible bidder and then there’s a
and/or quantity testing which means for every certain quantity,
to imply that he cannot be relied upon to perform his obligation. tested that will represent that certain portion of
number that needs to be
should also indicate whether a project laborator y will be set up
has materials, It
However, recently a new concept of construction quality control
to facilitate testing.
emerged. This calls for a two-fold program:
Minimum Testing Requirement
1. Quality control by the builder/contractor:
2. Quality assurance by the owner
Quantity stated in the program of works is the basis of minimum testing
and
requirement for each project. The requirements specify the kind
By this concept, Construction Quality Control is a system which involves the minimum
number of tests for each item and sizes. This indicates only
the joint but independent efforts of the owner and contractor to achieve the ent
and shall not be the only basis of number of testing. When a Governm
Page 18 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Page 19

representative inspected a project and there is doubt in a test, another the work accomplished per week of operation. Occasional inspection
testing can be done immediately. has to be done especially if the IO has many projects being handled.
Early operation is essential.
Another Testing of Manufactured Materials
Project monitoring requires dedication and public service on the side
Samples obtained from the manufacturer such as cement, asphalt and steel of the government. Aside from that, inspectors require expertise and
bar shall be tested at the laboratories. knowledge on the project. Physical presence is also required
especially on vertical structures due to variety of materials and
4. Proper Construction Methods works to be accomplished.

Construction methods come in many different ways. Usually, it The purpose of inspection is to ensure that the materials and
comes with experience and practical methods but for some workmanship is being done by the hired contractor. That is the very
materials, methods of construction are given by instructions for each reason why proper inspection should be done religiously and be
work. The following are the techniques in project handling and carefully planned per week to assess the progress reports, and if the
construction methods. project will hit the target 100% accomplishment date; and if not,
they will have to face sanctions such as liquidated damages.
a. Technical personnel assigned in the project should be
knowledgeable and responsible enough to the project. How Quality is Being Controlled

b. Project Supervision shall be established first. The hierarchy Quality is controlled during construction by testing and inspection of the
starts from the Project Engineer, Project Inspector, Materials quality of materials and the method of construction, the latter commonly
Engineer, Safety Engineer, Construction Foreman, Skilled and known as workmanship. It is necessary to inspect construction and do the
Unskilled Laborers. required tests at the different stages to assure quality, rather than make
only one final inspection when the project is completed.
c. Construction methods shall be done for each work indicated in
the design. If inspection is not done on time, it may be too late to measure quality since
some work is covered up with the work. For example, degree of compaction
d. The materials shall pass the required specifications. of the subgrade cannot be checked when there is already a pavement on top.

e. Continuous quality control should be done in all items of work Testing and inspection to some degree should always be carried out. It is
as the construction progresses. impractical to test completely all the work done. Different types of
construction procedure demand different types and amount of inspection
f. Proper equipment for each work item shall be used. and testing. For example, in the production of aggregates, emphasis on the
initial and early operation is essential.
g. Materials quantity shall be well provided. Scarcity of one
material can be the basis of delay for each work that may affect Once the operation is producing the desired quality, occasional verification
other items schedule. test may be adequate to assure continued satisfactory results. This is true
of most mass or repeated operations, such as paving or building construction
5. Inspection and Project Monitoring works demands more constant checking due to the greater variety of
materials of work. Future results are less predictable on these types of work.
Project inspection is vital in project monitoring. The progress The type and quantity of tests and inspection must suit the particular work.
reports require inspection of the actual work being carried out, and
e . L7 §

Page 20 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 21

Although testing alone does not constitute quality control, it is necessary As stated in part I, there are two (2) types of accreditation as Materials
that some tests must be done. It is because the standard of quality of Engineer. One is the Government/DPWH Materials Engineer who
materials is, most often, specified quantitatively. For example, the supervises quality assurance of DPWH projects. Second is the DPWH
minimum yield point required of steel is 60,000 psi. Without testing, no one and Consultants’ Materials Engineer who conducts/supervises
Contractors’
can say definitely if the standard of quality of such materials is satisfied or
sampling and materials testing or commonly called quality control.
not. If anyone attempts to evaluate quality without testing, he is taking a
big risk because he is guessing.
BASIC DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF
Engineers should not be guessing. A CONTRACTOR’S MATERIALS ENGINEER:
The other quality control activity, inspection, is done on work items not Responsible for the sampling, testing, inspection and submission of
subrlect to testing. Some of these are placing of forms or reinforcement, quality control reports data.
curing of concrete or building up an embankment in layers. Inspection, like
testing, should be done at the proper time as the work progresses. The Prepare design mixes for concrete and asphalt mixtures.
quantity and location of concrete reinforcement or the thickness of
embankment layers cannot be determined after construction is finished. Accomplish, update, and keep the test report records such as
materials logbook.

THE PROJECT DEVELOPMENT IN DPWH Ensure that the samples are properly cured by standard procedures

The project starts at project preparation from the Implementing Office Ensure that the field tests are adequately equipped so that the
depending on their prioritization. Once given the budget from the General
progress of work will not be impeded to laboratory testing and non-
Appropriations Act (GAA) for the year, the identified project will be performance of the test should not be the cause of delay in project
surveyed and designed by the Planning and Design Section for District implementation.
Engineering Office or Planning and Design Division for the Regional Office.
Once approved, the Program of Works (POW) and Detailed Unit Price Recommend on whether the quality of materials to be used in the
Analysis (DUPA) will be prepared. This will be the basis of the Approved Standard
project is acceptable and pass the requirement of DPWH
Budget for the Contract (ABC). The contractors will bid for this ABC in a
Specifications (Volumes 2 and 3)
cheaper price. The lowest bidder will eventually win the bidding as long as
he and the bid are qualified. The Implementing Office (I0) will issue a Recommend corrective and remedial measures to improve the
Notice of Awards and Notice to Proceed (NTP) to the contractor. quality and correct the unsatisfactory condition of materials.

The 10 will provide a Project Engineer, Project Inspector, Materials corrective measures to improve the quality of
Recommend
Engineer, and/or Resident Engineer from the government side. The
completed works.
Contractor's Materials Engineer will also be assigned by the Contractor
itself that would act as the Quality Control Implementer. Recommend the acceptance of the completed works as well as advise
the Project Engineer (Government or Contractor's side) on the
The Materials Engineer is the one who controls the sampling and rejection of the unsatisfactory materials.
construction materials testing of projects being implemented such as roads
and roadsides, bridges, and slope protection. He will see to it that the Note: Quality Control is a joint undertaking by the contractor and the
materials being used in those projects are in accordance with the approved
Implementing Office (DPWH, Region and/or District Engineering Office).
_specificauons of the state. If the material has no identified specification, it
is understood that the highest quality shall be used.
Page 22 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 23

OTHER IMPORTANT INFORMATION cannot accommodate such test, the contractors who wish to engage
the services of accredited private testing laboratories should be
for the Contractor’s Materials Engineer required to obtain first a certification from the BRS or the concerned
DPWH Regional or District Testing Laboratory that it does not have
You may download these DPWH Department Orders in DPWH Website
the capability to undertake the desired tests.
1. Department Order 11 Series of 2017 requires the Contractor to Department Order 135, series of 1993 states that in the instances
provide minimum testing equipment in the technical component of
that the DPWH does not have the capacity to perform the test which
the bid. It is the duty of the Materials Engineer to secure this and
are highly technical in nature due to absence of the said
shall be provided by his contractor.
sophisticated testing equipment, test reports from other private
testing laboratory shall be honored.
Department Order 13, series of 1987 states that the Materials
Engineer shall be in-charge in the sampling of the testing of the The Materials Engineer shall prepare the necessary concrete mix
materials. He shall be accompanied in the actual testing by the
design or job-mix design prior to the start of the project that would
Government Materials Engineer or a representative of the
pass or surpass the specifications requirements. This has to be
implementing office who will serve as the witness for their
approved by the Government Materials Engineer.
assurance.

The Materials Engineer shall provide the Government PE and ME

Department Order 213, series of 2004 states that the materials shall
the monthly status of tests. This indicates the accomplished testing
be tested prior to its incorporation to the works. The materials
of materials for the month based on the QCP.
engineer shall ensure that only materials conforming to the
specification requirements of DPWH should be allowed to be used.
. Before the pouring of concrete on a prepared forms or base, the
Materials Engineer shall request and secure a pouring permit from
The Materials Engineer shall prepare the Quality Control Program
the Government ME or PE.
(QCP) based on the approved Minimum Testing Requirement (MTR)
as stated and quantified in the Program of Works (POW) prepared
. All batching plants of concrete or asphalt that supplies batches to
by the Implementing Office/s such as District Engineering Office
DPWH projects must have the capability to provide high quality of
(DEO), Regional Office (RO), and Project Management Office
products. And that is the reason why DO 253, Series of 2003 —
(PMO). He shall secure a copy of the Detailed Unit Price Analysis
Accreditation of Asphalt and Concrete Batching Plants has been
(DUPA) of the Project to estimate the number of tests based on the
issued. All batching plants that are going to supply concrete or
quantity of work to be done.
asphalt in DPWH projects must secure an accreditation from
DPWH-BRS.
The materials engineer is required to bring the materials to be
tested to the accredited private testing laboratory as approved by
the Government ME. Department Order 26, series of 1989, Other Policies that will need to consider
commonly known as accreditation of private testing laboratory to effect Quality Control Compliance:
certifies the utilization of private testing laboratories who will act
as the testing center to accommodate the voluminous woks of the M.C. No. 38, Series of 1981, the Certificate of Quality Control
10. This has been amended by DO 48, Series of 2012; and further Assurance that will be provided by the DPWH Materials Engineer
superseded by D.O. 22, Series of 2018. and the Project Engineer.

DO 203 Series of 2003 states that the materials must be tested first M.C. No. 33, series of 1981, Provision of Laboratory Facilities,
at a DPWH laboratory. In the case that the DPWH laboratory Equipment and Personnel for Quality Control and D.O. No. 80,
 Page 25
Page 24 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
the schedule
series of 1990, Inclusion of the Minimum Materials Testing a DPWH Laboratory. This Department Order indicates
l.
Equipment in the Pre-qualification of Contractors. of laboratory fees for certain test for a particular materia

Department Order Issuances from DPWH

M.O. No. 80, Series of 1978 states the accomplishment of Quality Search and download these
Control Logbook to be done by the Contractor's Materials Engineer. Website: www.dpwh.gov.ph

Accomplishment of the Project Logbook and Materials Logbook DO 11 Series of 2017 — Minimum Testing Equipment in the Bid
(Quality Control Logbook as stated above). DO 13, Series Of 1987 — Sampling
oration
DO 218, Series Of 2004 — Testing Prior To Incorp
Testing Lab
Availability of the following project documents in the project site or DO 22, Series Of 2018 — Accreditation of Private
o

Of BRS, RO and
field/District/Regional Project Management Office: DO 203, Series Of 2003 — Utilizing First the Use
District Engineering Office
of Materials
a) Approved Plans and Specifications DO 135 Series Of 1993 — Testing and Acceptance
Concrete
b) Program of Work with Detailed Estimates DO 253, Series of 2003 — Accreditation of Asphalt and
c) Contract Documents Batching Plants
d) Change Order and/or Variation Order, if applicable. and Charges for
DO 69, Series of 2015 — Revised Schedule of Fees
e) Latest Statement of Work Accomplished Laboratory Testing of Construction Materials
f) -Monthly Accomplishment Report
g Design/Trial/Job Mixes, if applicable

D.O. No. 29, series of 1994 and D.O. No. 203, Series of 2003 -
Utilizing First the Services of the Bureau of Research and
Standards, Regional and District Laboratories of the DPWH in
Testing of Samples of Construction Materials.

D.O. No. 253, series of 2003, Accreditation of Batching Plants

Asphalt and Portland Cement Concrete.

D.O. No. 55, series of 2012, Amendment to D.O. No. 42, series of
2006, relative to the limits of assignment of accredited Materials
Engineers of the Contractors and Consultants. This amendment will
be amended in time. Further, this has already been superseded and
amended by D.O. 98, Series of 2016 that is specified in Part I.

Department Order 69, Series of 2015 — Revised Schedule of Fees and

Charges for Laboratory Testing of Construction Materials is very
important for Contractors who would like to test their materials in
Page 26 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 27

b. moisture content 3 units

PA RT I II 10. Steel bar 1 sample per 10T 1m
11. Steel sheet 1 sample per 100 3 pes 60mm x 60mm
(galvanized) sheets

COMMON FIELD TESTING 15 Gabin am

12. Wire strand 1 sample per 20T 2m

14. Paints 1 sample per 100 1- 4L can

- i cans
(In Sltll) 15. Joint — filler (pre — 1-400mm x 400mm
molded)
| 16. Curing compound | 1L
SAMPLING FOR MINIMUM TESTING 17. Concrete cylinder 1 sample per 75 1 set (3 cylinders)
m?
REQUIREMENTS 18. Concrete beam 1 sample per 75 1 set (3 cylinders)
m? or 1 day
[ MINIMUM pouring
MATERIALS rENSI'I"::z QUANTITY/VOLUME OF 19. Concrete core 5 ho:{es /f;or every
REQUIREMENTS MATERIALS FOR EACH = m/lane
SAMPLE SUBMITTED 20. Asphalt core 1 core for every
1. Cement 1 sample per 10 kg 100m
2000 bags 21. Water
2. Asphaltic material | 1 sample per 40T 5L a. Chemical analysis 500 ml
or 200 drums b. Sediment load 500 ml
3. Asphalt mix 1 sample per 20 ke ] analysis
130T 22. Structural 1. samplewer 50T Reduced section as
4. Aggregates steel/sheet sampie per prescribed
a. coarse aggregate i Ea{"ple pfr 70 kg 23. Hydrated lime 1 sample per
|b. fine aggregate 1,500 m! 50 kg 100T
5. Soil aggregates
3 glaS§ificatxon 1 sample per 20 ll:g TABLE FOR LIMITATIONS AND VARIATION IN
. Routinary tests 1,500 m? 50 kg
c. MDR test and CBR 50 kg BLUE BOOK
?‘. Non — Reinforced 2 pipes mil1j/0.5"n 2 pipes ITEM 1TEM ITEM | ITEM
oncrete Pipes of no. of pipes 200 201 h 203 300
7. Reinforced Concrete | 1 sample per 50 1 pipe (1 m length)
Pipes pipes or 2% of # Abrasion 50% 50% 5 45%
of pipes loss max max max
8.Steel pipe 1 sample per 500 | 2 pes of 100 mm long taken Plastic
(galvanized) lengths from both ends w/ thread index 8 12% 6% 4% to
9. Concrete hollow i max | max 9%
blocks (CHB) gl pe
a. strength 10,000 units 3 units
Page 28 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 29
o {os n 28, yr73
Liquid limit | 30% 35% 26% | 25% 35% FIELD TESTING AS PART OF THE DESIGN
| max max max max max
Permitted In building a structure, it is very important to know the properties of the
variation underlying structures which is critical in the design of the structure to be
from design +10m +15mm, built on seil. There are numerous ways to know these underlying structure
THICKNES #20ma | -5mm propertiesbelow the ground. Very quick to use are the Geophysical Surveys
S OF but are expensive. One of most common to use is the Standard Penetration
LAYER Test (SPT). As a materials engineer, it is a common knowledge that we need
Permitted to have the idea on the Geotechnical Engineering side of construction.
variation
;
from design + 20mm, | +10mm, ) +15mm,
-30mm | -20mm -5mm The physical survey is that part of site investigation which aims to
LEVEL OF |
determine the physical properties of the ground. These are required:
SURFACE
Permitted
surface 1. to classify the soil into groups of materials which will exhibit broadly
irregularity similar engineering behavior; and
measured 30mm 20mm | 5mm 5mm 2. to determine parameters which are required for engineering design
by 3-m calculations.
straight
edge Some soils, for example clays, may readily be sampled. If good-quality
Permitted samples can be obtained, then laboratory testing offers the best method of
variation .
determining soil and rock parameters under carefully controlled conditions.
from design +0.5% +0.3% | £0.2% +0.2%
cross fall or Sampling techniques will be discussed later. But other types of ground are
camber either difficult or impossible to sample and test successfully. In such cases,
Permitted in situ tests should be used.
variation
from design The following types of ground conditions are examples of those where in situ
+0.1% +0.1% | +0.1% +0.1%
longitudinal testing is either essential or desirable.
grade over
25m length 1. Very soft or sensitive clays. Good quality samples are hard to get.
California Traditionally, it was thought that piston sampling was required.
30% 80“'/w 80% 100% 80'%
Bearing More recent work has suggested that even greater care is required.
Ratio min min | min min
These samplers are relatively expensive and are time-consuming to
operate. Therefore, in situ tests are often used to determine
Field testing as part of quality control is vital in quality-checking of a
undrained parameters.
construction project. It involves careful planning and supervision in order
to attain its success. On the other hand, field testing as part of the design is 2. Stoney soils. With the possible exception of very stiff clay containing
very critical because it is the part where we are identifying the past, present, scattered gravel (for example, clayey tills) which can be sampled by
and the future of the project in terms of stability and life span. We are careful rotary coring with either mud or polymer flush, stoney soils
identifying its past experiences such as the site geology. We are also testing are almost impossible to sample, because the stones damage both
the present phenomena including its properties. Finally, we are also the cutting shoe and the soil as a sampler is driven. Such materials
may be tested in situ either using dynamic penetration testing, or
recognizing the future worst-case scenario including the mitigations.
geophysical techniques.
Page 30 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 31

2. Sands and gravels. Sand sampling is possible (for example, using penetration resistance is corrected, the reference vertical stress level is 1
freezing techniques, or a piston sampler in a mud-filled borehole), kg/em?, or 100 kPa. The penetration resistance corrected both for rod energy
but tends to be expensive, and to yield relatively highly disturbed and for overburden pressure is termed (Npso. Skempton (1986) suggests
samples (since even relatively minor strains imposed by sampling
that for relatively recently deposited normally consolidated sand it may be
have the effect of destroying the soil’s ‘memory’ of loading). Loose
and uncemented gravels can also be sampled using large-diameter reasonable to assume:
tubes but suffer similarly from disturbance. Therefore, in situ
testing is commonly used in granular soils. Typically, testing is where D_= relative density of the sand. A suitable
carried out using either field geophysics, or penetration testing. overburden correction chart is given by Liao and
When accurate values of compressibility are required, then plate Whitman (1985).
testing may be used.
For many other applications the use of an overburden correction may not be
4. Weak, fissile or fractured rock. The strength and compressibility of necessary, because the increase in strength and stiffness caused by effective
fractured rock is controlled by the discontinuities (for example, stress increase is arguably reflected in an increased penetration resistance.
joints, fissures, faults) within it.
In using the SPT in design it is important to look in detail at the origins of
methods of calculation, to see how they were derived, before deciding which
The Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
corrections are appropriate.
The ‘Standard Penetration Test', commonly known as the ‘SPT’, is carried
out in a borehole, by driving a standard ‘split spoon’ sampler (Please see the
We mentioned the
Figures on the succeeding pages) using repeated blows of a 63.5kg (140 1b.)
hammer falling through 762mm
y R SPT here in a very
(30 in.). The hammer is operated at the top
of the borehole and is connected to the split spoon by rods. The split spoon
ORIVE HaMMER BN o Vo brief introduction
SOAFFOLD, PULLING WIRE because a separate
is lowered to the bottom of the hole and is then driven a distance of 450mm
5 ) """"‘" A book will need to
(18 in), and the blows are counted, normally for each 76mm (3 in)) of
penetration. ” - tackle this due to its
complexity and
complicated interpre-
At the end of driving the split spoon is pulled from the base of the hole, and
the sample is preserved in an airtight container. The penetration resistance tation and evaluation.
(N) is the number of blows required to drive the split spoon for the last
300mm (1 ft) of penetration. The penetration resistance during the first 150
mm (6 in.) of penetration is ignored, because the soil is considered to have
been disturbed by the action of boring the hole.

We have already noted that the measured penetration resistance, N, should

be corrected for hammer energy, to give the standard value of N. In addition, Schematic diagram of standard penetration test
since the SPT brings the soil to failure, and because the strength of granular
SUMMARY:
soil will be strongly dependent on effective stress level, it will be necessary
a. A test-drive for 300 mm penetration of a split tube sampler with a shoe.
to correct ‘N’ values from sands and from gravels to a standard overburden b. N-value indicates the number of drives for 30cm penetration of split
pressure level when the test is used to determine relative density. Where tube sampler.
 Page 32 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 33

COMMON FIELD TESTS AS PART OF Increment - part of a sample. It is sampling of a material in a lot between
the previous one and the present one.
QUALITY CONTROL
lot - a sizable isolated quantity of bulk material from a single source,
METHOD OF SAMPLING for AGGREGATES
assumed to have been produced by the same process (for example, a day’s

Sampling is equally as important as the testing and the sampler shall use
production or a specific mass of volume).
every precaution to obtain samples that will show the nature and
condition test portion - a quantity of the material of sufficient size extracted from
of the materials which they represent to the whole lot.
the larger field sample, by a procedure designed to ensure accurate
APPROVAL OF SOURCE - Samples are taken and tested to representation of the field sample, and thus of the unit sampled.
provide
approval of a material that will be included to the project as proposed
by the
contractor. This is supported by Department Order No. 41, Series unit- a batch or finite subdivision of a lot of bulk material (for example, a
of 2008,
“Approval of Materials Sources in the Philippines. truck load or a specific area covered).

JOB CONTROL - Samples are taken on a day to day basis during

production PROCEDURE:
or use of material, and included samples of material from approve
d sources,
production plants and at the project site. Job control samples are INSPECTION - The material shall be inspected to determine discernible
taken by
the user to insure adequate qufllxty’control. variations. The seller shall provide equipment needed for safe
appropriate inspection and sampling.
ACCEPTANCE - These are samples taken from a finished product to
determine compliance with the specifications. An example SAMPLING - The procedures for selecting locations or times for
would be sampling are described in Practice D 3665-Standard Practice for
pavement coring. The objective of acceptance sampling is
to determine a Random Sampling of Construction Materials.
course action -- reject or accept the work. Acceptance is
not a job control
technique. A. METHOD OF SOIL SAMPLING OF AGGREGATES

Care shall be taken in sampling: Sampling from a Flowing Aggregate Stream (Bins or Belt
- To avoid segregation of coarse aggregate and bituminous mortar Discharge) - Select units to be sampled by a random method from
- To prevent contamination by dust or other foreign matter the production. Obtain at least three approximately equal
increments, selected at random from the unit being sampled, and
DEFINITION OF TERMS: combine to form a field sample whose mass equal or exceeds the
minimum recommended. Take each increment from the entire cross
field sample -a quantity of the material to be tested of sufficien section of the material as it is being discharged. It is usually
t size to
provide an acceptable estimate of the average quality of a unit. Field
sample necessary to have a special device constructed for use at each
is composed of three or more increments chosen at random from the material
particular plant.
as it is loaded or unloaded from the truck. Extract test portions from the
field sample by quartering or splitting.
Sampling from the Conveyor Belt - Select units to be sampled by a
random method from the production. Obtain at least three
Page 34 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 35

approximately equal increments, selected at random, from the unit taking care to exclude any underlying material. Clearly mark the
being sample and combined to form a field sample whose mass specific areas from which each increment to be removed; a metal
equals or exceeds the minimum recommended. Stop the conveyor template placed over the area is a definite aid in securing
belt while the sample increments are being obtained. Insert two approximately equal increment weights.
templates, the shape of which conforms to the shape of the belt in
the aggregate stream on the belt, and space them such that the SAMPLING FOR BITUMINOUS MIXTURE
material contained between them will yield an increment of the
required weight. Carefully scoop all and collect the fines on the belt Sampling from a Conveyor Belt - Stop the conveyor belt.
with a brush and dust pan and add to the container. Randomly select at least three areas of approximately equal size on
the belt for sampling. In each of the locations to be sampled, insert
Sampling from Stockpile or Transportation Units - Avoid sampling templates, the shape of which conform to the shape of the belt.
coarse aggregate or mixed coarse and fine aggregate from the From the selected areas obtain approximately equal increments of
stockpiles or transportation unit whenever possible, particularly material which will form a Sample whose quantity equals or
when the sampling is done for the purpose of determining aggregate exceeds the minimum recommended (See Part 4). Carefully scoop
properties that may be dependent upon the grading of the sample. all material between templates into a suitable container.
If circumstances make it necessary to obtain samples from the
stockpile of coarse aggregate or a combined coarse and fine Sampling from Truck Transports - By a random method, select
aggregate, design a sampling plan for the specific case under the units to be sampled from the production of materials delivered.
consideration. Obtain at least three approximately equal increments. Avoid
sampling the extreme top surface. Select at random from the unit
In sampling material from stockpiles, it is very difficult to ensure being sampled and combine to form a field sample whose quantity
unbiased samples, due to the segregation which often occurs when equals or exceeds the minimum recommended in Minimum Testing
material is stockpiled, with coarser particles rolling to the outside Requirement of the Blue book. The sample may be obtained by
base of the pile. collecting the increments with a scoop or shovel.

When power equipment is not available, samples from stockpiles Sampling from the Roadway Prior to Compaction - When only
should be made up of at least three increments taken from the top one sample is to be taken, obtain at least three approximately equal
third, at the mid-point, and at the bottom third of the volume of the increments, selected at random from the unit being sampled, and
pile. A board shoved vertically into the pile just above the sampling combine to form a field sample whose quantity equals or exceeds
point aids in preventing further segregation. the minimum recommended.

SAMPLING FROM ROADWAY (Bases and Sub bases) - Sample When three or more samples are to be taken in order to evaluate a
units selected by a random method from the construction. Obtain at lot of material, utilize a random method to determine the locations
least three approximately equal increments, selected at random to be sampled. Select a sample consisting of approximately three
from the unit being sampled, and combine to form a field sample equal increments, from each location, assuring the quantity of each
whose mass equals or exceeds the minimum recommended. Take sample exceeds the minimum recommended in Part IV of this book.
all increments from the roadway for the full depth of the material,
Page 36 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed

Take all increments or samples from the roadway fort the full depth 3 NUMBER AND QUANTITIES OF FIELD SAMPLES
of the material, taking Care to exclude any underlying material.
When necessary, place templates on the existing roadway to 3.1. The number of field samples (obtained by one of the methods
exclude any underlying material. Clearly mark the specified area described) required depends on the criticality of, and variation in,
the properties to be measured. Designate each unit from which a
from which each increment or sample is to be removed. Templates
field sampler is to be obtained prior to sampling. The number of
which are placed before the mixture is spread will be a definite aid
field samples from the production should be sufficient to give the
securing increments of approximately equal mass. desired confidence in test results.

Sampling from a Skip Conveyor Delivering Mixture to Bin Storage . The quantities depend on the type and number of tests to which the
- Select the unit to be sampled from the skip conveyor by a random material is to be subjected, and sufficient material must be
method based on the bin’s storage capacity. Stop the skip conveyor obtained to provide for the proper execution of these tests.
Generally, the amount will provide adequate material for routine
immediately following pug mill discharge. Dig a furrow 150 mm (6
testing. Extract test portions from the field sample by quartering
in.) in depth extending from the top to the bottom of the pile. or splitting in a similar manner to Practice C 702 Practice for
Obtain three approximately equal increments from the top, middle, Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size or as required
and bottom of the furrow depositing each increment in a container. by other applicable test methods.
The combined increments should form a field sample whose
quantity equals or exceeds the minimum recommended in Table 1. SHIPPING SAMPLES

4.1. Transport samples in containers so constructed as to preclude loss

Sampling from a Funnel Device Feeding a Conveyor for
or contamination of any part of the sample, or damage to the
o

Mixture Delivery to Storage - Select the units to be sampled from contents from mishandling during shipment.
the funnel device by a random method based on the bin’s maximum
storage capacity. Obtain at least three approximately equal . Samples shall have individual identification attached giving the
increments of material for each sample by passing a bucket or a information required by the sample user. Typical information that
pan or other suitable container across the full flow of materials as may be useful could include, but not necessarily be limited to, the
it drops from the funnel device onto the conveyor. The combined
following:
portions should form a field sample whose quantity equal or
4.2.1.Job for which the material is to be used, giving project number,
exceeds the minimum recommended in Part IV of this book. highway route number. County, and other pertinent
geographical information.
Sampling from Roadway after Compaction — Select the units to 4.2.2.Source of sample, including for plant-mixed samples the name
be sampled by a random method from the material in place. Obtain of owner or operator of plant, location of plant, type of plant,
at least three approximately equal samples selected at random size of batch, and identification of bitumen and mineral
aggregates used in the mixture,
from the unit being sampled. Test each sample and average the test
4.2.3.Point at which sampled, for samples taken from roadway, both
results to determine the acceptability. Take all samples from the by station number and location transversely in pavement; also,
roadway for the full depth of the material. Taking care to exclude whether sampled from completed pavement, windrow, etc.,
any underlying material. Each increment shall be obtained by
coring, sawing, or other methods in such a manner as to ensure a 4.2.4.Quantity represented,
minimum disturbance of the material. 4.2.5.The person conducting sampling and name of sample,
4.2.6.Date of most recent mixing, if road-mixed,
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 39
Page 38

4.2.7.Date sampled, fine aggregates, which discharge alternatively to each side of the
4.2.8.The company submitting the sample and its address, splitter.
4.2.9.Purpose for which sample was taken, and
4.2.10. For whom report is to be made.
METHOD B — QUARTERING
NUMBER AND QUANTITIES OF FIELD SAMPLES: The number of field
samples from the production should be sufficient to give the desired Place the field sample on a hard clean, level surface and mix the
confidence in test results. material thoroughly by turning the entire sample over three times.
With the last turning, shovel the entire sample into a conical pile by
REDUCING FIELD SAMPLES OF depositing each shovelful on top of the preceding one. Carefully
flatten the conical pile to a uniform thickness and diameter. Divide
AGGREGATES TO TESTING SIZE
the flattened mass into four equal quarters with a shovel or trowel
This method covers the reduction of field samples to the appropriate size for and remove two diagonally opposite quarters, including all fine
testing, employing techniques that are intended to minimize variations in material, and brush the cleared spaces clean. Successively mix and
measured characteristics between the test samples selected and the field quarter the remaining material until the sample is reduced to the
sample. desired size.
These methods provide for reducing the large sample obtained in the field
to a convenient size for conducting-a number of tests to the smaller portion
is most likely to be a representation of the field sample. Longitudinal sectiomng
——
¢ Method A — MECHANICAL SPLITTER
Bulk dividead into two parts
Bulk sample powder/granules

One part is taken and

Sccond Longitudinal sectioning
Mocess repeated il at right angle to the first
At Least nlied sample is obtained
Tvelve
Openings
P
Divide into four parts

Method of Reducing Samples by Quartering

Sample splitter shall have an even number of equal widths chutes,
but not less than a total of eight for coarse aggregates, or twelve for
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 41
Page 40 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed

FIELD TESTS . Remove/clean the extracted soil materials from the hole and
COMMON
measure the actual in-place thickness of the material.
1. COMPACTED SOIL AGGREGATES 5. Check against the plans of the result of the actual measured in-
placed thickness of soil items if it meets the design requirements.
a. SOIL TEST PITTING (For verification of Base/Subbase Course 5. If the result of the thickness measurement meets the requirement
Tlckvl1ess? of the plan, proceed to another hole at a distance at the option of the
Engineer.
If the result of the thickness measurement fails to meet the
requirement of the plan, conduct an extensive to verification
determine the extent of thickness deficiency. Conduct a backward
and forward diggings at a distance opted by the Engineer to have
thorough evaluation of the deficiency.
Prior to final decision on the acceptability and the conduct of
extensive digging if the test pitting fails to meet the thickness
requirement, consider the tolerances for the thickness specified in
the DPWH Standard Specifications for Soil Item of Works.
If the Engineer have doubts on the quality of the in-place materials,
bigger holes must be conducted to obtain representative soil samples
to be brought to the testing laboratory for verification of the quality
of in-place materials.
Purpose:
Allowable Tolerances to the Designed Level and
For verification of P
in-place thickness and quality
quality of soil
m materialsins Transverse Slopes for a Compacted Aggregate Subbase
(embankment, subbase, base) on shoulder and road carriageway
compliance with the requirements of the plans and materials specifications.

Apparatus: Permitted variation from design

Thickness of Layer
Digging tools, Measuring Tape

Procedures: Permitted variation from design

Level of Surface - - -~ -
1. Select a section of compacted prepared road carriageway that is
reported to have finished grade elevation meeting the requirements
of the plans. Permitted Surface Irregularity
2. Diglexcavate a hole with a diameter that can visibly identify and Measured by 3-m straight edge
measure the in-place materials.
3. Excavate up to the full depth of in-place soil materials as stated in Permitted variation from design
the typical section of the plans. Cross-fall or Camber
Page 42 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 43
Maximum stability is dependent upon reduction of voids to a
Permitted variation from design minimum. This will result in a maximum density and it will admit
+0.1%
Longitudinal Grade over 25 m length - - - - - - minimum water when saturated. Accurate determination of optimum water
content and precise control of compactive effort and water content during
construction are the most practical method of arriving at the end.
ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES TO THE DESIGNED LEVEL
If the soil is compacted at the optimum water content, practically all
Compacted Aggregate Subbase Course - Item 200 settlement occurs during construction because of the lubricating moisture
Permitted variation from design and adequate compactive effort.

Thickness of Layer---===-==---ssssrsssesnessmsesnsieenescnannns +20 mm Permeability is lowered because the voids are reduced.

Compacted Aggregate Base Course - Item 201 DETERMINATION OF DENSITY OF SOIL IN-PLACE
Permitted variation from design
BY THE SAND-CONE METHOD
T O B e e (AASHTO T 191)
+10 mm
(ASTM DESIGNATION D 1556)
Compacted Aggregate Surface Course - Item 300
Permitted variation from design +15 mm Density of Soil - weight/mass per unit volume
- strength is dependent upon density
Thickness of Layer-+=-+=--=--===ssssenesmramrmcrecrmcnre
e ceeeesenaes 5mm
Field Density Test
A control test in embankment, etc. construction to ensure adequate
FIELD DENSITY and COMPACTION TEST compaction.

Adequate Compaction results to:

a. Minimal Future settlement
b. Greater stability
c. Greater resistance to water absorption

Field Density Requirement

Item 104 — Embankment At least one group of three in-
situ density test for each 500
Item 200 — Aggregate Subbase Course mZof each layer of compacted
fill or fraction thereof
Item 201 — Aggregate Base Course

Specification Requirement, Min. % degree of Compaction

BASIC AIM OF COMPACTION: (a) Base and Sub-base materials — 100% Min.
To produce a soil mass that will satisfy the three criteria: (b) Embankment & Sub-Grade material — 95% Min.
1. Settlement
2. Permeability Apparatus /Materials:
3. Stability 1. Density Apparatus
Page 44 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol, 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Poged
2. Sand Moisture Content of Material removed from the test hole:
3. Balances
4. Drying Equipment W1-W2 . 100%
5. Digging tools
w2
6. Calibration bucket
7. Soil pans, MC cans, plastic bags, labeling materials Where:
8. Guide plate
W =% of moisture of material from test hole
Wi = moist mass of material from hole sample, in grams
EXAMPLE OF FIELD DENSITY TESTING
W = dry mass of material from hole sample, in grams
WORK SHEET FOR FIELD DENSITY TEST
Lab. No. 415-18
Unit Weight of Air-Dry Sand
1. Container full of water, kg <18 9 8.267
2. Container, kg s 5.488
3. Water, kg (1) - (2) s 2.779
4. Container, m3 (3) / 1000 R 0.002779 Max.dry
5. Container filled with air dry sand, kg - - - 9.300 density
6. Air-dry sand, kg (5) — (2) s 3.812 (ygmax) T Compaction
7. Unit weight of dry sand, kg/m3 (6) / (4) - - - 1372
curve

Actual Moisture Content 1 11

8. Container + wet soil, g
Zero air voids
s 123.2 140.5

—>
9. Container + dry soil, g M S 118.7 135.3 (Saturation
10. Moisture, g (8) —(9) s 4.5 5.2 curve)
11. Container, g Se- 291 29.4

Dry density (y)

12. Dry Soil, g (9) - (11) 89.6 105.9
13. Actual Moisture content, % (10) / (1).)x100-- 5.0 4.9
14. Average actual moisture content, % = =-------- 4.95

Field Density
15. Material taken from hole, kg Optimum
miwis 4.885
16. Sand to fill hole, kg re 3.885 moisture content
17. Volume of hole, m? (16) / (7) =i 0.0028 (OMC)
18. Wet unit weight, kg/m? (15) / (17) b 1745
19. Dry unit weight, kg/m® (18) / 1 + (14) / 100- - - 1663 <——Dry side 5[ < Wet side
20. Laboratory Compaction (of optimum)
test data under Lab. No. 415-95:
(a) Maximum dry density, kg/m? » o 2250 Moisture content (w) —>
(b) Optimum moisture Content, % = e 8.1

21. Degree of Compaction, % (19) /(20a) x 100 -- 74% (Answer)

Page 46 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2 Ed Page 47

MOISTURE-DENSITY RELATIONSHIP density is attained. At optimum moisture content the “lubricating

limit” is reached. At this point, the pressure of the compacting
Volume of hole = Mass of sandin hole equipment has overcome the resistance offered by the cohesive
water film and the friction between particles. Consequently, for any
Density of used sand given effort, the maximum movement of the small particles into the
voids is accomplished and the density cannot increase further unless
Wet density = Mass of wet excavated soil the compacting effort is increased.
Volume of hole
Swelling - After the lubricating limit, addition of water results in
Wet density x 100 % increased film thickness and dispersion of particles. This is the
Dry density =
(Moisture content of soil + 100) swelling stage, so further lubrication is not possible because the soil
grains are forced apart by the water added, thus the density is
Degree of compaction = Dry density x 100 % tRRuged.
Maximum dry density - (AB. Saturation - All free-air is expelled and replaced by water. If further
COMPACTION TEST: pressure is‘app]ied to ‘th‘o soil mass, its tendency is to decrease in
volume. This however is impossible in a saturated system since the
In the test, the soil is compacted at a number of moisture content ranging free air has been replaced.
from slightly dry to wet, by a specified amount of energy applied in a
specified manner. Dry density and moisture content are determined. Values MOISTURE DENSITY RELATION OF SOIL
of these points are plotted and a smooth curve is drawn through the points. (Compaction Test)

The highest point on the curve is the Maximum Dry Density (MDD) and the T-99 (5.5 Ibs./2.5 kgs. Rammer, 12 in./305 mm drop)
corresponding moisture content is called Optimum Moisture Content
oM0e). Method Mold Vol. M® No. of Layers Blows/Layers Mat'ls. Passing

'l‘h‘e purpose of laboratory compaction is to determine the proper amount of A #ln. (02 mhm) 0.000043 3 Naz4 (4:75m sieve)
mixing water needed to compact the soil in the field in order to obtain a B 6in. (152 mm) 0.002125 -do-
max imum density
density under the specified
specifie compacting effort.r c 4in. (102 mm) 0.000943 3/4" (19.0mm sieve)

FOUR DISTINCT STAGES IN COMPACTION TEST D 6in. (152 mm) 0.002125 -do-

1. Wetting —When the soil particles are relatively dry, the water added T-180 (10 1bs./4.54 kgs. Rammer, 18 in./457 mm drop)
is absorbed and adsorbed by the soil particles. The water film
surrounding the particles are still minutely thin and very coherent. Method Mold Vol.M* No.ofLayers Blows/Layers Mat'ls. Passing
s s
Thus, the frictional resistance to granular rearrangement is high.
4in. (102 mm) 0.000943 3 25 No. 4 (4.75mm sieve)
2. Lubricating Stage - The addition of water replaces some of the 6in. (152mm) 0.002125 3 56 do-
entrapped air, the soil flows more readily under the ‘Jubricating
4in. (102 mm) 0.000943 3 3/4" (19.0mm sieve)
effect”of the added water and the soil particles move closer together,
thus resulting in increase in density. This effect is continued until 6in. (152mm) 0.002125 -do-
the optimum water content is reached, at which point the maximum
Page 48 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 49

SAMPLING AND FIELD TESTING FOR CONCRETE MIX SLUMP TEST FOR CONSISTENCY OF PORTLAND
PAVING and STRUCTURAL CONCRETE CEMENT CONCRETE
(AASHTO Designation: T 119)
1. Slump Test (ASTM Designation C 143)
2. Making and Curing Test Specimens in the field
Determination of Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Mold shall be filled in 3 layers.
Specimens. Each layer be filled approx. 1/3 of the volume of mold (3 Layers)
4. Determination of Flexural Strength of Concrete Beam Specimens. 25 strokes/layer — (5/8 in.) 16 mm rod in dia., (24 in.) 600 mm in
length
. The consistency shall be recorded in terms of mm of subsidence of
SAMPLE OF FRESH CONCRETE the specimen during the test which shall be known as the “SLUMP”.

1. The fresh concrete sample from where the test specimens are made Cylinder mold made of steel 150 mm. In
shall be representative of the entire batch. | diameter and 300 mm in height
2. Elapsed time between obtaining the first and final portions of | constructed in the form of right circular
composite samples shall not exceed 15 minutes. cylinders and the top open to receive the
3. Start tests for slump or air content within 5 minutes after obtaining concrete and shall be watertight and
the final portion of the composite sample ; sufficiently strong and tough to permit
4. Start molding specimens for strength tests within 15 minutes after their use without tearing, crushing or
fabricating the composite sample. X deforming.
Sample the concrete from stationary mixers, (except paving mixers)
o

at two or more regularly spaced intervals during discharge of middle

portion of the batch.
6. Sample the concrete from paving mixers after the contents of the
paving mixer have been discharged. Obtain samples from at least
five different portions of the pile and then composite into one sample
for test purposes.
Sample the concrete from revolving drum truck mixer or agitators
-

at two or more regularly spaced intervals during discharge of the

middle portion of the batch.

Compressive strength test, mechanical test measuring the maximum

amount of compressive load a material can bear before fracturing. The test
piece, usually in the form of a cube, prism, or cylinder, is compressed Dimension of Slump Cone:
between the platens of a compression-testing machine by a gradually Diameter of the base = 203 mm
applied load. Diameter of the top = 102 mm
Altitude = 305 mm
Page 50 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materlals Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 51
Beam mold, rectangular in shape and having a length of at least 50 mm |
greater than three times the depth. The cross section shall be 152 mm by #. Rod each layer 25 times throughout the layer depth distributing
152 mm. the roddings uniformly over the cross section. For subsequent
layers, penetrate the previous layers about 1 inch. For 6 by 12-inch
MAKING OF CONCRETE COMPRESSION i?,((;k;:.ljeb; g/_isr-‘:;‘c};ifit:eter tamping rod and a 3/8-inch diameter

AND FLEXURE TEST SPECIMENS IN THE FIELD

(AASHTO Designation T 23) . Lightly tap the outside of the mold 10 to 15 times with a rubber
(ASTM Designation C 31) mallet to close the voids left by the tamping rod. Use an open hand
for single use molds easily damaged by a mallet.
CONCRETE CYLINDER MOULDING PREPARATION
Strike off the surface with the tamping rod, handheld float or
trowel to produce a flat, even surface. Install the mold cap and
move the cylinders to an initial curing place for storage.

For initial curing, store cylinders for a period up to 48 hours in a

Kl\ temperature range from 60 to 80° F and protect from moisture loss.
\'\ i A For concrete with a specified strength of 6,000 psi or greater, the
§\ j initial curing temperature range is between 68 and 78° F.

l“\ I p . After initial curing and within 30 minutes upon removal from
g< molds, start final curing by storing cylinders in a wet environment
at a temperature of 73.5 +3.5° F until tested.
1. Obtain a representative concrete sample from the revolving drum
truck mixer. CONCRETE BEAM MOULDING PREPARATION
* Ensure all water has been added to the concrete. AND TESTING
* Sample concrete at two or more regularly spaced intervals
during discharge of the middle portion of the load. . Test beam molds, 6 in X 6 in x 21 + % in (150 mm % 150 mm X 550 + 13
* Repeatedly pass the receptacle through the entire mm) or 8 in X 8 in X 26 + % in (200 mm X 200 mm X 670 + 13 mm).
discharge stream or completely divert the discharge
stream into the sample container. . Vibrator, capable of 7,000 vibrations per minute with a diameter not
* Transport samples to the place of testing and remix to form less than % in (19.0 mm) or greater than 1% in (38.1 mm).
a composite sample.
* Obtain the concrete sample within 15 minutes from the . Tamping Rod — The tamping rod is a round, straight steel rod % in (16.0
s‘tart of sampling. mm) diameter and approximately 24 in (610 mm) long, having the
* Start molding cylinders within 15 minutes after tamping end rounded to a % in (16.0 mm) diameter hemispherical tip.
fabricating the composite sample.
P = 3 Mallet — A mallet with a rubber or rawhide head weighing 1.25 + 0.50
2. L sing a scoop, place concrete in the cylinder molds. For 6 by 12- 1b. (0.57 + 0.23 kg). e. Assorted tools such as scoops, shovels, etc.
inch molds, place in three equal layers (1/3 volume per layer) and
for 4 by 8-inch molds, place in two equal layers (1/2 volume per PROCEDURE:
layer). 1. Pour the concrete with the desired slump in three (3) layers.
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 53
Page 52 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed

2. The first layer must be tamped by a rod. Tamping shall be done one (1) Where:
line of fracture and the nearest support
blow per two (2) square inch. a= average distance between
measured on the tension surface of the beam.
3. The area of the beam sample is 6" x 21" = 126 sq. inch.
126 sq. inch / 2 = 63 BLOWS per layer.
ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE
DPWH Specifications states that for the Third Point Loading method:
FS requirement = 3.8 MPa (560 psi) Min. @ 14 days The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the
averages of all three (3) consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the
1. If the fracture occurs in the tension surface within the middle third specified strength, and no individual strength test result is deficient by more
of the span length: than 15% of the specified strength.

Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be

It must be rejected unless the contractor can provide evidence, by means of core tests,
Head of testing machine
noted that “L” 5/:£i£:££ ot that the quality of concrete represented by failed test results is acceptable
is equal to 18" in place.
only instead of Stecl bal |
Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be considered adequate if
21", This is to 25mmmin, —i__j— %0 the average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85% of, and if no single
allow the clear core is less than 75% of, the specified strength.
L3 Specimen| 3
space on both
edges at 1.5” SAMPLING AND TESTING OF ASPHALT CORE
each for the L/3 / L/3
support. Please Testing of Drilled Cores from an Asphalt Pavement
see the Figure Significance and Use:
below on right. Span length,I
Core tests determine the thickness and density of compacted

DPWH Specifications states that for the Third Point Loading method: asphalt pavement
FS requirement = 4.5 MPa (650 psi) Min. @ 14 days
Specimens shall be taken from the pavement with a core drill,
2. If the fracture Center-point Loading diamond or carborundum saw, or by other suitable means.
oceurs in the Care shall be taken to avoid distortion, bending or cracking of
Head of Testing
tension surface specimen during and after removal from the pavement.
Machine
outside of the Specimens shall be free from foreign materials such as seal coat,
middle third of the tack coat, foundation material, soil, paper or foil.
span length by not i I d=L/3 4. Specimens for thickness and density determination.
more than 5 percent Ry Sawed specimen: at least 150 mm x 150 mm
of the span length. kT»k—-N Cored specimen: 100 mm dia. full depth
3Pa Span Length =L Recommended that!
S = 2ba
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 55
Page 54

1. The diameter of cylindrically molded or cored specimens, or the Calculation:

length of the sides of sawed specimens, be at least equal to four Field Density
% Compaction =
times the maximum size of the aggregates. Laboratory Compacted Density x 100
2. That the thickness of the specimens be at least one and on-half
times of the maximum size of the aggregates. 2. Thickness
a. Make four (4) measurements at approximately quarter points
OBTAINING OF ASPHALT CORE SPECIMENS on the periphery of cores or at the approximate midpoint of
each of the four (4) sides of rectangular sawed specimens. (See
Case I: At least one but no more than three (3) samples shall be taken for figure)
each full day’s operation. b. The average of these measurements is the thickness (t) of the
specimen.
To ascertain the degree of compaction of the asphalt pavement, more than
one (1) core sample but not greater than three (3) maybe taken for each day’s 18
operation. When 2 or 3 cores are taken, each core should represent a specific
pavement area completed within a day. Averaging of the thickness and
density of the 2 or 3 cores should not be done.

Case 2! If no core was taken at the end of each day’s operation and the
project have already been completed, a core shall be taken for every 100
linear meters per lane or fraction thereof of the completed pavement. Each
core shall represent 100 LM of the asphalt pavement. Averaging of the 3 3
thickness and density of the core should not be done. POSITIONS OF MEASUREMENTS

Acceptance, Sampling and Testing of Finished Asphalt Pavement

TESTS ON ASPHALT CORE
1. DENSITY The contractor shall cut full depth samples as directed from the finished
Calculation: pavement for testing. Samples shall be neatly cut by saw or core drill. Each
Density (d) = Gmb x Density of water sample shall be at least 750 mm x 150 mm or 100 mm diameter full depth.
where: At least one, but not more than three samples shall be taken for each full
day's operation.
Density of water = 1.0 gm/cm?
Gmb = Bulk Specific Gravity If no core samples were taken during the day’s operation, core samples shall
be taken from the completed pavement for every 100 L.M. per lane. The
CALCULATION OF BULK SPECIFIC GRAVITY (Gmb) contractor shall supply and furnish new material to back fill bore holes left
by the samples taken.
Gmb =
No acceptance and final payment shall be made on completed asphalt
pavement unless core test for thickness determination is conducted, except
where: for Barangay Roads where the implementing office is allowed to waive such
A = mass of specimen in air, g test. The samples obtained will be used to measure the thickness of the
B = mass of surface dry specimen, g pavement. The same samples will be used to test the density of the
C = mass of specimen in water, g compacted pavement. The compacted pavement shall have a density equal
to, or greater than 97 mass percent of the density of a laboratory specimen.
Page 56 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 57

The asphalt pavement represented by the cores shall not be accepted if the
deficiency in density is more than 2%. CONCRETE DRILLED CORES
Acceptance, Sampling and Testing of Finished Asphalt Pavement In such a time that a representative of the concrete sample has failed the
compressive or flexural strength test, coring shall be done to test actual
The compacted pavement shall have a thickness tolerance of — 5 mm. poured concrete. In other cases, such as a Quality Assurance Unit (QAU)
Thickness in excess of the specified thickness shall not be considered in the visits a project or during final inspection for Final Billing of the contractor,
payment of asphalt pavement. The asphalt pavement represented by the core test is being conducted. Core tests measure the thickness of completed
individual core shall not be accepted if the deficiency in the core thickness concrete pavement and verify strength of concrete in-place that is
is more than 5 mm. considered deficient.
If the deficiency in the core thickness is more than 5 mm, additional layer According to some codes such as ASTM C42M — Standard Test Method for
maybe permitted in order to meet the designed thickness, however, the Testing Drilled Cores, test specimens are obtained when doubt exists about
minimum additional asphalt overlay thickness should be depended on the the in-place concrete quality due to either to low strength results during
minimum thickness capacity of asphalt paver but it should not be less than construction or signs of distress structure.
50 mm (2 inches) and that proper construction procedures are followed.
Republic of the Phikppines Sampling
Department of Public Works and Highways
BUREAU OF RESEARCH AND STANDARDS Specimens are taken after the concrete has become hard enough to permit
EDSA, Diliman, Queron City
sample removal without disturbing the bond between the mortar and coarse
WORKSHEET ON TESTING OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CORE aggregate. In general, the concrete shall be 14 days old before the specimens
Project are removed. Samples that show abnormal defects or samples that have
Source/Suppi been damaged in the process of removal shall not be used. Samples for
o determining compressive strength that contain embedded reinforcement
Tested By should be avoided if possible or trimmed to eliminate the reinforcement
Lab, No. Date Tested provided a length-to diameter ratio (L/D) of at least 1.00 can be attained. A
core specimen for thickness determination shall have a diameter of at least
[ Thekness Bulk Specc Graviy |
100 mm (4 in.)
10. | suton L3 win | wn | oW
1 2 3 4| Ak | Ar | Waer [ SSO
For compressive strength determination, the diameter of core specimens
should be at least three (3) times the nominal maximum size of the coarse
aggregate used in the concrete and must be at least twice the nominal
maximum size of the course aggregates in the core sample. The length of
the specimen, when capped, shall be as nearly as practicable twice its
diameter.

A core specimen for thickness determination shall have a diameter of at

least 100 mm (4 in.). There are machines available in market and core bits
Method of Measurement:
that can be bought in the market.
The area to be paid shall be the number of square meters (m?) of asphalt
pavement placed, compacted and accepted based on the thickness and
densities of the cores taken.
Page 58 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 59

Since the core is deficient in thickness by more than 25 mm, additional cores
will be taken at By and Fi. If the cores obtained at Bi and Fi were, for
cxample, 225 mm and 190mm, respectively, coring in the backward
direction is stopped, while coring in the forward direction is continued. If
the core obtained at F2 was, say 225 mm, the coring is stopped.

5 meters 5 meters
(5ta. 0+245) 5 meters
1
A (sta. 04250) F1 2
(5ta. 04255) (5ta.0+260)

190 mm
200 mm
205 mm
Thickness determination of concrete core in 9 locations
225 mm 225 mm
Obtaining the Core Specimens Based on the illustration above, we set 230mm — 25 mm = 205 mm as the
The completed pavement is accepted on a lot basis. A lot shall be considered
thickness where no payment will be effective. Thus X1 + X2 + the 5 meters
as 1000 linear meters of pavement when a single traffic lane is poured or
500 linear meters when two lanes are poured concurrently. Other areas such from Point A to F1 will be not be paid to the Contractor. By ratio and
as intersections, entrances, cross-overs, ramps, etc. will be grouped together proportion, we will get X1 =1 m, and X2 = 2.14. Thus, the total distance of
to form a lot. Each lot will be divided into five (5) equal segments and one no payment will be 8.14 meters.
core will be obtained from each segment.
Since the designed thickness is 230 mm: and based on the table on Page 60,
When the measurement of any core is less than the specified thickness by the deficiency in thickness of 0 to 5 mm can still be paid with 100% of the
more than 25 mm, additional cores will be taken at no less than 5 m lot stated in the contract. In other words, pavement thickness of 225 to 230
intervals parallel to the center line in each direction, from the affected
mm will get 100% payment of the specified PCCP lot.
location. Obtaining of core samples will only be stopped when a core which
is not deficient in thickness by more than 25 mm is found in each direction.
Evaluation of the core samples:
ILL RATION 1: Exampleof Com, ion
1) For each core sample, nine (9) measurements of the length are made,
Single-lane pavement one at the central position and one each along at eight additional
A core taken
positions spaced at equal intervals along the circumference of the circle
from a 200-
Backward Forward meter segment of measurement.
O-0—0—0 of concrete
B, A K R, pavement, The average length of the core is then obtained from the nine
its
location shown measurements, subject to the following:
Sta. 0+ 200 Sta. 0+ 400 as “A” in the a) Individual measurements in excess of the specified thickness by
figure above, more than 5 mm will be considered as specified thickness plus 5 mm.
was measured to be 200 mm. The design thickness of the pavement is 230 b) Individual measurements less than the specified thickness by more
mm.
than 25 mm shall not be included in the average.
Page 60 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed

3) When the average thickness for the lot is deficient, the contract unit CORING FOR STRENGTH DETERMINATION
price is adjusted as follows:
OBTAINING OF CORE SPECIMENS:
When the strength test results of concrete beam or cylinder samples are not
Deficiency in the Percent of Contract acceptable, at least three representative cores shall be taken from each
Average Thickness per Price Per Lot, % member or area of concrete in-place considered deficient.
Lot (mm) Payment
EVALUATION OF CORE SAMPLES:
0-5 100
Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be considered adequate if
6-10 95 the average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85% of, and if no single
core is less than 75% of, the specified strength.
11-15 85
ILLUSTRATION 3:
16 - 20 70
Three (3) cores taken from a pavement section poured on a single day were
21-25 50 tested for strength compliance. The results are:

Make thist. 25 Remove & Replace / No

Core ID | Strength, MPa (psi)
Payment
1 18.59 (2695)
ILLUSTRATION 2:
A core specimen taken from a concrete pavement was measured for
2 21.49 (3115)
thickness determination. The required pavement thickness is 23 cm. 3 19.32 (2800)
Refer to Page 58 for the locations of measurements.

g Measurement (cm) EVALUATION:

The required strength is 24.1 MPa (3500 psi)
RoRItiony Actual Corrected (2870 psi),
The average strength of the three cores is 19.80 MPa
[ 1 | 234 | 234 | which is less than 85% of the required strength.
TR 23.6 23.5 Concrete in the area represented by the cores is considered
3 BT R 235 inadequate.
4 23.9 23.5
5 23.7 23.5 ILLUSTRATION 4:
tested for strength
[ Bewil - ol & ERRL Three (3) cores taken
determination.
from
The results are:
another section were

v 23.5 23.5
8 23.4 23.4
) 233 233 | Core ID | Strength, MPa (psi)
Average Recorded Thickness: 23.49 1 23.32 (3378)

For Positions 3 to 7, the thickness was corrected to 23.5 to accommodate the 2 15.94 (2310
allowable recorded thickness of in excess to 5mm will be considered as
3 24.79 (3593)
specified thickness plus 5 mm.
Page 62 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2 Ed

EVALUATION: Concrete Core Thickness Determination

a. The required strength is 24.1 MPa (3500 psi)
b. The strength of Core No. 2 is less than 75% of the required strength. LD. |Station 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c. Concrete in the area represented by the cores is considered CR-1 [04320R/L | 355 | 363 | 363 (363 | 363 [36.6 (366 (366
inadequate.
Average Thickness,cm = 36.4
PAYMENT OF SECTIONS REPRESENTED BY CONTROL Compressive Strength of Concrete Core Specimen
SPECIMENS NOT MEETING THE STRENGTH
REQUIREMENT Tength, mm Avg Cross | Ulimate | Uncorrected
Sample | Before | Afier Station Dia Sectional | Load | Compressive
1D.__| Capping | Capping mm Areain2| b Strength
If the strength of control specimens fails to meet the requirements and it is
not feasible or not advisable to obtain cores from the structures due to Core #1 122 133 2+915 1016 125664 | 42,500 2332
structural considerations, payment of the concrete will be made at an
adjusted price due to strength deficiency of concrete specimens as specified
ASTM C42M - Standard Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores
hereunder:
nnd Sawed Beams of Concrete, Subsection 7.9.1 states that L/D of the
specimen is 1.75 or less, strength correction factor must be used.
Deficiency in Strength;f;oncretflr;ercent (%) Contract
Specimens, Percent (%) Price Allowed LD Strength Correction Factor
175 ~ 098
Less than 5 100 1.50 0.96
1.25 0.93
5 to less than 10 80
1.00 0.87
10 to less than 15 70
By interpolation between L/D = 1.00 to 1.50, the correction factor is 0.918,
15 to less than 20 60
thus, Corrected Compressive Strength = 21.41 MPa or 3104.71 psi.
20 to less than 25 50
L 25 or more 0 DYNAMIC CONE PENETROMETER P
ASTM D69
Measuring Length of Drilled Concrete Cores
(AASHTO T-148) and (ASTM C-174) One of the factors to determine in designing a road section is by determining
the soil materials California Bearing Ratio (CBR) in the laboratory. Further,
we can also control the quality of a newly-compacted base/subbase course by
having CBR test on the field. However, we can’t just take a soil sample and
subject it in for testing in the laboratory for four (4) days. That is how DCP
was invented. DCP correlates the CBR on the field from what is in the
laboratory. This means we are simulating the actual field scenario vs what
is in the laboratory.

DEFINITION:

O Provides a measure of a material’s in-situ resistance to penetration.

Page 64 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 65

Similar mechanism/principle as Standard Penetration Test (but O Extraction- Following completion of the test, extract the device by
different in computation) driving the hammer upward against the handle. Use a smooth
upward movement and do not throw the hammer against the
O Driving a metal cone into the handle.
ground by repeatedly striking it
with a 17.6 1b. (8 Kg) weight
dropped from a distance of 2.26
feet (575 mm). Handle

O Test results can be correlated to

California Bearing Ratios, in-situ Single Mass OR Dual-Mass
density, resilient modulus, and J Hammer
bearing capacity. - 17.6 1b (8 kg) OR 10.1 Ib (4.6 kg)
PURPOSE: Upper Rod
O Used to estimate the strength
characteristics of fine and grained
soils, granular construction
materials and weak stabilized or
modified materials.
Anvilwith
Quick-Connect Pin
O Estimate the strength of in situ Conduct of Field DCP Testing _ Upper
materials underlying a bound or Attachment
highly stabilized layer by first
drilling or coring an access hole.

O Dropping the Hammer - Hold the DCP device in a vertical position. Drive Rod
Raise the Hammer until it touches, but does not impact, the handle. 5/ in (16 mm) diameter

30,37.75,4010n
Allow the Hammer to fall freely and impact the anvil coupler assembly.

O Depth of Penetration - The depth of penetration will vary with

application. For typical highway applications, a penetration of less than +~—— Vertical Scale
692 mm (27 1/4 in) will generally be adequate. In soft soil, the DCP may
be advanced to 6 feet.

O Refusal- The presence of aggregates > 2-inch or rock strata will either
stop further penetration or deflect the drive rod. If, after 3 blows, the
device has not advanced more than 0.08 in (2 mm) or the handle has J——Foot
deflected more than 3 in (75 mm) from the vertical position, stop the test Tip (Reusable —
and move the device to another test location. Continuing to drop the Hardened Point or
hammer will damage the instrument. The new test location should be a Disposable Cone)
minimum of 12 in (300 mm) from the prior location to minimize test Figure 1-Schematic of DCP Device
error caused by disturbance of the material.
Page 66 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Page 67

WORKSHEET FOR DYNAMIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST Based from the given graph below, H1 = (315 to 410 mm Penetration) = 95.
s STATIONNo. H2 = (410 mm to 615 mm Penetration) = 205; H3 = (615 to 900) = 285 mm.
Lane WHEEL PATH Blow#1 = (0 to 29) = 29; Blow#2 = 29 to 49 = 20; Blow#3 = 49 to 66 = 17.
BoREHOLE N, — SURFACE THICKNESS =
26RO READING OF D.CP. = oxTe
Dynamic Cone Penetrometer Graph
CHAINAGE CHAINAGE CHAINAGE
Blow2
No. of biows | £ of biows No. of bows | Z of biows No. of blows | % of biows Blow1l {— Blow3 H

I
LR, 1

i
i
k
[ _ I -
I1 -

|
- —

Using the formula (TRL):

Log (CBR) .057 log (PR,

Where: CBR Layer 1: Thickness, H1 = 95 mm

= California Bearing Ration Value
PR From the given numbers, PR1 = H1/Blow#1 = 95/29 = 3.276 mm/blow
= Penetration Resistance (mm/blow)
Using the formula of CBR correlation, CBR, = 86.16%
= Penetration / Nu: mber of Blow/s
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed
Page 68

Layer 2: Thickness, H2 = 205 mm

From the given numbers, PRz = H2/Blow#2 = 205/20 = 10.256 mm/blow
Using the formula of CBR correlation above; Thus, CBRz = 25.80

Layer 3: Thickness, H3 = 285 mm

From the given numbers, PRs = H3/Blow#3 = 285/17 = 16.764
Using the formula of CBR correlation: Thus, CBRs = 15.34
TEST QU ESTIONS
ANALYSIS / CONLUSION:

Basis for acceptance is that for subgrade, CBR must be = 4%; for Subbase
Course, CBR = 30%: and in Base Course, CBR = 80%. Thus, it may be
considered that Layer 1 is Base Course, Layers 2 and 3 did not pass the
subbase requirement, so we can assume it as subgrade material.

TABLE 2 Tabulated Correlation of CBR versus DCP Index®

DCP Index CBR DCP Index CBR DCP Index CBR
mm/low? % mm/blow? % mmblow? %
<3 100 39 48 69-71 25 MARCH 2015
24 '
CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS
3 80 40 47 72-74
45 6050 4142 46 75-77 23
44 78-80 22 1
6 40 43 43 81-93 2.4 MATERIALS ENGINEER
7 35 a4 4.2 84-97 20
8 30 45 4 88-01 19 WRITTEN EXAMINATION
9 25 46 4.0 02-96 18
1011 20 47 3.9 97-101 17
12 18 48 38 102-107 16
13 16 409-50 37 108-114 15
14 15 51 26 116-121 14
15 14 52 35 122-130 13
16 13 53-54 2.4 131-140 12
17 12 55 33 141-152 11
18-19 1" 56-57 32 1563-166 10
20-21 10 58 3.1 166-183 09
22-23 ] 50-60 3.0 184-205 08
24-26 ] 61-62 29 206-233 07
2729 7 63-64 28 234271 06
30-34 6 6566 27 272-324 05
35-38 5 67-68 26 >324 <0.5

4 For DCP Index in units of in./blow, divide by 25.4

The table “Tabulation Correlation of CBR versus DCP Index” is also a kind
of correlation we can use using the above-mentioned data, and we'll get a
relatively the same CBR Values.
Page 70 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2 Ed Page 71

ACCREDITATION EXAMINATION FOR CONTRACTORS'/CONSULTANTS' CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'

MATERIALS ENGINEER MATERIALS ENGINEER
IANSIWER SHEET) WRITTEN EXAMINATION
Examinee No. : Date of Examination MARCH 2015
Score, . Place of Examination : C__Manlla__ Note: Choose the BEST answer for these questions as hard as you can. You
Examinee's Signature
may use the ANSWER SHEET from the previous page for answering
INSTRUCTION IN MARKING ANSWERS: the questions. The answer key is at the end of the Chapter. God bless!
Shade your answer in each Item. If you wish to change your answer, mark an X on your first answer then
shade your new answer and affix your initial.
. Which of the ff. is not included in determining moisture content?
A B COD A B CoD A B C D A B C a. Beam Balance w/ sensitivity of OIG
Ljoocoo [sloococo [nlococo [wlooco bifven
2O
c. Moisture Can
OO O 2./ OO0 OO 2000 O |n|COO d. Extruder
N oo o) 8O OOO 3OO OO |B|OOO
LI OO OO 8OO0 |ufloooo (nlooco . The test that determines the purity of asphalt (how much bitumen is in
slococo |ulocoo |slocco |wlooco theasphalt),
a. Solubility Test
6| OO OO O OO O 6|0
O OO |8.|O OO b. Ductility
1|O0 00 20000 [7/0000 (oo c. Extraction
Lfoo0o |sjoocoo |sjloococo |ajlooco -
ileoee |lulocow lslooos lulsa o .Tl:e(x:T:]::E;’ae(;:edla for reflectorized paint.
a. Ulass S
VOOOO [H5OCOOO (OO O |slooo b. Paint
11| OO OO 36| O O OO 6. [ O OO O |80 OO c. Heat
OO O 37| OO OO 2O O0O O |87fOCOO What i p £ 1 lsified Asphalt?
Bloococo |slococo laloocoo |ulooo . at is8 the -] unction
ot of emul sifier
ifier in emulsified
sifi Aspha t?

a. To increase mixing ability w/ aggregates

BOOOO NOOOO |HOOOO (8|0 O b. To retain water in asphalt in longer period.
BLOOOO |[WOCODOO (BOCOOCO |nCOO c. To prevent asphalt from hardening
wloooo |awjococo |sloocoo |lualooo d. To enable asphalt and water to mix

VOOOO 20000 (70000 2000 . Failed samples does not necessarily mean that the structure represents
BOOOO 8OO0 OCO |(glooOoCO |alooco is defective. Why?
BIOOCOO (OO0 O |wfloooco |ujocoo a. Maybe samplingis incorrect
nloococo |sloocoo |lnloocoo |slooco b. Incompetence of the Lab Technician

AOOOO BOO0OO INOOOO (6O ;. The use of sea water in reinforced concrete may __.
ROOOO |2OCOOO RNOCOOO |nfooO a. Penetrate the concrete and cause scaling
nloococo |slococo |nlococo |sloco b. Induce risk and corrosion to steel
UOOOO (woooOo O OOO |99 OO
BOOOO OO0 |BOCOO flooo
Page 72 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 73

7. In item 104 — embankment, field density test is carried out for every. b. Extraction Test
sq.m. c. Weighing
a. 1500 sq. m
b. 500 sq. m . Sample for CBR test is soaked for ____ hrs. before subjecting to
penetration test.
8. What greatly influences the service of an asphalt pavement? a. 4 Hours
a. Quality of asphalt and the materials used b. 72 Hours
b. Grade and quantity of asphalt c. 96 Hours
c. Grading of the aggregates used
. A field density result of 88% degree of compaction obtained on the sub-
9. A non-destructive portable equipment used to determine the presence of grade indicates_____
voids, cracks and other impurities. a. The sub — grade fails and needs additional compaction
a. Concrete Scanner b. The subgrade passed the CBR requirement
b. Rebound Hammer c. The subgrade passed the requirement
c. Pundit Ultrasonic Concrete Tester
. What is the upper limit of the sand to be used in Atterberg limit test?
10. Which of the ff. is used to measure pavement deflection? a. No. 10
a. Falling weight Deflectometer b. No 40 (0.425 mm)
b. Dynamic Cone Penetrometer c. No. 200
c. Benkelman Beam and Deflection Logger
d. Both a and ¢ . In abrasion test using Los Angeles Abrasion Machine, how many cast
iron spheres are used in grading B?
11. The proportion of bituminous material into the total dry aggregate in a. 9 Spheres
item 310. b. 10 Spheres
a.3% - 5% c. 11 Spheres
b. 5% - 8%
. Given: Wt. of dry aggregate = 950 g, wt. of asphalt = 50 g. What is the %
12. A core specimen taken from a concrete pavement was measured for of asphalt by weight of total mix?
thickness determination. The specified pavement thickness is 23 cm. a.b5.26
The measurements taken were: 23, 24, 23, 23, 24, 24, 24, 23. The b.5
measurement at the center is 23 cm. Obtain the average thickness. c. 95
a. 23.22 mm
b. 24 mm . The maximum compacted thickness of any one layer of aggregate sub-
c.24.6 mm base coarse materials.
a. 150 mm
13. Compute the degree of compaction (given: dry density = 1663 kg/cu.m, b. 200 mm
max. dry density = 2250 kg/ cu.m) c. 300 mm
a. 74%
b. 135% 21. The test on asphalt cement consisting of heating the asphalt in an open
c. 100% cup and passing a small test flame.
a. Flash point
14. The test which determines the asphalt present. b. Spot Test
a. Spot Test
Page 74 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 75

22. If the bulk volume of asphalt specimen is 500 cc and weight of dry 30. What is the required mixing for mortar for stone masonry?
specimen in air is 1200 g. What is the bulk specific gravity of asphalt a. 1-part cement to 2 parts sand with sufficient water
specimen? b. 1-part cement to 3 parts sand with sufficient water
a. 2.40
b. 41.67 . How many samples of bituminous cement (item 310) shall be taken for
c. 2.00 each full day operation?
a. At least 1 but not more than 3
23. In a penetration test, if the penetration is 9.0mm. What is the grade of b. At least 2 but not more than 5
the asphalt? c. At least 1 but not more than 5
a.0-30
b. 85 - 100 . The apparatus used in determining the initial setting of hydraulic
c. 100 - 115 cement.
a. Vicat Apparatus
24, Liquid limit is expressed as the moisture corresponding to how many no. b. Vacit Apparatus
of blows? c. Spot Test
a. 20 Blows d. Extraction Test
b. 25 blows
c. 24 Blows . The minimum weight of sample of cement for testing.
a. 10kg
5. What is the required size of calibrated sand used b. 20Kg
for field density test? c. bkg
a. Passing No. 10 and retained No.200
b. Pass 30 retained 50 . Which of the ff. factors does not affect the workability of bituminous
mixes,
26. How many samples should be taken for every 75 cu.m of fresh concrete? a. Gradation of aggregates
a. 1 set consist of 3 cylinders b. Quality of Asphalt
b. 2 sets of 3 Cylinders c. Temperature of Mix
d. Shape and texture of aggregates
. What is the rate of application of bituminous tack coat?
a. 0.2-0.7L/m? . Which of the ff. does not affect the compressive strength of concrete core?
b. 0.2-0.5L/m? a. manner of drilling
c. 0.3-0.6L/m? b. L-d ratio
c. diameter of core
28. If concrete cylinder is not available for a 300 pes culverts, how many d. none of the above
pipes shall be subjected to test?
a. 6 pipes 3. The smaller the fines modulus, the materials.
b. 3 Pipes a. The finer the materials
b. The coarser
29. What is the requirement for flexural strength of a concrete when tested
by third point loading? . If there’s a necessity to add water to the concrete mix in order to increase
a. 3.80 MPa its workability (provided that concrete does not exceed specified slump).
b. 4.50 MPa How many minutes after the initial time of mixing does adding of water
be permitted?
Page 76 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 77

a. 45 minutes
b. 90 minutes . The net stability of a soil is 2400 KPa and its dry stability is 3000 KPa.

~P
c. 60 Minutes What is its index of retained strength?
a. 80%
. What is the latest state of the art equipment used in the measurement b. 100%
of moisture content of soil? c. 120%
a. Speedy Moisture Content
b. Nuclear Density Gauge 46. What is the sampling requirement for compaction of item 201?
a. 1 sample per 1500 cu.m
. Which part of the batch for fresh concrete should the sample be taken b. 1 sample per 1000 cu.m
from a stationary mixer? c. 1 sample per 500 cu.m
a. The First Batch
b. The Middle Batch 47. The moisture density curve is different for each soil, which of the ff.
c. The last batch statement is true?
a. There will always be max dry density at optimum moisture content.
b. There will always be percent compaction at optimum moisture
. Which of the ff. is considered unsuitable material for embankment? content.
a. Soil w/ LL of 50% c. There will always be optimum moisture content at maximum
b. Soil w/ density of 1200 kg/ cu.m compaction effort
c. Organic soils
48. As construction work progresses, you've notice that the delivered
. Which of the ff. is considered suitable material for embankment? materials are different from the one tested and passed. If you are in
a. Highly Organic Soils doubt, what will you do?
b. Soil that cannot be compacted a. Approve the materials
c. Soil w/ PL of 60% b. Reject
d. None of the above c¢. Conduct immediate re - testing

. The minimum compaction trial for embankment. 49, Which of the ff. does not need an inspection report?
a. 500 sq. m a. Water
b. 1500 sq. m b. Top soil
c. 200 sq. m c. Pavement Markings
d. Sodding
. Concrete sample shall be molded from the cylinder mold after ___ hrs.
from mixing. . The type of asphaltic material that is being referred to by penetration
a. 4 hours grade.
b. 24 hours a. Asphalt cement
c. 36 hours b. Asphalt mix
c. Concrete mix
. What should be the condition of soil before it is subjected to compaction?
S

a. At optimum moisture content 51. If the length of the project is 1 km and the width is 10m, how many FDT
b. At maximum wet density should be conducted for item 104?
c. At maximum CBR a. 100 FDT
d. At 95% Compaction b. 200 FDT
Page 78 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 79

c. 150 FDT c. The Source

52. As a materials engineer, you have found out that there is a 15% 60. In Slump test, the aggregates are molded into equal layers.
deficiency in strength of concrete specimen and it is not feasible or not a. 1 layer
advisable to obtain cores from the structure due to structure b. 2 layers
considerations, what will you do? c. 3 equal layers
a. Accept the materials
b. Recommend payment at an adjusted price 31. Clay can be made plastic by
c. Remove and replace a. by molding
b. by adding water
53. In asphalt cement, 60-70 refers to what? c. by touching with hand
a. Liters
b. Penetration grade 52. In the slip form method of paving, the allowable slump is .
c. Viscosity a. 0.5
b. Almost zero
. The rate of loading in the determination of compressive strength of il
cylindrical concrete specimen is at a constant rate within the range of?
a. 10psi — 20 psi What admixture is used to reduced thermal cracking?
b. 20psi - 50 psi a. Retarder
c. 30psi = 50 psi b. Accelerator
c. Fly ash
. What will be the condition of soil that can obtain 100% compaction?
o=

a. At optimum moisture content . An experienced materials engineer, what methods can you apply in
b. At max compaction effort easily determining the plasticity of soil?
c. When it reached the CBR requirement a. By tasting the soil
b. By determining its LL and PL
. What is the penetration grade of sealing asphalt in PCCP? c. By rubbing the soil with fingers/hand
a. Blown Asphalt R Grade 115/15
b. Blown Asphalt R Grade 120/10
c. Oxidized Asphalt R Grade 115/20 ---END OF QUESTIONS---
. Core test is performed to. 1
3
o

a. To determine the density and thickness of pavement

b. To determine the strength of the pavement
c. To know the stability of the pavement

. In FDT, how do we compute the volume of the hole?

a. The weight of the sand retained in the jar and the density of sand
b. The weight that filled the sand and the density of sand is known

. It is equally as important as testing and shall be used for all materials.

a. Sampling
b. The Materials Engineer
Page 80 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Page 81

ANSWER KEY

MARCH 2015 PA RT v
CONTRACTORS’ and CONSULTANTS’
MATERIALS ENGINEER WRITTEN EXAMINATION TEST QUESTIONS
1. D 21. A 41.D 61. B
2. A 22. A 42. A 62. B
3. A 23. B 43. B 63. A
4. D 24. B 44. A 64. C
5. A 25. A 45. A
6. B 26. A 46. A
7. B 27:.A. 47. A
8. B 28. A 48. B
9. C 29. A 49. C
10. g 30. Jt 50. S SEPTEMBER 2015
11. 31. £ 51.
12 A 32, A 2. B CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'
11 i; ‘zi I\) :: g MATERIALS ENGINEER
15.C 35. D 55. A WRITTEN EXAMINATION
16. A 36. A 56. A
17. 8 37. A 57. A
18. C 38.B 58. B
19. B 39. B 59. A
20. B 40. C 60. C
Page 82 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2" Ed
ACCREDITATION EXAMINATION FOR CONTRACTORS'/CONSULTANTS' CONTRACTORS' and CONSULTANTS'
MATERIALS ENGINEER MATERIALS ENGINEER
(ANSWER SHEET) WRITTEN EXAMINATION
Examinee N, : Date of Examination SEPTEMBER 2015
senr, e, | PRGBGSR ¢ O e : Choose the BEST answer for these questions as hard as you can. You
© may use the ANSWER SHEET from the previous page for answering
INSTRUCTION IN MARKING ANSWERS: the questions. The ANSWER KEY is at the end of the Chapter. Good
Shade your answer in each Item. If you wish to change your answer, mark an X on your first answer t luck!
shade your new answer and affix your initial.

ABcCoD A B CoOD A B COD A B C What is the minimum compaction requirement for an embankment?
1locoo [slococo Mloocoo [slooco -y gg:f
2L|OOOO |nooc0O |alooco (njooco o o5%
31| OO0 00 o000 oO (sjloocooco |mlooco d. 100%
L[OOOO ([njloocooco 5.0 O OO 7.0
O O
slococo |vloococo |sloococo |wlooo 'l‘h_e following factors does NOT affect the strength of concrete course
drilled from the structure except:
6| OO OO IO O OO 56| O O O O (81| O OO a. Diameter of the core
1|00 00 |00 00 (a0 |alooco b. Length to diameter ratio
L0000 nloooo |(sfloococo (koo o . Manner
of drilling
sjoco0o (uoooco |sloococo |uooco d. Neniofiths Aboye
VOOOO 50000 (WOCOOO 85O O] What is the weight of class "A" riprap stones?
NOO OO OO OO ||COOOO (sl a. 20 kg. to a max. of 35 kg with at least 50% weighing 30 kg.
ROOOOC (/OO0 O (a0 O |(njlooco b. 15 tg. to a max. of 25 kg wiL: at ieast 5g% weig:ing io ll:g.
BIOOCOO c. 15 kg. to a max. of 30 kg with at least 50% weighing 25 kg.
i
OO OO MG e S D d. 10 kg. to a max. of 25 kg with at least 50% weighing 20 kg.
18O O OO PO O OO 8. O O OO 8. | O O© O
BLIOOOO |[WOOOO (OO |(nfooo What is the function of emulsifiers in liquid asphalt?
wloocooco |lujlococoo |(sloocoo |uwlooo a. To increase mixing ability with aggregates
o oo 5. o b. To retain water in asphalt for longer periods
@ O OO OQ 02O c. To prevent asphalt from hardening
BOOOO 380000 |(BlOOOO |[a|jooO d. To enable asphalt and water to mix
1O OOO WO OOO 69O
O OO |ufOCOO
noooo |slocoo |[nloocoo |slooo W}Bcl’hw?lf[the follto:ring is NOT authorized to test materials for use
X in projects?
ANOOOO 640000 NOOCOC |%|COO a. Any DPWH-accredited private testing laboratory
2OOCOO ([0/OOOO [PNOCOO (oo O b. Any testing laboratory of a local government unit
nloococo |slococo |nloococo |slooco c. Any DPWH-Implementing Office Laboratory
njoocooo |([sloococo |nloococo |wooco d. DOST Testing laboratory
B5OOOO (0OCOOO |BOOOO OO O
Page 84 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 85

What is NOT the most commonly accepted measure of the hardness b. provide smooth, flat ends that are perpendicular to axis of
of concrete? the sample
a. Soundness test c. prevent cylinder from tilting
b. L.A. Abrasion test d. tomaintain the verticality of the cylinder
c. Petrographic test
d. Fractured face test 12. It is the class of concrete used for bedding and after each layer of
stone in rubble concrete
The temperature of a 7.0 cu.m bituminous mix delivered at the a. Class A
project site is 20 degrees centigrade lower than the required b. Class B
compaction temperature require by the job-mix formula. As the c. Class C
materials engineer of the project, what should you recommend? d. Class D
a. Allow the use of the delivered materials
b. Advise the contractor to spread the mixture in one layer only . The amounts of material passing No. 50 and No. 100 sieves are
c. Reject the delivered materials important to concrete aggregates because:
d. Adjust the job-mix formula a. the minimum amount of these fine-sand sizes are required
to ensure that the surface can be finished easily to an
Which of the following is NOT a type of volume change of concrete? acceptable degree of smoothness
a. Air content the maximum amount of these fine-sand sizes are required
b. Temperature changes to ensure that the cement paste is sufficient to cover each
c. Shrinkage particle
d. Creep c. an excessive quantity of fines would result in an
uneconomical mix
A soil compacted dry will reach a certain dry density. If compacted d. All of the above
again with the same compacted effort, but this time with water in
soil, the dry density will go higher because: . A transit mixer for road construction was found to have a 6" slump
a. the water lubricates the grains and allows them to slide in a of fresh concrete instead of the required 3". What will you
denser structure recommend if you are the assigned Materials Engineer?
air is forced out of the soil a. Add Portland cement to attain the required 3" slump.
c. more space is left for the soil solids b. Add Portland cement and fine aggregate to attain the
d. all of the above required 3" slump
Reject the concrete mixture
10. Portland cement is called because: Let the concrete mix diverted for pouring on a prepared
a. it mainly comes from Portland, Oregon, USA column for retaining wall of the same project.
b. it was originally registered as a trade name in the island of
Portland 5. If beam samples taken from a newly paved section failed to meet the
c. it resembled cement obtained by grinding natural rocks strength requirement and it is not advisable to obtain cores from the
found on the Isle of Portland structure due to structural considerations, as a Materials Engineer,
d. it was mainly the idea of its inventor, Mr. Joseph Aspdin what will you do if the deficiency in strength of the concrete
specimens is 15%?
11 . The purpose of capping concrete cylinders prior to testing for a. Reject the section represented by the failed specimens.
compression is to: b. Rework the section represented by the failed specimens.
a. protect the ends of the cylinder from premature breaking c. Accept the section at an adjusted price due to strength
resulting from improper application of load deficiency.
Page 86 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2" Ed

d. Modify the concrete mix design . Disturbed

Undisturbed
16. The improper compaction of an embankment material will result to . Consolidated
the following except: . Compacted
a. Minimize compressibility
b. Decrease soil permeability 22. Unconfined compressive strength test is usually performed on:
c. Increase shear strength and soil stability. a. Sandy soils
d. Decrease voids spaces b. Silty Soils
c. Organic Soils
17. In concrete pouring, large variations in the concrete cylinder test d. Clayey Soils
results were observed. This shall be remedied by
a. Taking the average test result to ensure it is above the 23. Under Item 406, Prestressed Concrete Structures of the DPWH
specifications requirement Specifications, post-tensioning of the prestressing reinforcement
. Checking the calibration of the compression machine. shall not commence until test on concrete cylinder indicate that the
c. Reviewing the mix design, materials quality and aggregate concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least:
condition in the batching process a. 25MPa
d. All of the above b. 30 MPa
c. 20 MPa
18. What is the significance of the loss on ignition test of cement? d. 28 MPa
a. It is a measure of the heat generated when cement is mixed
with water. . The following are generally true in the production of high-strength
b. It signifies pre-hydration or moisture uptake of cement concrete, except:
while it is shelved a. Coarse aggregates should be obtained from crushed rock to
c. It is a measure of the resistance of cement when exposed to give the best cement/particle bond
fire b. Smaller-size aggregates are preferred as more area is
d. None of the above available for cement bonding
. Admixtures include accelerators and retarders
19. What test determines the resistance to deformation of a compacted . Bigger size aggregates are preferred as more voids are
asphalt concrete mix? available for cement bonding
a. Hardness Test
b. Marshall Stability Test . The following properties of asphalt mix can be determined in a core
c. Ductility Test sample, except for:
d. Durability Test a. Index of Retained Strength
b. Asphalt Content
20. What is the minimum test requirement for riprap boulders? c. Grading
a. Stone size and specific gravity d. Specific Gravity
b. Stone size or weight test and inspection report on
assessment of stone soundness . In how many hours should concrete core samples be submerged in
c. Stone size or weight test and abrasion test water before subjecting them to compression test?
d. Abrasion test only . Atleast 30
At least 35
21. Consolidation test is usually performed on . Atleast 40
samples. . Atleast 48
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed
Page 88 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed

27. A concrete beam fails within middle third at 7,000 lbs. The flexural d. the amount of spot per unit area
strength of the sample is:
a. 248 psi 33. What is used to measure pavement surface irregularity?
b. 583 psi a. Falling Weight Deflectometer
c. 680 psi b. Pendulum apparatus
d. 3,500 psi ¢. Dynamic Cone Penetrometer Apparatus
d. 3-meter straight edge
. In the process of compaction of Item 200 (Aggregate Subbase of
Course) which contains sandy material, only 80% density was . The laboratory density of a bituminous mix 97%. If the density
is the degree of
attained. What is your recommendation in order to comply with the the newly completed asphalt pavement is 95%, what
100% minimum degree of the compaction? compaction?
a. Adjust the water content a. 95%
b. Place the material in thin layer b. 97%
c. Provide additional binder c. 98%
d. Use roller with greater compactive effort d. 102%

29, . The rate of application of emulsified asphalt used as tack coat, 5. The following can be used to help stabilize slope except:
a. Vetiver grass hedgerows
should be within the range of:
0.2 to 0.5 liters/sq.meter b. Legumes
c. Grass cover
®

b. 0.2to 0.7 liters/sq.meter

c. 0.15 to 0.7 liters/sq.meter d. Coconut Tree
d. 1 to 2 liters/sq.meter
. The following test can be performed on disturbed samples from soil
30. The apparent omission of a detailed description or definition exploration, except:
concerning the quality of materials in the plan and specification a. Grading test
shall be regarded to mean that: b. Unit weight and quantity of organic matter
a. any material can be used c. Consolidation test
b. materials of first class quality are to be used d. Liquid and plastic limit
c. materials that are recommended by the contractor can be
used . The workability of a bituminous mix is dependent on the:
d. none of the above a. gradation of aggregates
b. temperature of mix
31. Stability of an asphalt pavement is the ability to resist shoving and c. asphalt content
rutting under traffic loads. d. shape and texture of aggregates
a. more medium size sand
b. angular and rough aggregates . In bituminous plant-mix surface course, the temperature of the mix
c. more asphalt shall have an allowable
a. b Degrees Celsius
d. bandc
b. +10 Degrees Celsius
. The spot test on asphalt is used to determine: c. +15 Degrees Celsius
d. 420 Degrees Celsius
a. overheating during manufacture
b. overheating during construction
c. the amount of spot per unit volume
Page 90 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed

Volume of hole, cu.m =0.0028

39. The rate of loading of the machine will somehow affect the strength
of the materials being test. The rate of loading that must be observed Wet unit weight, kg/cu.m =1745
when testing the concrete cylinder specimen is: Dry unit weight, kg/cu.m
a. 20-50 psi/sec Laboratory Data:
psi/sec Maximum dry density, kg/cu.m
b. 30-60
psi/sec Optimum Moisture Content, %
c. 40-70
d. 50-80 psi/sec

40. When the top surface of a concrete specimen is rough and not truly
plane, stress concentrations are introduced and the strength of the
concrete is reduced by about:
a. 1/2 . ASTM C150 requires that the 28-day strength of mortar made from
Type I Portland cement be at least 27.6 MPa. Three specimens were
b. 1/3
c. 1/4 tested: two passed but one failed by more than 20%. What will be
d. 1/5 the conclusion?
a. Discard the failed result and conclude that the particular

41. During the testing of concrete cylinders in uniaxial compression, cement passed the specification.
what will happen to the result of the test if the rate of loading is b. Perform a re-test since the data is inconclusive
. Get the average of the three and if the average is more than
rapid (i.e. way above the prescribed rate of loading?
27.6 MPa, conclude that the particular cement passed the
a. Nothing - rate of loading has no bearing on the result of the
test specification
. Conclude that the cement does not pass the specifications
b. The computed compressive strength will be lower
c. The computed compressive strength will be higher since it failed to give the consistent results
d. The result will depend on the age of the specimen be kept in
. Before concrete paving, the base of a roadway should

42. In hot climate under sustained loading, asphalt cements behave moist condition and saturated with water for at least:
like: a. 2 Hours
Viscous liquids b. 4 Hours
a.
b. Viscous solids c. 6 Hours
c. Elastic solids d. 8 Hours
d. Soft solids field density and
. The following are the results obtained from

43. Slurry system for road surface treatment of Item 304A is a type of laboratory compaction tests:
Weight of dry soil =80¢g
a. Cold asphalt mixture
Weight of water in soil sample =16¢
b. Hot mix asphalt mixture
Wet density of soil =1.9 glee
c¢. Warm mix asphalt
d. Porous asphalt Maximum dry density obtained from laboratory compaction
=1.68 glec

44. From the following data, determine the degree of compaction. Using the above data, the moisture content is*
a. 16%
b. 20%
Field density test data:
Weight of material taken from hole, kg= 4.885 c. 26%
Weight of sand to fill hole, kg =3.885 d. 30%
Page 92 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed | Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 93

48. In a plastic limit test, what is the diameter of thread soil samples to 54. It is a type of emulsified asphalt that works better with wet
be rolled by hand? aggregates and in cold weather.
a. 3.2mm a. Anionic Emulsion
b. 4.75 mm b. Cationic Emulsion
c. 6.4mm c. Liquid Asphalt
d. 9.6 mm d. Cutback Asphalt

49. How do you obtain the density of soil in the field? . If the soil is NOT compacted at its maximum dry density, it will:
a. By weighing the disturbed soil removed and obtaining the a. Increase stability/strength
volume of hole with sand or with other means b. Minimize future settlement
b. By conducting in-situ CBR in the field c. Decrease permeability
c. By weighing the remaining soil in the laboratory d. Increase permeability
d. By conducting triaxial test in the field
5. Bituminous mixture shall have a minimum dry compressive
. Accreditation of Contractors’/Consultants' Materials Engineers is strength of:
provided in the Department Order (D.0O.) No. a. 100 psi
a. D.O. No. 26, Series of 1990 b. 200 psi
b. D.O. No. 141, Series of 1999 c. 300 psi
c. D.O. No. Series of 2003 d. 400 psi
d. None of the above
. The DPWH minimum requirement for asphalt pavement thickness
. It is essential to soil mechanics work that drying ovens are preset to acceptanceis ____.
a temperature of: a. +bmm
a. 105 to 110 Degree Celsius b. +6%
b. 110 to 120 Degree Celsius c. *bmm
c. 75 to 105 Degree Celsius d. 5%
d. 75 to 110 Degree Celsius
. *The result of Immersion/Compression test conducted on an asphalt
.In pavement construction, what is the required density of mix sample as follows:
bituminous mixture based on laboratory density of the compacted Dry Stability = 2000
specimens? Wet Stability =1000
a. Equal or greater than 65% What is the resulting Index of Retained Strength? Does it meet the
b. Equal or greater than 75% specification requirement of Item 310, Bituminous Concrete
c. Equal or greater than 85% Surface Course?
d. Equal or greater than 95% a. 200% Yes.
b. 200% No.
. How many layers should a 40-cm thick Aggregate Base Course be c. 50% Yes
placed? d. 50% No

. The following are the measurements (in cm.) of a concrete core taken
o s W
oo

for thickness determination of Sta. 0+100: 23, 24, 23, 23, 24, 24, 24,
23. The measurement at the center of the core is 23 cm. What is the
average thickness of the core if the design thickness is 23 cm.
Page 94 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed' Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 95

a. 23.50 cm d. be used as basis for incorporation of the materials into the

b. 23.44cm works
c. 23.25cm
d. 23.22cm 55. The minimum testing requirement for one quality test of concrete
hollow block is units for every 10,000 units.
60. Soil sample was subjected to the following procedures at the
laboratory a.) compaction at its optimum moisture content: b.)
application of surcharge (to the sample) to represent the estimated
thickness of pavement over the subgrade c.) soaking the sample for
four days; and then d.) forcing a plunger into the sample to a depth
of 2.5mm. What test was conducted on the soil? 36. What should be done on the subbase course with existing moisture
a. Abrasion test content of 10% higher than the optimum moisture of the AASHTO
b. Triaxial test T180 Method D?
c. Consolidation test a. Spread the required loose thickness and compact
d. CBR Test b. Add water, spread the loose thickness and compact
c. Dry out to reduce moisture, spread to the required loose
61 - In the 2013 Edition of DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, thickness and compact
Bridges and Airports, Item 202 is about: d. Spread to the required loose thickness
a. Lime Stabilized Road Mix Base Course i
b. Portland Cement Road Mix Base . Materi itable for embankment shall have a plasticity index of
c. Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course not more than:
d. Crushed Aggregates Base Course

62. The fine-grained soils in the field can be identified through the use
of simple visual and manual tests except:
a. Dry Strength
N
. The concrete has been tested for consistenc y. Afte.r the test, the
b. Plasticity
c. Water Mobility height of concrete was measured at 178 mm. What is the slump of
d. Dry Weight the concrete?
a. 122mm
63. Under what climatic condition(s) do we use the lower penetration b 172mm
grade or hard asphalts? ¢ 222mm
a. Cold climate d 272mm
b. Hot climate
c. Both cold and hot climate 39. Which of the following is not part of the Marshall method for
d. Rainy weather preparing and evaluating trial mixes?
a. aggregates are blended in proportion meeting the
64. The approval of preliminary samples from the same source shall: specifications.
a. be used as basis for acceptance of all materials from the b. the mixing and compacting temperature for the asphalt
source cement to be used are obtained from the temperature-
b. not be considered a guarantee of acceptance of all materials viscosity graph
from the source . density of the molded sample is measured to be able to
c. be used as basis for payment of the materials calculate the void properties
Page 96 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed

c. referee test
d. trial mixes are conducted using various ranges of asphalt
d. final test
content to determine the physical properties of the samples.

70. What penetration grade of asphaltic material is appropriate for . If the minimum compressive strength for concrete class "A" is 20.7
sealing of PCCP joints? MPa, what is the minimum compressive strength for concrete class
a. 85-100 "cr?
120-150 . 16 MPa
b.
. 20.7 MPa
c. 150-200
. 28.5 MPa
d. not exceeding 90
37.7 MPa
71. The correctness/effectiveness of all concrete mix design can be
checked by conducting . What is the permitted variation from design thickness of a layer of
a. core test aggregate subbase course?
b. trial mix a. +20mm
rength test b. +10mm
c.
c. +15mm
d. soundness test
d. +30 mm
72. Given: Bulk volume of asphalt specimen = 500 cc
Wigight of dry specimen in air = 1200 grams . The shape of a compaction curve in a laboratory compaction test of
soil is a:
Calculate the bulk specific gravity of the asphalt specimen:
a. 2.40 . hyperbolic
b. 2.00 . parabolic
c. 1.00 . semi-circle
. straight line
d. 0.40

73. Which is NOT a type of PCCP distress: . Peat and muck are considered as:
. suitable soil
a. Scaling
b. Crazing b. highly organic soil
c. Ravelling c. highly plastic soil
d. Pockmarks d. colloids

74. The temperature of concrete during the period of mixing while in . When using a nuclear density gauge, which of the following is NOT
a requirement?
transport and/or during placing shall not be permitted to rise above!
a. 25 Degree Celsius a. Operator must be licensed
b. 40 Degree Celsius b. Radiation exposure limits must be specified
c. 36 Degree Celsius c. Operator must wear thick clothes
d. 50 Degree Celsius d. Unit must be transported in approved cases

75. When the result of the second test differs from that of the first test . The maximum percentage abrasion loss allowed for paving concrete
on a sample representing the same lot of materials, the third test is coarse aggregate is:
done. This is referred to as: a. 30%
b. 40%
a. tertiary test
c. 50%
b. verdict test
Page 98 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2" Ed Page 99

d. 60% 88. The measurement of the thickness of an asphalt core using a caliper
is based on:
82. Stone Mastic Asphalt shall be placed at a temperature not less than: a. 4sides
a. 107 Degree Celsius b. 5 sides
b. 115 Degree Celsius 1 c. 6sides
c. 125 Degree Celsius d. 9sides
d. 135 Degree Celsius 1
89. As construction work progresses, you noticed that the materials
83. Permit for the procurement of chemicals used for various laboratory delivered at the project site are different from the ones tested and
testing can be secured from: that passed the requirements. As materials engineer, what would
a. BFAD you do?
b. NAPOLCOM a. authorize the use of the material
c. NBI b. conduct immediate retesting of the materials for verification
d. PDEA purposes
c. reject the materials
84. Concrete curing refers to: d. replace the materials
a. procedures done to repair damages in concrete surface
b. procedures done to promote cement hydration Testing of concrete samples may be done at an earlier age for
c. proce(‘lures done to maximize concrete strength purposes of:
d. procedures done to minimize concrete cracking a. payment of completed pavement
b. determining the trend of its strength development
85. The aggregate component contributes internal friction to shear c. designing the concrete mixture
strength and stability of the bituminous mixture. The desirable d. decongesting the curing tank with samples
shape and surface texture of aggregate particles are:
a. round and smooth aggregate particles . What test determines the resistance to deformation of a compacted
b. angular and smooth aggregate particles asphalt concrete mix?
c. round and rough-textured particles a. Hardness test
d. angular and rough-textured particles b. Marshall Stability test
c. Ductility Test
86. The following are NOT the purpose of driving test piles except: d. Durability test
a. To determine the required pile length
b. To determine the cross-sectional area of the pile . If the bulk specific gravity of a bituminous mix is 2.342, and the dry
c. To determine the actual number of piles needed stability is 8,000 lbs., what is its Index of Retained test (IRS) if its
d. To determine spacing of the piles wet stability is 2,400 lbs.?
a.
87. This is a test criterion for reinforced concrete pipe tested in a three- b.
edge bearing test. e
a. 0.3 mm crack d.
b. 0.4 mm crack
c. 0.5 mm crack . The laboratory density of a bituminous mix 2.233. What is the
d. 0.6 mm crack degree of compaction of a 5 cm, asphalt overlay for which a field
Density of 2.010 was obtained?
a. 456%
Page 100 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 101

b. 55% c. Isasimple and versatile test method which can be used even
c. 90% on rough concrete surfaces
d. 110% d. The test is used to determine the composition of aggregates

94. A set of three (3) core samples has the following compressive 99. Tensile strength, yield strength, and elongation are the common
strengths: 4000 psi, 3500 psi, and 2600 psi. If the required strength required tests to determine quality of:
is 3500 psi, the area represented by the core samples is: a. aluminum guardrails
a. acceptable b. galvanized steel sheets and coils
b. not acceptable c. reinforcing steel bars
c. acceptable but with adjustments in pavement d. steel pipes
d. subject to monitoring within the warranty period
100. The sand used in the field density test in determining the volume of
95. Sampling of soil aggregates in a big stockpile shall be done by: hole using sand cone method must be cleaned, dry and passing sieve
a. taking sample from the bottom, middle, and top of the number:
stockpile e. 30
b. shoveling-off the surface at the bottom of the stockpile and 40
taking full sample thereat
c. shoveling-off the surface at the middle of the stockpile and
taking full sample thereat
d. shoveling-off the surface at the top of the stockpile and
taking full sample thereat END OF QUESTIONS------

96. In Item 311-PCCP, the dividing line between coarse and fine
aggregates is mm sieve?
a. 2.36
b. 4.75
c. 95
d. 125

97. Sample of aggregate base course material when tested for quality
passed the requirements except grading. What will you recommend
as a Materials Engineer?
reject the material
replace the material
poop

accept the material at an adjusted price

reprocess the material by blending

98. The following are NOT true regarding the rebound hammer
(Schmidt) test for concrete, except:
a. The test is used to determine the consistency of fresh
concrete
b. Canbe used as a substitute to direct methods of compressive
strength determination such as tests on cored samples
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 103
Page 102 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed

ANSWER KEY

SEPTEMBER 2015
PART VI
CONTRACTORS' and CONSULTANTS’
MATERIALS ENGINEER WRITTEN EXAMINATION TEST QUESTIONS
A A

WwaorrPPrUowoomwaQww
MARCH 2016
CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'
MATERIALS ENGINEER
WRITTEN EXAMINATION

. D
G
B}
LA
. A
. D A
A B
.B D
. A B
99.
P
. A
.D 100.D
Page 104 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Page 105

ACCREDITATION EXAMINATION FOR CONTRACTORS'/CONSULTANTS' CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'

MATERIALS ENGINEER MATERIALS ENGINEER
{ANSWERSHEET) WRITTEN EXAMINATION
Examinee No. : Date of Examination MARCH 2016
Score Place of Examination : O ___Manila
Examinee’s Signature Note: Choose the BEST answer for these questions as hard as you can. You
may use the blank ANSWER SHEET from the previous page for
INSTRUCTION IN MARKING ANSWERS: easier answering and checking. The ANSWER KEY is at the end of
Shade your answer in each Item. If you wish to change your answer, mark an X on your first answer then this Chapter. God Bless!
shade your new answer and affix your initial.

A B C D A B C D A B CD A B
1. Which of the following is NOT a type of volume change of concrete?
[Mocoo [slococo [Hlocoo [sloo

00000000000000000Q00000000_@
a. Air content
2[O00C0O (OO0 O (a0 C |njoo b. Temperature changes
c. Shrinkage
OO0 OO BOOOO (a0 OC0O |(nloO
d. Creep
3L IO O OO 298|OO OO 5./ O O OO 79OO
5| OO0 OO O OOO 5O
O OO |80 O 2. The following factors does NOT affect the strength of concrete core
6|O O OO NIOO OO 56O
O OO |8|O O drilled from the structure except:
a. Diameter of the core
1|O000 20000 (0000 (a0
b. Length to diameter ratio
[N [eloleRe) BIO OO O B OO OO (83OO c. Manner of drilling
9 OO OO UnO OO O 9O OO O |8|OO d. Thickness of the core
DOOOO [5OOOO |(HOOOO |80
3. What is the weight of class "A" riprap stones?
NOO OO [|OOOO |H|OOOO (8OO a. 20 kg. to a max. of 35 kg with at least 50% weighing 30 kg.
ROOOO OCOCOO (0O OO [#|OO b. 15 kg. to a max. of 25 kg with at least 50% weighing 20 kg.
BOOCOO B O OO O 683|000 OO 88|
O O c. 15 kg. to a max. of 30 kg with at least 50% weighing 25 kg.
d. 10 kg. to a max. of 25 kg with at least 50% weighing 20 kg.
BO OO O PO OO O 6. | O O OO 8. | O O
BLOOOO |([NOCOOO (EOCO0OCO |n|oo 4. What is the function of emulsifiers in liquid asphalt?
6[OOOO |ajOooOO 6|/OOOO |0|OO a. To increase mixing ability with aggregates
NOOOO |[ajooOoO 7./ OO OO 20OO b. To retain water in asphalt for longer periods
c. To prevent asphalt from hardening
BIOOOO |afCOCOO (BOOOO |ia|lOO
d. To enable asphalt and water to mix
1BOOOO |uocooO 80O O OO 92 O O
WOOOO |65/O0OOOO [NOOOO [6lOO Which of the following is NOT authorized to test materials for use
o

/OOO O |(s|lOO0OCO noooo 9%,

|O in DPWH projects?
a. Any DPWH-accredited private testing laboratory
2NIOOO0O0O [0COOCO [NOCOCOOO |w|[OO
b. Any testing laboratory of a local government unit
BOOOO @8O OO O BIOO OO [98|0O
O ¢. Any DPWH-Implementing Offices Laboratory
BOOOO ([BOOOO [HOOOO |9 OO
iOOOO iOOOO LOOOO —I_KE‘OO
Page 106 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 107

d. DOST Testing laboratory d. All of the above

6. What is NOT the most commonly accepted measure of the hardness 11. Portland cement is called because:
of concrete? a. It mainly comes from Portland, Oregon, USA
a. Soundness test b. It was originally registered as a trade name in the island of
b. L.A. Abrasion test Portland
c. Petrographic test el It resembled cement obtained by grinding natural rocks
d. Fractured face test 4 found on the Isle of Portland
It was mainly the idea of its inventor, Mr. Joseph Aspdin
7. The temperature of a 7.0 cu.m. bituminous mix delivered at‘vthe
project site is 20 degrees centigrade lower than the required 12. The purpose of capping concrete cylinders prior to testing for
compaction temperature require by the job-mix formula. As the compression is to:
materials engineer of the project, what should you recommend? a. Protect the ends of the cylinder from premature breaking
a. Allow the use of the delivered materials resulting from improper application of load
b. Advise the contractor to spread the mixture in one layer only b. Provide smooth, flat ends that are perpendicular to axis of
c. Reject the delivered materials the sample
d. Adjust the job-mix formula c. Prevent cylinder from tilting
d. To maintain the verticality of the cylinder
8. A soil compacted dry will reach a certain dry density. If compacted
again with the same compacted effort, but this time with water in 3. It is the class of concrete used for bedding and after each layer of
soil, the dry density will go higher because: stone in rubble concrete
a. The water lubricates the grains and allows them to slide in Class A
a denser structure Class B
b. Air is forced out of the soil Class C
c. More space is left for the soil solids Class D
d. All of the above
. If beam samples taken from a newly paved section failed to meet the
9. What is the minimum compaction requirement for an embankment? strength requirement and it is not advisable to obtain cores from the
a. 80% structure due to structural considerations, as a Materials Engineer,
b. 90% what will you do if the deficiency in strength of the concrete
c. 95% specimens is 15%?
d. 100% a. Reject the section represented by the failed specimens.
b. Rework the section represented by the failed specimens.
10. The amounts of materials passing the No. 50 and No. 100 sieves are c. Accept the section at an adjusted price due to strength
important to concrete aggregates because: deficiency.
a. The minimum amounts of these fine-sand sizes are required d. Modify the concrete mix design
to ensure that the surface can be finished easily to an
acceptable degree of smoothness 15. A transit mixer for road construction was found to have a 6" slump
b. The maximum amounts of these fine-sand sizes are required of fresh concrete instead of the required 3". What will you
to ensure that the cement paste is sufficient to cover each recommend if you are the assigned Materials Engineer?
particle a. Add Portland cement to attain the required 3" slump.
c. An excessive quantity of fines would result in an b. Add Portland cement and fine aggregate to attain the
uneconomical mix required 3" slump
Page 108 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 109

c. Reject the concrete mixture 21. The following properties of asphalt mix can be determined in a core
d. Let the concrete mix diverted for pouring on a prepared sample, except for:
column for retaining wall of the same project. a . Index of Retained Strength
b. Asphalt Content
16. What test determines the resistance to deformation of a compacted c. Grading
asphalt concrete mix? d. Specific Gravity
a. Hardpess Test
b. Marshall Stability Test . Consolidation test is usually performed on
c. Ductility Test samples.
d. Durability Test a. Disturbed
b. Undisturbed
17. The improper compaction of an embankment material will c. Consolidated
, except: d. Compacted
a. Minimize compressibility
b. Decrease soil permeability . What is the minimum test requirement for riprap boulders?
c. Increase shear strength and soil stability a. Stone size and specific gravity
d. Decrease voids spaces b. Stone Size or weight test and inspection report on
assessment of stone soundness
18. In concrete pouring, large variations in the concrete cylinder test c. Stone size or weight test and abrasion test
results were observed. This shall be remedied by: d. Abrasion test only
a. Taking the average test result to ensure it is above the
specifications requirement . Under Item 406, Prestressed Concrete Structures of the DPWH
b. Checking the calibration of the compression machine. Specifications, post-tensioning of the Prestressing reinforcement
c. Reviewing the mix design, materials quality and aggregate shall be not commenced until test on concrete cylinder indicate that
condition in the batching process the concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least:
d. All of the above a. 25 MPa
b. 30 MPa
19. What is the significance of the loss on ignition test of cement? c. 20 MPa
a. Itis a measure of the heat generated when cement is mixed d. 28 MPa
with water.
b. It signifies pre-hydration or moisture uptake of cement . The following are generally true in the production of high-strength
while it is shelved concrete, except:
c. It is a measure of the resistance of cement when exposed to a. Coarse aggregates should be obtained from crushed rock to
fire give the best cement/particle bond
d. None of the above b. Smaller-size aggregates are preferred as more area is
available for cement bonding
20. Unconfined compressive strength test is usually performed on’ . Admixtures include accelerators and retarders
a. Sandy soils . Bigger size aggregates are preferred as more voids are
b. Silty Soils available for cement bonding
c. Organic Soils
d. Clayey Soils 26. The rate of application of emulsified asphalt used as tack coat,
should be within the range of:
a. 0.2to 0.5 liters/sq.meter
Page 110 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 111

b. 0.2 to 0.7 liters/sq.meter 32. Stability of an asphalt pavement is the ability to resist shoving and
c. 0.15 to 0.7 liters/sq.meter rutting under traffic loads.
d. 1.0 to 2.0 liters/sq.meter a. more medium size sand
b. angular and rough aggregates
. In how many hou should concrete core samples be submerged in c. more asphalt
water before subjecting them to compression test? d. bandc
a. Atleast 30
b. At least 35 The spot test on asphalt is used to determine:
c. At least 40 a. Overheating during manufacture
d. Atleast 48 b. Overheating during construction
c. The amount of spot per unit volume
28. A concrete beam fails within middle third at 7,000 Ibs. The flexural d. The amount of spot per unit area
strength of the sample is:
a. 248 psi . What is used to measure pavement surface irregularity?
b. 583 psi a. Falling Weight Deflectometer
c. 680 psi b. Pendulum apparatus
d. 3,500 psi c. Dynamic Cone Penetrometer Apparatus
d. 3-meter straight edge
29. In the process of compaction of Item 200 (Aggregate Subbase
Course) which contains sandy material, only 80% density was The laboratory density of a bituminous mix 97%. If the density of
attained. What is your recommendation in order to comply with the the newly completed asphalt pavement is 95%, what is the degree of
100% minimum degree of the compaction? compaction?
a. Adjust the water content a. 95%
b. Place the material in thin layer b. 97%
c. Provide additional binder c. 98%
d. Use roller with greater compactive effort d. 102%

30. In bituminous plant-mix surface course, the temperature of the mix The following can be used to help stabilize slope except:
shall have an allowable of: a. Vetiver grass hedgerows
a. +5 Degrees Celsius b. Legumes
b. +10 Degrees Celsius c. Grass cover
c. *15 Degrees Celsius d. Coconut Tree
d. +20 Degrees Celsius
The following test can be performed on disturbed samples from soil
31. The apparent omission of a detailed description or definition exploration, except:
concerning the quality of materials in the plan and specification a. Grading test
shall be regarded to mean that: b. Unit weight and quantity of organic matter
a. Any material can be used c. Consolidation test
b. Materials of first-class quality are to be used d. Liquid and plastic limit
c. Materials that are recommended by the contractor can be
used The workability of a bituminous mix is dependent on the:
d. None of the above a. Gradation of aggregates
b. Temperature of mix
Page 112 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed

c. Asphalt content . 2 Hours

d. Shape and texture of aggregates . 4 Hours
. 6 Hours
39. Slurry system for road surface treatment of Item 304A is a type of: . 8 Hours
a. Cold asphalt mixture
b. Hot mix asphalt mixture 45. From the following data, determine the degree of compaction.
c. Warm mix asphalt Field density test data:
d. Porous asphalt
Weight of material taken from hole, kg [=4.885
40. The rate of loading of the machine will somehow affect the strength Weight of sand to fill hole, kg = 3.885
of the materials being test. The rate of loading that must be observed Volume of hole, cu.m
when testing the concrete cylinder specimen is: Wet unit weight, kg/cu.m
a. 20-50 psi/sec Dry unit weight, kg/cu.m
b. 30-60 psi/sec
c. 40-70 psi/sec Laboratory Data:
d. 50-80 psi/sec Maximum dry density, kg/cu.m
; . Optimum Moisture Content, %
41. When the top surface of a concrete specimen is rough and not truly
s concentrations are introduced and the strength of the
reduced by about:
a. 1/2
b. 173
c. 1/4
d. 1/5 46. ASTM C150 requires that the 28-day strength of mortar made from
Type I Portland cement be at least 27.6 MPa. Three specimens were
42. During testing of concrete cylinders in uniaxial compression, what tested: two passed but one failed by more than 20%. What will be
will happen to the result of the test if the rate of loading is rapid Gi.e. the conclusion?
way above the prescribed rate of loading? a. Discard the failed result and conclude that the particular
a. Nothing - rate of loading has no bearing on the result of the cement passed the specification.
test Perform a re-test since the data is inconclusive
. The computed compressive strength will be lower Get the average of the three and if the average is more than
c. The computed compressive strength will be higher 27.6 MPa, conclude that the particular cement passed the
d. The result will depend on the age of the specimen specification
Conclude that the cement does not pass the specifications
. In hot climate under sustained loading, asphalt cements behave since it failed to give the consistent results
like:
- \{;scous liqyids 47. How do you obtain the density of soil in the field?
B \Jscous so!lds a. By weighing the disturbed soil removed and obtaining the
c. Elastic solids volume of hole with sand or with other means
d. Soft solids By conducting in-situ CBR in the field
By weighing the remaining soil in the laboratory
44, Before concrete paving, the base of a roadway should be kept in By conducting triaxial test in the field
moist condition and saturated with water for at least:
Page 114 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 115

48. Following are the results obtained from field density and laboratory 53. In pavement construction, what is the required density of
compaction tests: bituminous mixture based on laboratory density of the compacted
Weight of dry soil =80¢g specimens?
Weight of water in soil sample 16 g a. Equal or greater than 65%
Wet density of soil 1.9 glee b. Equal or greater than 75%
Maximum dry density obfained from laboratory compaction c. Equal or greater than 85%
=1.68 glce d. Equal or greater than 95%
Using the above data, the moisture content of the sample is
a. 15% . How many layers should a 40-cm thick Aggregate Base Course be
b. 20%
c. 26%
d. 30%

49. In a plastic limit test, what is the diameter of thread soil samples to
be rolled by hand?
55. It is a type of emulsified asphalt that works better with wet
a. 3.2mm
b. 4.75 mm aggregates and in cold weather.
c. 6.4mm a. Anionic Emulsion
d. 9.6 mm b. Cationic Emulsion
c. Liquid Asphalt
50. The fine-grained soils in the field can be identified through the use d. Cutback Asphalt
of simple visual and manual tests except:
a. Dry Strength 3. If the soil is NOT compacted at its maximum dry density, it will:
b. Plasticity a. Increase stability/strength
c. Water Mobility b. Minimize future settlement
d. Dry Weight c. Decrease permeability
d. Increase permeability
51. Accreditation of Contractors/Consultants' Materials Engineers is
provided in the Department Order (D.O.) No. . 57. Bituminous mixture shall have a minimum dry compressive
a. D.O. No. 26, Series of 1990 strength of:
b. D.O. No. 141, Series of 1999 a. 100 psi
c. D.O. No. 253, Series of 2003 b. 200 psi
d. None of the above c. 300 psi
d. 400 psi
52. It is essential to soil mechanics work that drying ovens are preset to
a temperature of: . The DPWH minimum requirement for asphalt pavement thickness
a. 105 to 110 Degree Celsius acceptance is ___.
b. 110 to 120 Degree Celsius a. +bmm
c. 75 to 105 Degree Celsius b. +5%
d. 75 to 110 Degree Celsius c. ~hmm
d. 5%
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 117
Page 116

59. The result of Immersion/Compression test conducted on an asphalt 85-100

mix sample as follows: 120-150
150-200
Dry Stability = 2000 not exceeding 90
Wet Stability = | 1000
64. Under what climatic condition(s) do we use the lower penetration
What is the resulting Index of Retained Strength? Does it meet the grade or hard asphalts?
specification requirement of Item 310, Bituminous Concrete a. Cold climate
Surface Course? b. hot climate
a. 200% Yes. c. both cold and hot climate
b. 200% No. d. rainy weather
c. 50% Yes
d. 50% No 65. The approval of preliminary samples from the same source shall:
a. Be used as basis for acceptance of all materials from the
60. The following are the measurements (in cm.) of a concrete core taken source
b. Not be considered a guarantee of acceptance of all materials
for thickness determination at Sta. 0+100: 23, 24, 23, 23, 24, 24, 23.
Actual measurement of the core at the center is 23 cm. What is the from the source
average thickness of the core if the design thickness is 23 cm.? for payment of the materials
a. 23.5cm sis for incorporation of the materials into the
b. 44 cm
c. 23.25cm
66. The minimum testing requirement for one quality test of concrete
d. 23.22cm
hollow block is units for every 10,000 units.
a. 3
61. Soil sample was subjected to the following procedures at‘ the
laboratory a.) compaction at its optimum moisture content: b.) b. 6
application of surcharge (to the sample) to represent the estimated
c. 10
thickness of pavement over the subgrade c.) soaking the sample for d. 12
four days: and then d.) forcing a plunger into the sample to a depth
of 2.5mm. What test was conducted on the soil? 67. What should be done on the subbase course with existing moisture
a. Abrasion test content of 10% higher than the optimum moisture of the AASHTO
b. Triaxial test T180 Method D?
c. Consolidation test a. Spread the required loose thickness and compact
d. CBR Test b. Add water, spread the loose thickness and compact
c. Dry out to reduce moisture, spread to the required loose
62. In the 2013 Edition of DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, thickness and compact
Bridges and Airports, Item 202 is about: d. Spread to the required loose thickness
a. Lime Stabilized Road Mix Base Course
b. Portland Cement Road Mix Base 68. The concrete has been tested for consistency. After the test, the
c. Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course height of concrete was measured at 178 mm. What is the slump of
d. Crushed Aggregates Base Course the concrete?
a. 122mm
63. What penetration grade of asphaltic material is appropriate for b. 172mm
sealing of PCCP joints? c. 222mm
Page 118 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 119
d. 272mm 74. The temperature of concrete during the period of mixing while in
transport and/or during placing shall not be permitted to rise above:
69. Which of the following is not part of the Marshall Method for a. 25 Degree Celsius
preparing and evaluating trial mixes? b. 40 Degree Celsius
a. Aggregates are blended in proportion meeting the c. 36 Degree Celsius
specifications. d. 50 Degree Celsius
b. The mixing and compacting temperature for the asphalt
cement to be used are obtained from the temperature- 5. When the result of the second test differs from that of the first test
viscosity graph on a sample representing the same lot of materials, the third test is
c. Density of the molded sample is measured to be able to done. This is referred to as:
calculate the void properties a. Tertiary test
d. Trial mixes are conducted using various ranges of asphalt b. Verdict test
content to determine the physical properties of the samples. c. Referee test
d. Final test
70. What is the permitted variation from design thickness of a layer of
aggregate subbase course? 3. If the minimum compressive strength for concrete class "A" is 20.7
a. +20mm MPa, what is the minimum compressive strength for concrete class
b. +10mm ore
a. +15mm a. 16.56 MPa
b. +30mm b. 20.7 MPa
c. 28.5 MPa
71. The correctness/effectiveness of all concrete mix design can be d. 37.7MPa
checked by conducting:
a. core test - Materials suitable for embankment shall have a plasticity index of
b. trial mix not more than:
c. strength test a. 12
d. soundness test b. 10
c. 8
72. Given: Mass of Asphalt Specimen in air is = 1200. Mass of asphalt d. 6
specimen in water = 700; Mass of asphalt cement in SSD = 1203;
Calculate the Bulk Specific Gravity of the asphalt specimen. . The shape of a compaction curve in a laboratory compaction test of
a. 2.406 soil is a:
b. 1.714 a. hyperbolic
c. 1.179 b. parabolic
d. 2.386 ¢ semi-circle
d. straight line
73. Which is NOT a type of PCCP distress:
a. Scaling 9. Peat and muck are considered as:
b. Crazing a. Suitable soil
c. Ravelling b. Highly organic soil
d. Pockmarks c. High plastic soil
d. Colloids
Page 120 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Page 121

80. When using a nuclear density gauge, which of the following is NOT b. To determine the cross-sectional area of the pile
a requirement? c¢. To determine the actual number of piles needed
a. Operator must be licensed d. To determine spacing of the piles
b. Radiation exposure limits must be specified
c. Operator must wear thick clothes . This is a test criterion for reinforced concrete pipe tested in a three-
d. Unit must be transported in approved cases edge bearing test.
a. 0.3 mm crack
81. The maximum percentage abrasion loss allowed for paving concrete b. 0.4 mm crack
coarse aggregate is: c. 0.5 mm crack
a. 30% d. 0.6 mm crack
b. 40%
c. 50% . The measurement of the thickness of an asphalt core using a caliper
d. 60% is based on:
a. 4 sides
82. Stone Mastic Asphalt shall be placed at a temperature not less than: b. 5 sides
a. 107 Degree Celsius c. 6 sides
b. 115 Degree Celsius d. 9 sides
c. 125 Degree Celsius
d. 135 Degree Celsius . As construction work progresses, you noticed that the materials
delivered at the project site are different from the ones tested and
83. Permit for the procurement of chemicals used for various laboratory that passed the requirements. As materials engineer, what would
testing can be secured from: you do?
a. BFAD a. Authorize the use of the material
b. NAPOLCOM b. Conduct immediate vretesting of the materials for
c. NBI verification purposes
d. PDEA c. Reject the materials
d. Replace the materials
84. Concrete curing refers to:
a. Procedures done to repair damages in concrete surface . Testing of concrete samples may be done at an earlier age for
b. Procedures done to promote cement hydration purposes of:
c. Procedures done to maximize concrete strength a. payment of completed pavement
d. Procedures done to minimize concrete cracking b. determining the trend of its strength development
c. designing the concrete mixture
5. The aggregate component contributes internal friction to shear d. decongesting the curing tank with samples
-3

strength and stability of the bituminous mixture. The desirable

shape and surface texture of aggregate particles are: . What test determines the resistance to deformation of a compacted
a. Round and smooth aggregate particles asphalt concrete mix?
b. Angular and smooth aggregate particles a. Hardness test
c. Round and rough-textured particles b. Marshall Stability test
d. Angular and rough-textured particles c. Ductility Test
d. Durability test
86. The following are NOT the purpose of driving test piles except:
a. To determine the required pile length
Page 122 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 123

92. If the bulk specific gravity of a bituminous mix is 2.342, and the d_ry 97. Sample of aggregate base course material when tested for quality
stability is 3,000 lbs., what is its Index of Retained test (IRS) if its passed the requirements except grading. What will you recommend
wet stability is 2,400 lbs.? as a Materials Engineer?
a. 34 Reject the material
b. 53 Replace the material
c. 80 Accept the material at an adjusted price
d. 127 Reprocess the material by blending

93. The laboratory density of a bituminous mix 2.233. What is the 98. The following are NOT true regarding the rebound hammer
degree of compaction of a 5 cm, asphalt overlay for which a field (Schmidt) test for concrete, except:
Density of 2.010 was obtained? a. The test is used to determine the consistency of fresh
a. 45% concrete
b. 55% b. Can be used as a substitute to direct methods of compressive
c. 90% strength determination such as tests on cored samples
d. 110% c. Isasimple and versatile test method which can be used even
on rough concrete surfaces
94. A set of three (3) core samples has the following compressive d. The test is used to determine the composition of aggregates
strengths: 4000 psi psi, and 2600 psi. If the required strength
S

is 3500 psi, the area represented by the core samples is: 99. Tensile strength, yield strength, and elongation are the common
a. Acceptable required tests to determine quality of:
b. Not acceptable a. Aluminum guardrails
c. Acceptable but with adjustments in pavement b. Galvanized steel sheets and coils
d. Subject to monitoring within the warranty period c. Reinforcing steel bars
d. Steel pipes
5. Sampling of soil aggregates in a big stockpile shall be done by:
©53

a. Taking sample from the bottom, middle, and top of the 100. The sand used in the field density test in determining the
stockpile volume of hole using sand cone method must be cleaned, dry and
b. Shoveling-off the surface at the bottom of the stockpile and passing sieve number:
taking full sample thereat a. 30
c. Shoveling-off the surface at the middle of the stockpile and
taking full sample thereat
d. Shoveling-off the surface at the top of the stockpile and
taking full sample thereat

96. In Item 311-PCCP, the dividing line between coarse and fine
aggregates is mm sieve?
a. 2.36
b. 4
&
Page 124 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 125

ANSWER

MARCH
KEY

2016
ART VII-A
CONTRACTORS’ and CONSULTANTS’
MATERIALS ENGINEER WRITTEN EXAMINATION TEST QUESTIONS

L A 26. B 51.D 76. B

2. D 27.C 52 A 71.D
3. B 28. B 53. D 78. B
4. D 9. D 54, A 79. B
5 B B 55. B 80. C
6. C 3B 56. D 81. B
7. C 2. B 57.B 82. D SEPTEMBER 2016
8 B A 58. C 83.D
9 C D 59. D 81 B CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'
:t]w: ? 3. ( 2(1) g 22 2 MATERIALS ENGINEER
12. B 37. C 62. D 87. A WRITTEN EXAMINATION
13. B 38. B 63. A 88. A
14. C 39. A 64. B 89. C
15. C 0. A 65. B 90. B
16. B 41. B 66. B 91. B
17. D 42. C 67. C 92. C
18.D 43.B 68. A 93. C
19.B 44. A 69. B 94. B
20. D 45. A 70. A 95. A
21 A 146.D 71. B 96. B
22. B 4T.A 72.D 97.D
23. B 18.B 73. C 98. B
24.D 49. A 74. C 99. C
25.D 50. C 75. C 100.D
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
Page 126 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 127

ACCREDITATION EXAMINATION FOR CONTRACTORS'/CONSULTANTS' CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'

MATERIALS ENGINEER MATERIALS ENGINEER
(ANSWER SHEET) WRITTEN EXAMINATION
Examinee No. Date of Examination SEPTEMBER 2016
Score Place of Examination : <__Manila
Examinee's Signature + Choose the BEST answer for these questions as hard as you can. You
may use the ANSWER SHEET from the previous page for answering
INSTRUCTION IN MARKING ANSWERS: the questions. The answer key and SOLUTIONS with
Shade your answer in each Item. If you wish to change your answer, mark an X on your first answer the EXPLANATIONS are on p‘art B of this Chapter. Good luck!
shade your new answer and affix your initial.

A B C D A B CD A B C D A B C
Tensile strength, yield strength, and elongation are the common
[Mocoo [slococo [nloococo [sloco required tests to determine quality of:
a. Aluminum guardrails
PN (e le o o] 7|OOC OO 2O OO 7|0
O O
b. Galvanized steel sheets and coils
[N [ele oo B[OOOO BOOOO [B|OOO c. Reinforcing steel bars
L|IOO OO 9| C O OO 54O OO O N[O OO d. Steel pipes
i [elelofe)] 0. O O OO BIOOOO (8OO O
If the bulk specific gravity of a bituminous mix is 2.342, and the dry
6| OOC OO O OO O 5. (O O O O 8. | O O O
stability is 3,000 lbs., what is its Index of Retained test (IRS) if its
7./ 0000 RO OO O 7.0
0 OO (8OO O wet stability is 2,400 1bs.?
3| OO OO BIOO OO BOOOO [BOOO
IOOOO |NOOOO |B|OOOO |uOOO
VDOOOO |BOOOO (OO (B5|OCOO
NOOOO [H[/[OOOO [1|/OOOO (86|ODO
RO OO 7| OO OO 2./ OO OO 87.|
O O O The laboratory density of a bituminous mix 2.233. What is the
BIOOOO |BOOOO |8|COCOO |8OOO degree of compaction of a 5 cm, asphalt overlay for which a field
Density of 2.010 was obtained?
BOOOO |NOOOO || OOOO |8|OCOD
a. 456%
BOOOO WOCOOO (BOCOODO [(90OCOO b. 55%
16 [ OO OO |[a|ODODOO 66.| O O OO 1. |O O O c. 90%
d. 110%
NNO O OO R OO0 OO 6.|O © OO 2|0 OO
BOOOO |8/OOOO B[OOOO |aOCO O
A set of three (3) core samples has the following compressive
1O O OO WO O OO 6./ O O OO 9% |O OO strengths: 4000 psi, 3500 psi, and 2600 psi. If the required strength
0|JOOCOO (6500 OCO 0/O0OO0OOO (65O OO is 3500 psi, the area represented by the core samples is:
a. Acceptable
2O OO O %[O O OO NOOOO |%6|/0 OO
b. Not acceptable
NOOOO ([#[OOOO [PN[COCOO [(7/OOO ¢ Acceptable but with adjustments in pavement
BOOOCO 3OO0 OO BIOOOO |8(C OO d. Subject to monitoring within the warranty period
BOOOO [BHOOOO NnOOO O [9OOO
BLIOOOO (D OOOO [BOOOO EE_OOO
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 129
Page 128 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed'

b. Advise the contractor to spread the mixture in one layer only

5. Sampling of soil aggregates in a big stockpile shall be done by: c. Reject the delivered materials
a. Taking sample from the bottom, middle, and top of the d. Adjust the job-mix formula
stockpile
of the stockpile and 11. Test reports on thirteen (13) concrete beam samples indicate that
b. the surface at the bottom
Shoveling-off
taking full sample thereat loading was stopped after reaching the required flexural strength of
c. Shoveling-off the surface at the middle of the stockpile and. 550 psi. This practice is
a. Improper because test procedure provides that the test
taking full sample thereat
d. None of the above should be carried out to failure
Improper because test procedure was stopped without basis
6. When taking three (3) or more samples of aggregates to be combined Proper because the strength specification for concrete
for one (1) material sample, pavement is 550 psi
a. The small samples must be packed in separate sample bags Proper because the test should not be carried out to failure
b. The small samples must be obtained from different lots since the machine may be damaged
c. The small samples should of approximately equal size
12. Which of the following is true regarding the rebound hammer
d. None of the above
(Schmidt) test for concrete?
7. Sample of aggregate base course material when tested for quality a. The test is used to determine the uniformity of concrete
passed the requirements except grading. What will you recommend b. Can be used as a substitute to direct methods of compressive
as a Materials Engineer? strength determination such as tests on cored samples
Reject the material ¢. Isasimple and versatile test method which can be used even
Replace the material on rough concrete surfaces
ao s

Accept the material at an adjusted price d. All of the above

Reprocess the material by blending
13. A transit mixer for road construction was found to have a 6" slump
of fresh concrete instead of the required 3". What will you
8. The is the purpose of driving test piles?
a. To determine the required pile length recommend if you are the assigned Materials Engineer?
b. To determine the cross-sectional area of the pile a. Add Portland cement to attain the required 3" slump.
b. Add Portland cement and fine aggregate to attain the
c. To determine the actual number of piles needed
d. None of the above required 3" slump
Reject the concrete mixture
Let the concrete mix diverted for pouring on a prepared
9. Which following factors does NOT affect the strength of concrete
cores drilled from the structure: column for retaining wall of the same project.
a. Diameter of the core
b. Length to diameter ratio 14. What is the minimum compaction requirement for an embankment?
c. Manner of drilling a. 80%
d. None of the above b. 90%
c. 95%
10. The temperature of a 5.0 cu.m bituminous mix delivered at the d. 100%
project site is 15 degrees centigrade lower than the required
compaction temperature require by the job-mix formula. As the 15. What is NOT the most commonly accepted measure of the hardness
materials engineer of the project, what should you recommend? of concrete?
a. Allow the use of the delivered materials a. Soundness test
Page 130 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 131

b. L.A. Abrasion test d. Class D

c. Petrographic test
d. Fractured face test 21. The amounts of materials passing the No. 50 and No. 100 sieves are
important to concrete aggregates because:
16. A soil compacted dry will reach a certain dry density. If compacte
again with the same compacted effort, but this time with water in
d a. The minimum amounts of these fine-sand sizes are required. - —
to ensure that the surface can be finished easily to an
soil, the dry density will go higher because: acceptable degree of smoothness
a. The water lubricates the grains and allows them to slide in The maximum amounts of these fine-sand sizes-are required
a denser structure to ensure that the cement paste is sufficient to cover each
Air is forced out of the soil particle
c. More space is left for the soil solids c. An excessive quantity of fines would result in an
d. Al of the above uneconomical mix
17 d. All of the above
- Portland cement is called because:
a. It mainly comes from Portland, Oregon, USA . Unconfined compressive strength test is usually performed on:
b. It was originally registered as a trade name in the island of a. Sandy soils
Portland b. Silty Soils
c. It resembled cement obtained by grinding natural rocks c. Organic Soils
found on the Isle of Portland d. Clayey Soils
d. None of the above
. If beam samples taken from a newly paved section failed to meet the
18. The purpose of capping concrete cylinders prior to testing for strength requirement and it is not advisable to obtain cores from the
compression is to: structure due to structural considerations, as a Materials Engineer,
a. Protect the ends of the cylinder from premature breaking what will you do if the deficiency in strength of the concrete
resulting from improper application of load specimens is 15%?
b. Provide smooth, flat ends that are perpendicular to axis of a. Reject the section represented by the failed specimens.
the sample b. Rework the section represented by the failed specimens.
c. Prevent cylinder from tilting c. Accept the section at an adjusted price
d. To maintain the verticality of the cylinder due to strength deficiency.
d. Modify the concrete mix design
. The laboratory density of a bituminous mix 97%. If the density of
the newly completed asphalt pavement is 95%, what is the degree of . The improper compaction of an embankment material will:
compaction? Minimize compressibility
a. 95% b. Decrease soil permeability
b. 97% c. Increase shear strength and soil stability.
c. 98% d. None of the above
d. 102%
5. In concrete pouring, large variations in the concrete cylinder test
20. It is the class of concrete used for bedding and after each layer of results were observed. This shall be remedied by:
stone in rubble concrete a. Taking the average test result to ensure it is above the
a. Class A specifications requirement
b. Class B b. Checking the calibration of the compression machine.
c. ClassC
Page 132 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 133

c. Reviewing the mix design, materials quality and aggregate 31. Which of the following is NOT a type of volume change of concrete?
condition in the batching process a. Air content
d. All of the above b. Temperature changes
c. Shrinkage
26. What is the significance of the loss on ignition test of cement? d. Creep
a. Itis a measure of the heat generated when cement is mixed
with water. 32. The following are generally true in the production of high-strength
b. It signifies pre-hydration or moisture uptake of cement concrete, except:
while it is shelved a. Coarse aggregates should be obtained from crushed rock to
c. It is a measure of the resistance of cement when exposed to give the best cement/particle bond
fire b. Smaller-size aggregates are preferred as more area is
d. None of the above available for cement bonding
c. Admixtures include accelerators and retarders
27. What test determines the resistance to deformation of a compacted d. Allof the above
asphalt concrete mix?
e. Hardness test . The following properties of asphalt mix can be determined in a core
f. Marshal Stability test sample, except for:
g. Ductility Test Index of Retained Strength
h. Durability test Asphalt Content
Grading
28. What is the minimum test requirement for riprap boulders? Specific Gravity
a. Stone size and specific gravity
b. Stone Size or weight test and inspection report on . In how many hours should concrete core samples be submerged in
assessment of stone soundness water before subjecting them to compression test?
c. Stone size or weight test and abrasion test a. At least 30
d. None of the above b. Atleast 35
c. Atleast 40
29. Consolidation test is usually performed on d. Atleast 45
samples.
a. Disturbed . A concrete cylinder (6”) fails at 92,000 1b. The compressive strength
b. Undisturbed of the sample is:
c. Consolidated a. 8,225 psi
d. Bothaandb b. 3234 psi
c. 32564 psi
30. Under Item 406, Prestressed Concrete Structures of the DPWH d. 3265 psi
Specifications, post-tensioning of the Prestressing reinforcement
shall be not commenced until test on concrete cylinder indicate that . In the process of compaction of Item 200 (Aggregate Subbase
the concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least: Course) which contains sandy material, only 80% density was
a. 25MPa attained. What is your recommendation in order to comply with the
b. 30 MPa 100% minimum degree of the compaction?
c. 20 MPa a. Adjust the water content
d. 28 MPa b. Place the material in thin layer
c. Provide additional binder
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Page 135
Page 134 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed

d. Use roller with greater compactive effort

43. The following can be used to help stabilize slope except:
37. The rate of application of emulsified asphalt used as tack coat, a. Vetiver grass hedgerows
should be within the range of: b. Legumes
a. 0.2 to 0.5 liters/sq.meter c. Grass cover
b. 0.2 to 0.7 liters/sq.meter d. Trees
c. 0.15 to 0.7 liters/sq.meter
. The following test can be performed on disturbed samples from soil
d. 1.0 to 2.0 liters/sq.meter
exploration, except:
38. The apparent omission of a detailed description or definition a. Grading test
b. Unit weight and quantity of organic matter
concerning the quality of materials in the plan and specification
shall be regarded to mean that: c. Consolidation test
a. Any material can be used d. Liquid and plastic limit
b. Materials of first class quality are to be used
. The workability of a bituminous mix is dependent on the:
c. Materials that are recommended by the contractor can be
used Gradation of aggregates
d. None of the above Temperature of mix
Asphalt content
39. Stability of an asphalt pavement is the ability to resist shoving and Shape and texture of aggregates
rutting under traffic loads.
a. more medium size sand . In bituminous plant-mix surface course, the temperature of the mix
b. angular and rough aggregates shall have an allowable of:
c. more asphalt a. +b Degrees Celsius
d. bandc b. +10 Degrees Celsius
c. 415 Degrees Celsius
40. The spot test on asphalt is used to determine: d. 420 Degrees Celsius
a. Overheating during manufacture
b. Overheating during construction . The rate of loading of the machine will somehow affect the strength
c. The amount of spot per unit volume of the materials being test. The rate of loading that must be observed
d. The amount of spot per unit area when testing the concrete cylinder specimen is:
20-50 psi/sec
41. What is used to measure pavement surface irregularity? 30-60 psi/sec
a. Falling Weight Deflectometer 40-70 psi/sec
b. Pendulum apparatus 50-80 psi/sec
c. Dynamic Cone Penetrometer Apparatus
. When the top surface of a concrete specimen is rough and not truly
d. 3-meter straight edge
plane, stress concentrations are introduced and the strength of the
. Before concrete paving, the base of a roadway should be kept in concrete is reduced by about:
moist condition and saturated with water for at least: a. 12
a. 2 Hours b. 1/3
b. 4 Hours c. 1/4
c. 6 Hours d. 1/5
d. 8Hours
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 137
Page 136

49. During testing of concrete cylinders in uniaxial compression, what d. (?oncll\de that the cement does not pass the specifications
will happen to the result of the test if the rate of loading is rapid (i.e. since it failed to give the consistent results
way above the prescribed rate of loading?
. Slurry system for road surface treatment of Item 304A is a type of:
a. Nothing - rate of loading has no bearing on the result of the
test a. Cold asphalt mixture
. The computed compressive strength will be lower b. Hot mix asphalt mixture
¢. The computed compressive strength will be higher c¢. Warm mix asphalt
d. The result will depend on the age of the specimen d. Porous asphalt

50. Which of the following is NOT authorized to test materials for use . The fine-grained soils in the field can be identified through the use
in DPWH projects? of simple visual and manual tests except:
a. Any DPWH-accredited private testing laboratory a. Dry Strength
b. Any testing laboratory of a local government unit b. Plasticity
¢. Any DPWH-Implementing Offices Laboratory c. Water Mobility
d. DOST Testing laboratory d. Dry Weight

51. From the following data, determine the degree of compaction. . Liquid limit is usually:
Field density test data: a. Greater than the plastic limit
Weight of material taken from hole, kg=4.885 b. Equal to the plastic limit
Weight of sand to fill hole, kg =3.885 c. Less than the plastic limit
Volume of hole, cu.m =0.0028 d. None of the above
Wet unit weight, kg/cu.m =1745
Dry unit weight, kg/cu.m =1663 56. The result of Immersion/Compression test conducted on an asphalt
mix sample as follows:
Laboratory Data: Dry Stability = 2000
Maximum dry density, kg/cu.m = 2250 Wet Stability = 1000
Optimum Moisture Content, % =8.10 What is the resulting Index of Retained Strength? Does it meet the
a. T4 specification requirement of Item 310, Bituminous Concrete
b. 78 Surface Course?
c. 95 200% Yes.
d. 105 200% No.
50% Yes
52. ASTM C150 requires that the 28-day strength of mortar made from 50% No
Type I Portland cement be at least 27.6 MPa. Three specimens were
tested: two passed but one failed by more than 20%. What will be . Soil sample was subjected to the following procedures at the
the conclusion’ laboratory a.) compaction at its optimum moisture content: b.)
a. Discard the failed result and conclude that the particular application of surcharge (to the sample) to represent the estimated
cement passed the specification. thickness of pavement over the subgrade c.) soaking the sample for
b. Perform a re-test since the data is inconclusive four days; and then d.) forcing a plunger into the sample to a depth
c. Get the average of the three and if the average is more than of 2.6mm. What test was conducted on the soil?
27.6 MPa, conclude that the particular cement passed the a. Abrasion test
specification b. Triaxial test
c. Consolidation test
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed
Page 138 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Page 139

d. CBR Test 64. Bituminous mixture shall have a minimum dry compressive
strength of: '
58. How do you obtain the density of soil in the field? a. 100 psi
a. By weighing the disturbed soil removed and obtaining the b. 200 psi
volume of hole with sand or with other means . 800 psi
b. By conducting in-situ CBR in the field d. 400 psi
c. By weighing the remaining soil in the laboratory
d. By conducting triaxial test in the field 65. The following are the measurements (in cm.) of a concrete core taken
for thickness determination at Sta. 0+100: 23, 24, 23, 23, 24, 24, 23.
59. Who should take samples of materials and bring them to the Actual measurement of the core at the center i cm. What is the
laboratory for testing? average thickness of the core if the design thickness
a. DPWH Mater: Is Engineer a. 23.5cm
b. Contractor's Materials Engineer b. 23.44 cm
c. Both DPWH and Contractor’'s Engineer ¢ 23.25cm
d. DPWH Project Engineer d. 23.22cm

66. Ir_\ pavement

60. It is essential to soil mechanics work that drying ovens are preset to construction, what is the required density of
a temperature of: bituminous mixture based on laboratory density of the compacted
a. 105 to 110 Degree Celsius specimens?
b. 110 to 120 Degree Celsius a. Equal or greater than 65%
c. 75 to 105 Degree Cel: b. Equal or greater than 75%
d. 75 to 110 Degree Celsius c. Equal or greater than 85%
d. Equal or greater than 95%
61. Soil classification is determined by
a. Atterberg Limit Test 67. In the 2013 Edition of DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways
,
b. Sieve Analysis Test Bridges and Airports, Item 202 is about:
c. Hydrometer Test a. Lime Stabilized Road Mix Base Course
d. Aand B b. Portland Cement Road Mix Base
c. Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course
62. It is a type of emulsified asphalt that works better with wet { d. Crushed Aggregates Base Course
aggregates and in cold weather.
a. Anionic Emulsion 68. The sand used in the field density test in determining the volume of
b. Cationic Emulsion hole using sand cone method must be cleaned, dry and passing sieve
c. Liquid Asphalt number:
d. Cutback Asphalt a. 30
b. 40
63. If the soil is properly compacted or compacted at its maximum c. 200
density, it will: d. 10
a. Increase stability/strength
b. Minimize future settlement 69. Under what climatic condition(s) do we use the lower penetration
c. Decrease permeability grade or hard asphalts?
d. All of the above a. Cold climate
b. hot climate
Page 140 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 141

¢. both cold and hot climate 7 5. The shape of a compaction curve in a laboratory compaction test of
d. rainy weather soil is a!
a. hyperbolic
70. The approval of preliminary samples from the same source shall: b. parabolic
a. Be used as basis for acceptance of all materials from the c. semi-circle
source d. straight line
b. Not be considered a guarantee of acceptance of all materials
from the source 5. What penetration grade of asphaltic material is appropriate for
c. Be used as basis for payment of the materials sealing of PCCP joints?
d. Be used as basis for incorporation of the materials into the a. 85100
works b. 120-150
c. 150-200
71. The minimum testing requirement for one quality test of concrete d. not exceeding 90
hollow block is units for every 10,000 units.
& 8 . The correctness/effectiveness of all concrete mix design can be
b 6 . checked by conducting:
c. 10 a. core test
d. 12 b. trial mix
c. strength test
72. What should be done on the subbase course with existing moisture d. soundness test
content of 10% higher than the optimum moisture of the AASHTO
T180 Method D? . Stone Mastic Asphalt shall be placed at a temperature not less than:
a. Spread the required loose thickness and compact a. 107 Degree Celsius
b. Add water, spread the loose thickness and compact b. 115 Degree Celsius
c. Dry out to reduce moisture, spread to the required loose c. 125 Degree Celsius
thickness and compact d. 135 Degree Celsius
d. Spread to the required loose thickness
. Given: Mass of Asphalt Specimen in air is = 1200. Mass of asphalt
73. Materials suitable for embankment shall have a plasticity index of specimen in water = 700; Mass of asphalt cement in SSD = 1203;
not more than: Calculate the Bulk Specific Gravity of the asphalt specimen.
a. 12 a. 2.406
b. 10 b. 1.714
c. 8 c. 1179
d. 6 d. 2.386

74. What is the water-cement ration that will produce the highest . When using a nuclear density gauge, which of the following is NOT
strength of concrete? a requirement?
a. 0.45 a. Operator must be licensed
b. 0.48 b. Radiation exposure limits must be specified
c. 050 c. Operator must wear thick clothes
d. 0.52 d. Unit must be transported in approved cases

. Peat and muck are considered as:

 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed
Page 142

Suitable soil Round and smooth aggregate particles

Highly organic soil Angular and smooth aggregate particles
ao e High plastic soil Round and rough-textured particles
Angular and rough-textured particles
Colloids

. Testing of concrete samples may be done at an earlier age for 88. In hot climate under sustained loading, asphalt cements behave
purposes of: like:
a. payment of completed pavement a. Viscous liquids
b. determining the trend of its strength development b. Viscous solids
c. designing the concrete mixture c. Elastic solids
d. all of the above d. Soft solids

83. The measurement of the thickness of an asphalt core using a caliper . This is a test criterion for reinforced concrete pipe tested in a three-
is based on: edge bearing test.
a. 4 sides a. 0.3 mm crack
b. 5 sides b. 0.4 mm crack
c. 6sides c. 0.5 mm crack
d. 9 sides d. 0.6 mm crack

84. The maximum percentage abrasion loss allowed for paving concrete . Concrete curing refers to:
coarse aggregate is: a. Procedures done to repair damages in concrete surface
a. 30% b. Procedures done to promote cement hydration
b. 40% c. Procedures done to maximize concrete strength
c. 50% d. Procedures done to minimize concrete cracking
d. 60%
The temperature of concrete during the period of mixing while in
85. Permit for the procurement of chemicals used for various laboratory transport and/or during placing shall not be permitted to rise above:
testing can be secured from: a. 25 Degree Celsius
a. BFAD b. 40 Degree Celsius
b. NAPOLCOM c. 36 Degree Celsius
c. NBI d. 50 Degree Celsius
d. PDEA
. As construction work progresses, you noticed that the materials
86. What test determines the resistance to deformation of a compacted delivered at the project site are different from the ones tested and
asphalt concrete mix? that passed the requirements. As materials engineer, what would
a. Hardness test you do?
b. Marshall Stability test Authorize the use of the material
c. Ductility Test Conduct immediate retesting of the materials for
d. Durability test verification purposes
Reject the materials
7. The aggregate component contributes internal friction to shear Replace the materials
®

strength and stability of the bituminous mixture. The desirable

shape and surface texture of aggregate particles are:
Page 144 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 145

93. The pH value of water suitable for concrete construction shall be b. Verdict test
generally be between: c. Referee test
a. 4and 6 d. Final test
b. 6and8
c. 8and 10 99. Which of the following is not part of the Marshall Method for
d. 10and 12 preparing and evaluating trial mixes?
a. Aggregates are blended in proportion meeting the
94. Which is NOT a type of PCCP distress: specifications.
a. Sealing b. The mixing and compacting temperature for the asphalt
b. Crazing cement to be used are obtained from the temperature-
c. Ravelling viscosity graph
d. Pockmarks . Density of the molded sample is measured to be able to
calculate the void properties
95. In concrete, rich mix means - Trial mixes are conducted using various ranges of asphalt
a. More water in the mix content to determine the physical properties of the samples.
b. More aggregates in the mix
¢. More cement in the mix What is the permitted variation from design thickness of a layer
d. Higher water-cement ratio of aggregate subbase course? h
a. +20 mm
96. Following are the results obtained from field density and laboratory b. +10mm
compaction tests: 1 . +15 mm
Weight of dry soil =80¢g . £30mm
Weight of water in soil sample =16¢g
Wet density of soil =1.9 glec
Maximum dry density obtained from laboratory compaction -----END OF QUESTIONS-----
=1.68 glcc
Using the above data, the moisture content of the sample
is?
a. 15%
b. 20%
c. 25%
d. 30%

. What is the function of emulsifiers in liquid asphalt?

©
=

a. To increase mixing ability with aggregates

b. To retain water in asphalt for longer periods
c. To prevent asphalt from hardening
d. To enable asphalt and water to mix

98. When the result of the second test differs from that of the first test
on a sample representing the same lot of materials, the third test is
done. This is referred to as:
a. Tertiary test
Page 146 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 147

ANSWER KEY

SEPTEMBER 2016 PA RT VII ~ B

CONTRACTORS' and CONSULTANTS’
MATERIALS ENGINEER WRITTEN EXAMINATION ANSWERS AND DETAILED
L C B 51. A 76. A EXPLANATIONS
2. C 27. B 52. D 7. B
3 C B 53. A 78.D
4 B B 54. C
5 A D 55. D
6. D A 56. D
7. D D 57.D
y A g8. A SEPTEMBER 2016
g eh! CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'
> i p MATERIALS ENGINEER
. E; 2'15 1}; WRITTEN EXAMINATION
0. A 65. D
D 66. D
2. A 67.D
3. C 68. D
C 69. B
5 B 70. B
5.B 71. B
"A 72. B
B 73. D
9. C 74. A
100.A
=]
=~

=
 —gnd
2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference
Page 148 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 Vol. 1.1 — 2™ gd Page 149
from the structure due to structural consideratio
CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS' ns, payment of the
concrete will be made at an adjusted price:
MATERIALS ENGINEER
WRITTEN EXAMINATION fi)eficiency in Strength of Percent of Contract l
SEPTEMBER 2016 Concrete Specimens,
% Price Allowed
explanations to the questions s fro _Less than 5
Note: Below is the answer and detailed
i 1 e from
100
the previous chapter. Enjoy learning! 5 to less than 10 80
10 to less than 15 70
15 to less than 20 60
C. Reinforcing Steel Bars (RSB). Tensile strength, yield strength, and 20 to less than 30
: Tty
=i ne quality of _ 50
elongation are the common require d tests to determi of i 25 or more | 0
reinforcing steel bars. Table under Subsection 311.3.2

i
C. 80. The bulk specific i i us mixix is is 2.342,
i of a bitumino
gravity 2 o4 and the; SOLUTION:
dry stability is 3,000 lbs., then, the Index of Retained Strength (IRS)
if the wet stability is 2,400 lbs.: 0.85fc = 0.85*3500 = 2975 psi.
Ave. compressive strength = (4000+3500+2600
)/3 = 3367 < 3500 psi
Index of Retained Strength (IRS) = Wet Stability x 100/ Dry Stability =96.2% of the Required > 0.85*fc (OKY)
IRS = 2400/3000 * 100 = 80% (Answer!) One of the Three is 85%, let’s see for the 2600 psi; 2600/
3500 * 100
=74.29% < 75% of fc (FAILED! No need to adjust
)
C. 90%. The laboratory density of a bituminous mix 2.233. T?; gigr]e;
of compaction of a 5 cm asphalt overlay for a field Density of 2. Therefore, as a Materials Engineer, based from Subsection 311.3.20
as stated above, the tests were not acceptable.
Percent (%) Compaction = Field Density/Laboratory I')ensity *100
% Compaction = 2.010/2.233 * 100 = 90.01% (Answer! A. Sampling comes with many forms, it could be
from a roadway,
flowing from aggregate stream, windrow, conveyor
belt, from truck,
B. Not Acceptable. A set of three (3) core sgmples has the lfoll]ofw‘igg and stockpile. AASHTO T 2 — Sampling of Aggregates
states that
;mpressive strengths: 4000 psi, 3500 psi, and lG()Obpsxt,he ohe Segregation often occurs when materials are stockpi
led. Thus, it is
required strength is 3500 psi, the area represented by difficult to ensure unbiased samples from stockpi
les. For coarse or
samples is: mixed coarse and fine aggregate, make every
effort to enlist the
services of power equipment to de velop a separate,
small sampling pile
It is noted that the samples are extracted from cores :n an ox;;z)r;gt composed of material from various levels and locatio
ns in the main
pavement. Subsection 311.3.2 says that the C‘DH&I'H('[{)I‘(,:in;‘i[{pf‘: /éqts pile. Combine several increments to compose
the sample. Where
the concrete strength may pass the required by means bu w“-nfi; e& power equipment is not available, combine material from
etcz]Jg;' o at least
The concrete in the area represented by the core w:111 three increments; the top third, middle third, and
bottom third of the
adequate if the average strength of the cor oqu{'} / t;) ‘.;1‘ { Lo }],’ i pile. Insert a board vertically into the pile just
. above the sampling
of and if no single core is less than 75% of, the specified s g1 point to aid in preventing further segregation. Remove
the outer layer,
which may be segregated, and sample the materia
l beneath.
ir
If the strength of control specimens does not meet the requll:teme:tosrgs f
the subsection, and it is not feasible or not advisable to obtain An alternate sampling method is to insert a
sampling tube into the
pile at a minimum of five random locations to extrac
t material to form
Page 150 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 151

a sample. Sampling tubes are approximately 1%" (minimum) in samples at approximately equal “size” is also not convincing since
diameter by 6 ft. (minimum) in length. sampling is really done at random and as much as possible unbiased.

Sampling of soil aggregates in a big stockpile shall be done by taking For this case, the answer is none of the above. FOR MORE
sample from the bottom, middle, and top of the stockpile. INFORMATION regarding Sampling, may we refer you to go back to
one Part of this book, “Method of Soil Sampling”.
There are many types of sampling procedures. It may be for the
purpose of taking samples for laboratory testing, job control, or for D. Reprocess the material by blending. Sample of aggregate base
acceptance. The samples may be from a flowing aggregate streams or course material when tested for quality passed the requirements
bins, conveyor belt, stockpile or transportation units, and from except grading. What will you recommend as a Materials Engineer?
roadway base courses.
When the base course material failed to meet the grading
Sampling is the process of selecting a part (sample), which will be requirement, the materials shall not be categorized as subbase or base
used to judge the whole lot. course unless grading is correct. We are in the process of correcting it.
We cannot reject the material immediately and replace it with the new
untested one. Thus, it is best to reprocess the grading by blending with
For this particular question, the purpose could be for l_abofatory
other sizes of aggregates and test it again for acceptance.
testing and job control since the question is about combxpa";xon of
materials. In sampling material from stockpiles, it is very difficult to
A. To determine the required pile length. Pile foundation is a
ensure unbiased samples, due to the segregation which often occurs
substructure working underneath the ground surface.
when material is stockpiled, with coarser particles rolling to the
Apile load testis a direct method of determining the ultimate
outside base of the pile.
geotechnical capacity of a pile. On the other hand, although we have
the data of the subsurface based from the soil exploration done prior
If sampling from roadway, we can take sample units selected by a
at least three to construction of the structure, we still have a limited source of
random method from the construction. Obtain
information since the soil beneath the surface is almost just
approximately equal increments, selected at random from the unit
predictable and almost accurate. In precision, test pile is a pile not
being sampled, and combine to form a field sample whose mass equals
Take all increments from the intended for the use of the structure but rather a verification pile.
or exceeds the minimum recommended.
Based from the given choices, one of them is one of the purpose of
roadway for the full depth of the material, taking care to exclpde any
driving test pile. By using elimination, we can already say that it is
underlying material. Clearly mark the specific areas from which e_ach
not used for the spacing, rather than the actual number of piles nor
increment to be removed: a metal template placed over the area is a
the cross-sectional area since the foundation is already computed by a
definite aid in securing approximately equal increment weights.
Geotechnical Engineer.
So, by analyzation, we can’t take samples and pack it in separate }Jags.
DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 400.1.1 Scope of
We can take samples from different lots. By the way, by definition of
Piling states that the Contractor shall furnish the piles in accordance
“LOT” - a sizable isolated quantity of bulk material from a single
with an itemized list, which will be provided by the Engineer, showing
source, assumed to have been produced by the same process (for
the number and lengths of all piles. When cast-in-place concrete piles
example, a day’s production or a specific mass or volume): hpwever,
are specified on the Plans, the Engineer will not furnish the
the standard sampling did not mention any method about this _asxde
Contractor an itemized list showing the number and length of piles.
from taking samples from top, middle, and bottom of a stockplle‘or
When test piles and load tests are required in conformance with Sub-
taking it at a uniform increment if conducted from a conveyor r:r bvms
of a whole lot. Taking section 400.1.2 and 400.1.3, respectively, the data obtained from
because we are sampling in representation
driving test piles and making test loads will be used in conjunction
with other available sub-soil information to determine the number
Page 152 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 153

and lengths of piles to be furnished. The Engineer will not prepare the compliance. As a materials engineer, it is our responsibility that we
itemized list of piles for any portion of the foundation area until all know the range, capacity and quality of the concrete we are
specified loading tests in the Contract representative of the portion constructing.
have been completed.
Considering the given choices, option “B” is also an answer but it is
D. None of the above. All the mentioned factors in the choices affect | lacking the benefit of the doubt on what is specifically the basis. We
the concrete strength except thickness of the core. A study conducted can also take into account the serviceability of the machine of option
by Indian Institute of Technology stated that the influence of core “D”, however, the machine has its manufactured capacity considering
drilling, area, and aspect ratio (for L/D) affects the strength of core. the type of test is being served.
Whenever we extract core from a completed concrete, we don’t mind
the thickness because it is very dependent to the capacity of the core B. The rebound hammer (Schmidt) test for concrete:
bit. For example, if we use micro-coring (1" Diameter) on a column, we
The rebound (Schmidt) hammer is
could not determine the exact depth of coring, though, we can cut the
one of the oldest and best-known
core sample depending on the Length to Diameter ratio we need. So,
methods of comparing the concrete
all those first three (3) choices affect the cores. in various parts of a structure and
indirectly — assessing concrete
C. Reject the delivered materials. Job mix design must be followed. strength. It is actually a measure
The mixture shall be placed at a temperature not less than 107
of surface hardness. The rebound
Degrees Celsius. Below that given temperature will affect the
hammer should be considered as a
workability of the asphalt mix. Therefore, the materials engineer will
means of determining variations of
sacrifice the homogeneity as well as the overall performance of the
strength within a structure rather
pavement once he allows to spread the delivered bituminous mix. It
than an accurate means of
shall be rejected. Please see DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2,
assessing strength. 7he surface
Subsection 307.5.7. under test should be clean and
smooth. Dirt or other loose
11. C. Improper because test procedure provides that the test should be
material on the surface can be
carried out to failure. Flexural strength is one measure of the tensile
removed using a grinding stone
strength of concrete. It is a measure of an un-reinforced concrete beam
L J 40k “ prior to the test. Rough surfaces
or slab to resist failure in bending. It is measured by loading 6 x 6-
cannot be tested as they do not give reliable results.
inch (150 x 150 mm) concrete beams with a span length of at least
three times the depth. The flexural strength is expressed as Modulus If it is to be used as a means of assessing strength the correlation
of Rupture (MR) in psi (MPa) and is determined by standard test between rebound hammer reading and strength needs to be
methods ASTM C 78 (third-point loading) or ASTM C 293 (center- determined for the actual concrete under investigation. A procedure
point-loading). for doing this is given in BS EN 12504-2. The values obtained by using
the hammer may be influenced by the particular operator, so care
The reason behind why we subject the beam sample to loading at its must be taken when considering results from different operators.
breaking point is that we simulate the scenario of what is going to
happen in the actual poured concrete that it represented. At the same Rebound hammer is a type of non-destructive tests to determine and
time, we can get to know the range of the loading it can withstand and correlate concrete strength into compressive strength of a cylinder or
compare it to what is designed in the mix design. The stopping of cube, Thus, the given choices are not true except it can be used as a
loading at 550 psi indicates that it has only reached the required substitute to direct methods of compressive strength determination
strength and not the real purpose why we subject it at breaking. The such as tests on cored samples.
scenario shows that the engineer-in-charge set the loading just for
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol, 1.1 — 2
Page 154 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Ed Pgn 155

13. C. Reject the concrete mixture. The slump does not determine the
| Another solution is to send the load back to the plant and add more
strength of concrete but is made by water-cement ratio. As a general
rule, every inch additional to slump decreases the strength. Additional Portland cement to “dry it up.” Sometimes more aggregate is added as
fine aggregates will also require additional amount of paste to cover woll.‘But there is unpredictable chemistry between concrete that is
the aggregates. Choice D states that diverting the delivered concrete starting to hydrate and newly added material. One outcome is that
to the prepared retaining wall forms. However, retaining walls shall the concrete passes through the initial set phase very quickly,
reducing the time you have to complete your work. If you are stamping
use Class A concrete with slump 2 to 4 inches. Thus, one of the best
choices is the addition of Portland Cement only however the strength patterns in concrete, you may not be able to finish your decorative
will not be controlled. applications.

If you reject a load, it will take some time before another one arrives If one load of concrete is too wet in a sequence of loads, you should
to your jobsite and in the meantime, you are paying for nonproductive reject that load because the results will be significantly different from
labor. If you are on a commercial or public project where samples are the others. If there is more than one load involved in a placement,
tested for strength and other characteristics by a testing centers, the another option is to spread the load low, placing concrete with the
choice might be very easy—others will reject the load. But if you are proper slump on top of it. This can work if the concrete still has
on a residential project where no one will know, what do you do? And structural integrity.
if you are a decorative concrete contractor, how will concrete with
excessive slump affect your work? Your decls‘ion about whether to accept or reject concrete also will
depend on just how wet the mix is. Many specifications permit slump
When there is too much water in the concrete, there is greater variances of 1 inch. If the slump exceeds 1% inches from what was
shrinkage with the possibility for more cracks and reduced ordered, reject it.
compressive strength. As a general rule, every additional inch of
slump decreases strength by approximately 500 psi. So, for example, C. The minimum compaction requirement for an embankment is 95%.
if you ordered 5-inch slump concrete and received 7% inches, a mix Py]ease see DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 104.3.3
designed to be 4000 psi would end up being 2500 psi. This represents Compaction (Embankment)
a serious loss in strength, especially if you were placing exterior
concrete in a freeze/thaw climate where the standard requirement is C. ng‘og aphic test. Petrographic Test is not a common test. It is the
4000 psi for proper durability. use of microscopes to examine samples of rock or concrete to determine
their mineralogical and chemical characteristics. Let us know these
Excessive slump also can result from accidentally adding too much other choices:
water-reducing admixtures or super-plasticizers to a mix. This can
result in aggregate segregation and a serious loss of strength. There Soundness test - Aggregates that are durable (resistant to weathering)
is no question about rejecting this concrete. But if the overdosed are less likely to degrade in the field and cause premature HMA
admixture isn't high enough to cause segregation, the concrete will pavement distress and potentially, failure. The soundness
eventually set and achieve a higher than expected compressive test repeatedly submerges an aggregate sample in a sodium sulfate or
strength. magnesium sulfate solution.

Your first impulse is probably to place the concrete anyway. This Abrasion Test - When friction is the predominant factor causing
deterioration of your materials, abrasion and wear testing will give
option gets the best productivity from labor and doesn't strain
relations with your ready-mix producer. The risk, however, is that you data to compare materials or coatings and can help you predict
work can both look and be compromised, and the resulting lower the lifetime of a material or coating. Abrasion testingis used to
durability might force you to remove and replace at some point in the test the abrasive resistance of solid materials. A fractured face is
future. defined as being caused either by mechanical means or by nature and
Page 156 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 157
should have sharp or slightly blunted edges. A gravel which was
previously fractured by hand or by machine and then weathered by 20. B. Class B. the class of concrete used for bedding and after each layer
water or time is not accepted as fractured. of stone in rubble concrete shall be class B. Please see DPWH
Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 507.3.3 Placing and 405.4.1
16. B. Air is forced out of the soil. Once the air voids are forced to get out Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete. Rubble concrete is
of the volume, the voids will be occupied by the water. Thus, aconcrete in which large stones are added to the freshly placed
increasing the soil dry density and lowering the air-void content, concrete while it is still soft and plastic. The chief use of this
however, dry density will decrease when the total volume of water is concrete is in constructing dams, lock walls, breakwaters, retaining
more than the total volume of voids (saturated). Volume of Soil solids walls, and bridge piers.
will not change except its arrangement so it is not choice C. The grains
will not become denser just because it is “lubricated”. This has B. The amount of materials passing the No. 50 and No. 100 sieves are
something to say about water and air voids content. important to concrete aggregates because the maximum amount of
these fine-sand sizes is required to ensure that the cement paste is
17. C. It resembled cement obtained by grinding natural rocks found o sufficient to cover each particle. The workability and amount of the
the Isle of Portland. In 1824, Joseph Aspdin, a British stone mason, cement are the assurance that pavement smoothness requirement is
obtained a patent for a cement he produced in his kitchen. The met. When fine aggregates contain minimum amount of these sieve
inventor heated a mixture of finely ground limestone and clay in his sizes, the likelihood of excessive bleeding is increased and limitations
kitchen and ground the mixture into a powder creating a hydraulic on water content of the mixture is increasingly important. On the
cement — one that hardens with the addition of water. Aspdin named other hand, choice C mentioned the economical mix, however, it must
the product Portland cement because it resembled a stone quarried on be noted that any excess or deficient of amount in each material to be
the Isle of Portland off the British Coast. With this invention, Aspdin incorporated in the design mix is considered uneconomical.
laid the foundation for today's Portland cement industry. The first
large use of this modern-day Portland cement, and its first D. Clayey Soil. The primary purpose of the Unconfined Compression
engineering use, was in a tunnel under the Thames River in 1828. The Testis to quickly determine a measure of the unconfined
first recorded shipmentof Portland cement to the US was in 1868. The compressive strength of rocks or fine-grained soils (Silts and clays)
first Portland cement manufactured in the US was produced at a plant that possess sufficient cohesion to permit testing in
in Coplay, Pennsylvania in 1871. the unconfined state. ASTM D2166 — Standard Test Method for
(http//www.concretethinker.com) Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil is the standard
reference of this test. We will measure this with the unconfined
B. The purpose of capping concrete cylinders prior to testing for compression test, which is an unconsolidated undrained (UU or Q-
compression is to provide smooth, flat ends that are perpendicular to type) test where the lateral confining pressure is equal to zero
axis of the sample. Proper end preparation ensures that the ends of (atmospheric pressure). The unconfined compression test is
concrete test cylinders or cores have smooth, parallel bearing surfaces inappropriate for dry sands or crumbly clays because the materials
perpendicular to the applied axial load to assure uniform distribution would fall apart without some land of lateral confinement. So, the
of forces during testing. sample has to be clay.

19. C. The laboratory density of a bituminous mix is 97%. If the density of C. Accept the section at an adjusted price due to strength deficiency.
the newly completed asphalt pavement is 95%, what is the degree of Subsection 311.3.20 Acceptance of concrete states that no individual
compaction? strength test result is deficient by more than 15% of the specified
strength, .. If beam samples taken from a newly paved section failed
Solution: to meet the strength requirement and it is not advisable to obtain
% Compaction = 95/97 * 100 = 97.94% =~ 98% Answer. cores from the structure due to structural considerations, as a
Materials Engineer, deficiency in strength of the concrete specimens
Page 158 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
Page 159
shall be accepted the section at an adjusted price due to strength improper and prolonged storage or adulteration during transpor
t or
deficiency hereunder: transfer. For further research, please see AASHTO T 105 and ASTM
C 114: Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement.
Deficiency in Strength of Percent of Contract
Concrete Specimens, % Price Allowed B. Marshal Stability Test determines the resistance to deformation of
| Less than 5 100 a compacted asphalt concrete mix. Marshall stability and flow
are
5 to less than 10 80 asphalt mixture characteristics determined from tests of compacte
d
10 to less than 15 70 specimens of a specified geometry.
15 to less than 20 B 60
Marshal test is extensively used in routine test programs for
20 to less than 30 50 the
paving jobs. The stability of the mix is defined as a maximum load
25 or more 0
carried by a compacted specimen at a standard test temperature
(This table is under Subsection 311.3.20) of
600 °C. The flow is measured as the deformation in units of 0.25 mm
between no load and maximum load carried by the specimen during
24, D. None of the above. Important properties of soil as foundation is that
stability test (flow value may also be measured by deformation units
the strength must be increased, compressibility is reduced and
of 0.1 mm). This test attempts to get the optimum binder content for
permeability must also be reduced. This can be done by compacuoln.
the aggregate mix type and traffic intensity. This is the test which
That is why proper compaction of an embankment material will
helps us to draw Marshall Stability vs. % bitumen.
minimize future settlement (compressibility, improper or not), |
decrease soil permeability (improper or not), increase shear strength
B. The minimum test requirement for riprap boulders are stone
and soil stability (improper or not), and increase voids spaces. Th_us, size
or weight test and inspection report on assessment of stone soundnes
improper compaction will result to none of the mentnoned-c]—_nolce‘s s.
Please see Chapter I'V - Minimum Testing Requirements.
(because voids can only be decreased when proper compaction is
conducted).
B. Undisturbed. Consolidation test is usually performed on
Undisturbed samples. This is to determine the settlements due to
D. All of the above. In concrete pouring, large variations in the |
primary consolidation of soil by conducting one dimensional test. This
concrete cylinder test results were observed. This shall be remedied
has to be undisturbed sample so that we will be able to know and have
by: Taking the average test result to ensure it is abuye the
the idea about the actual simulation that happens beneath the soil by
specifications requirement (Average of >85% fc, or no ind1v1dl_xal
result is 75% of fc); Checking the calibration of the compression controlling the stress.
machine can also be checked: Reviewing the mix design, matenfils
D. 28 MPa, Post-tensioning of the pre-stressing reinforcement shall
quality and aggregate condition in the batching process (the location be
not commenced until test on concrete cylinder indicate that the
and the batching must be checked); Thus, All of the above.
concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 28 MPa:
Please see DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 406.3.
26. B. Loss of ignition is not measured by heat generated when mixed with 10
Post-tensioning.
water because in the first place this test does not include water. The
cement is exposed to fire but its resistance cannot be measured. That
A. Air Content. It must be noted that the question is about types of
is because Loss of Ignition signifies pre-hydration or moisture uptakg
volume change. Temperature, shrinkage and creep are all
of cement while it is shelved. Portland Cement Loss on ignition is types of
volume change of concrete after it is hardened; except air
calculated by heating up a cement sample to 900 — 1000°C (1650 — content.
Temperature affects the volume of every construction material,
1830°F) until a constant weight is obtained. The weight loss of the for
example, water expands when hardened due to temperature.
sample due to heating is then determined. A high loss on ignition can
Shrinkage and Creep are the slow movements of materials,
indicate pre-hydration and carbonation, which may be caused by for
example, in soil.
Page 160 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed

35. C. 38264 psi. F = 92,000 Ib. So, taking the formula:

32. D. As the target strength increases, the properties of aggregates as
they relate to water-demand becomes less relevant and the properties Pressure = Force/Area; A = (nD?)/4
that relate to interfacial bond become more important. Thus, coarse P =92,0001b. / (m x 62/4)
aggregates must be angular as produced by crushed rocks; even P = 3,254 psi, (Answer).
though the water demand of smaller size coarse aggregates is higher,
having greater surface area (and correspondingly greater interfacial D. Use roller with greater compactive effort. Factors that affect
bonding potential), smaller aggregates become more desirable as the compaction are water content, type of soil being compacted, and
target strength increases; admixtures are needed depending on the amount of compacted energy. In the process of compaction of Item 200
time required of pouring such as acceleration of rate of hydration and (Aggregate Subbase Course) which contains sandy material, only 80%
retarder or delaying of the time of hydration; density was attained. Assuming the soil is really for subbase materials
and that water content is controlled, in order to comply with the 100%
On the choices’ perspective, this question has been around for a long minimum degree of the compaction, application of greater mechanical
time in M.E examinations. As previously experienced, the choice “D” energy to a soil to rearrange the particles and reduce the void ratio is
is “Bigger size Aggregates”, and the examiners decided to change it to the best front solution.
“All of the above”. This might tell us that questions and their answers
are just being rambled to include confusion on the examinees’ side. B. 0.2 t0 0.7 liters/sq.meter. The tack coat shall be sprayed only so far
Thus, it highly suggested that the answer for this item is option “D”. in advance on the surface course as will permit it to dry to a “tacky”
On the correct approach side, confusion is experienced. condition. The rate of application of either the Rapid Curing Cut-back
or the Emulsified Asphalt shall be within the range of 0.2 to 0.7
A. Index of Retained Strength. Asphalt core sample means that it has liter/m?2. Please see DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection
been extracted from an already-placed pavement. Asphalt content and 302.3.3 Application of Bituminous Material
grading can be measured by the use of extraction; specific gravity can
be measured from the core itself. Index of retained strength is done B. Materials of first class quality are to be used. The apparent
during the preconstruction phase where the aggregates and asphalt omission of a detailed description or definition concerning the quality
cement are mixed using job-mix design, and IRS is the resistance of of mater materials in the plan and specification shall be regarded to
the mix to simulation of dry and wet stability. mean that of first class quality are to be used. Contractors are profit
oriented, meaning, they will find any way to benefit them by
The index of percent retained tensile strengthis obtained by delivering the cheaper materials. However, for the interest of the
determining the tensile strength values of a set of three specimens materials quality, first class quality must be used first. And that is
that have been immersed in water and expressing it as a percentage what the public interest is deserved.
of the tensile strength values of a duplicate set of air cured samples.
Meaning, this is being done in the laboratory to simulate the B. Angular and rough aggregates. Stability of an asphalt pavement is
occurrence of traffic density before placing. its ability to resist shoving and rutting under loads (traffic). The
stability of a mixture depends on internal friction and cohesion.
C. At least 40. ASTM C42 states that “Submerge the test specimens Internal friction among the aggregate particles (interparticle friction)
in lime-saturated water at 23.0 +/- 1.7 °C for at least 40 hours is related to aggregate characteristics such as shape and surface
immediately prior to making the compression test. Test the specimens texture. Cohesion results from the bonding ability of the binder. A
promptly after removal from water storage. During the period proper degree of both internal friction and cohesion in a mix prevents
between removal from water storage and testing, keep the specimens the aggregate particles from being moved past each other by the forces
moist by covering with a wet blanket of burlap or other suitable exerted by traffic. In general, the more angular the shape of the
absorbent fabric.” aggregate particles and the rougher their surface texture, the higher
Page 162 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
Page 163

the stability of the mix will be. Where aggregates with high internal weight and quantityof organic matter, and liquid and plastic limit
friction characteristics are not available, more economical mixtures (Because these tests require more movements of the sample. While,
using aggregate with lower friction values can be used where light consolidation test requires undisturbed sample that will be subjected
traffic is expected. to Oedometer testto determine their compression index. There are
many type of tests in consolidation testing. One popular of those is the
40. A. Overheating during manufacture. The spot testis used to consolidated undrained loading.
determine whether or not an asphaltcement has been damaged
during processing due to overheating. Basically, the spot test is a form B. Temperature of mix. The workability of a bituminous mix is
of paper chromatography (a method for analyzing complex mixtures dependent on the temperature of the mix. The hotter the mix, the
by separating them into the chemicals from which they are made). A more workable it is the mold/lay with its maximum laying
small drop of prepared asphalt cement is dropped onto a filter temperature.
paper. If the spot formed is uniformly brown, then the test is
negative. If the spot formed is brown with a black center, then the B.
Degrees
£10 Celsius. In bituminous plant-mix surface course, the
test is positive. Today, the spot test is rarely used. temperature of the mix shall have an allowable +10 Degrees Celsius.
Please see DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 307.2.1.
41. D. 3-meter straight edge. The equipment to measure pavement
surface irregularity is 3-meter straight edge or nowadays called the A. 20-50 psi/sec. The rate of loading of the machine will somehow
International Roughness Index (IRI) Machine. This problem can be affect the strength of the materials being test. The rate of loading that
solved using elimination of other choices. But first, be sure to must k?e observed when testing the concrete cylinder specimen is 20-
eliminate those that are considered least probable answers. Choice A, ’)f) psilsec. ASTM (39, Standard Test Method for Compressive
Falling Weight Deflectometer is the measurement of deflection or Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens, specifies that the loading
flexibility of the pavement (PCC or AC). Choice B, Pendulum rate fall within 0.14 to 0.34 MPa/sec (20 to 50 psi/sec).
Apparatus is used for skid resistance of a certain pavement location.
Lastly, choice C, Dynamic Cone Penetrometer (DCP) measures B', 1/_3. The top surface of specimen cylinder should have planeness of
correlated CBR of the underlaying structures of the pavement. within 0.002 in which should be checked by Feeler gauge and straight
edge. The axis of specimen cylinder with perpendicular to top surface
42, A. 2 Hours. Before concrete paving, the base of a roadway should be should have angular difference within 0.59. The reduction of 33% is
kept in moist condition and saturated with water for at least: 2 Hours. (fxpected when the surface is not properly finished, and that the load
Subsection 207.3.4 states that the compaction and finishing shall be 18 not uniform.
completed within 2 hours of the time water is added to the mixture.
C. The computed compressive strength will be higher. ASTM (39,
43. C. Grass cover. The following can be used to help stabilize slope such Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
as the loss rate of the solid and liquid nutrients were also much lower Concrete Specimens, specifies that the loading rate fall within 0.14 to
than that of the style-grass and control plot. The vetiver grass 0.34 MPa/sec (20 to 50 psi/sec). On average, the compressive strength
hedge can not only resist erosion but promotes tree growth as well. of gylmders tested at the high load rate limit will be 3% greater than
Legumes can be used as benching for slope together with nitrogen cylmde_rs tested at the low load rate limit. Many testing laboratories
fixing cover crop. Coconut tree can also be used in slope protection are paid by the number of cylinders tested, creating an incentive to
such as coco logs. Thus, grass cover is the only choice we cannot use test as fast as possible.
as slope protection because it doesn’t penetrate well to deeper soil nor
protect the slope it stands/leans. A 20% increase in compressive strength of high-strength concrete is
possible when loading rates exceed ASTM (€39 limits. About half of
44. C. Consolidation test. The following test can be performed on concrete testing machines are equipped with an analog dial gauge or
disturbed samples from soil exploration, such as Grading test, Unit
Page 164 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference
Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 165
a digital panel meter that has no provision to indicate load rate. An average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85%
of, and if no single
approximation of loading rate can be determmed. on these ma(f—hmes. core is less than 75% of, the specified strength
f'.
by using a stop watch and measuring the change in load over 15-, 30
. and 60-second periods. This method of measuring load rate often If the strength of control specimens does not meet
the requirements of
requiring two people is archaic and is not verifiable. the subsection, and it is not feasible or not advisable to
obtain cores
from the structure due to structural considerations, payment of the
Thus, during the testing of concrete cylinders in uniaxial compressm}:\, concrete will be made at an adjusted price:
the result of the test if the rate of loading is rapid (i.e. way above the
prescribed rate of loading) will be higher than the its actual strength. Deficiency in Strength of | Percent of Contract |
Concrete Specimens, % Price Allowed
B. Any testing laboratory of a local government unit. Choices A, C, Less than 5 100
and D are the only authorized to test the materials. LGU n.» not 5 to less than 10 80
authorized to test the materials to be incorporated in DPWH projczfts. 10 to less than 15 70
One of the main reasons is that LGU lacks materials testing 15 to less than 20 60
laboratory that a project needs especially since LGU projects are 20 to less than 30 50
concentrated mainly for the local projects only. 25 or more 0
(This table is under Subsection 311.3.20)
A. %Compaction = Dry Density in the filed / Max Dry Density
=1663 / 2250 * 100 = 74% (Answer) A. Cold asphalt mixture. Slurry system for road surface treatme
nt of
Item 304A is a type of Cold asphalt mixture as per Please
D. ASTM C150 requires that the 28-day strength ofmortar‘ made from see DPWH
Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 304A.1 Descrip
Type I Portland cement be at least 27.6 MPa. Three speclm?ns were tion.
tested: two passed but one failed by more than 20%. What will be the
C. Water Mobility. Based from the given choices: Dry Strength,
conclusion?
Plasticity, and Dry Weight can be tested in fine-grained
soil in the field
through the use of manual tests. However, the
DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 31 ]..‘i.Z[)Auch.t.qnce word mobility is not
common in materials testing. It probably the excepti
of Concrete states that the strength level will be‘ considered on on the given
choices. Though, Water mobilityis defined as the ability of water
satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three caus@uunve. st{‘efzgtb
molecules to move spatially. The mobility of water,
test results equal or exceed the specified strength £ and no ll)leldlfB] or any fluid for that
matter, is dependent upon viscosity.
strength test result is deficient by more than 15% of the specified
strength f.. Thus, the Materials Engineer shall conclude that the
cement does not pass the specifications since it failed to give the D. None of the above. The Atterberg limits are a basic measur
e of the
consistent results. critical — water contents of a fine-grained soil: its
shrinkage limit, plastic limit, and liquid limit.
Thus, the boundary
On the other hand, contractor can appeal that the concrete
the between each state can be defined based
on a change in the soil's
strength may pass the required by means of core tests. The con.cret,e behavior. A liquid limit is the moisture conten
t expressed as a
in the area represented by the core will be considered adequate if the percentage of the weight of over-dried soil, at which
soil changes from
Page 166 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 167

a plastic to a liquid state. It is the moisture content of a soil fi'. wh?ch II1 Silty Clay 20-35 Highly plastic
two halves of a soil part, separated by a grove of standard dimension Very high plastic
Clay =85
(1 cm deep) will join at the length of 1/2 inch under impact of 25 blows
a
using the Mechanical Liquid Limit Device. The percent of moisture
soil sample where a decrease in moisture changes from a viscous or
From the question, the answer is that Liquid Limit is none of those
liquid state to a plastic one. nflevtioned options. Usually, liquid limit is greater than the plastic
limit which suggests the degree of plasticity from the above-mentione
d
By definition, the plastic limitof asoilis the moisture content, '-f*bl& or else, the PI will be negative as mentioned by option C. If the
expressed as a percentage of the weight of the oven-dry soil, at the liquid limit is equal to plastic limit, the PI will be zero which is non-
boundary between the plastic and semisolid states of consistency. Itis plastic already. Now, option C suggests a negative number but will be
the moisture content at which a soil will just begin to crumble when considered non-plastic also. Non-plastic means that coarse-grained
collei intaa thread Wi, soil (sand) has over-powered the fine-grained soil (clay).

Parcent We are reminded that Plasticity 5. D. 50% No. The result of Immersion/Compression test conducted on
H ° Solid Index (P is just the difference of an asphalt mix sample:
liquid Limit and the plastic limit (LL- Dry Stabl‘li.ty = 2000 KPa
g T aemeold
£ - PL PL). Now, the plasticity index is Wet Stability = 1000 KPa
H a0 w expressed in percent of the dry
§ iquid weight of the soil sample. It shows Index of Retained Strength or IRS = Wet Stability/Dry Stability x 100
100 the size of the range of the moisture = (1000 KPa/2000KPa) x 100 = 50%.
contents at which the soil remains plastic. In general, the plasticity
index depends only on the amount of clay present. It indicates the l)}"Wl{ Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 307.2.1 states the
fineness of the soil and its capacity to change shape without altering mixture shall also have an index of retained strength of not less than
its volume. A high PI indicates an excess of clay or colloids in the soil. 70 when tested by AASHTO T 165. Therefore, it does not meet the
specification.
Its value is zero whenever the PL is greater or equal to the LL.

Table for Plasticity of various silt/clay soils 3 . D}{CBM Soil sample was subjected to the following procedures at
pa— ol PLOR it
Degree of Plasticity the laboratory f}" a.) ) co mpaction
ti ite optimum
e at its i stur content: : b.)
moisture
B - v o pplication of surcharge (to the sample) to represent the estimated
Ton-Plastic g
I Sand or Silt 0-1 Non-Plastic thickness of pavement over the subgrade c.) soaking the sample for
T e four days; and then d.) forcing a plunger into the sample to a depth of
Traces of Clay 15 Shghtly 2 z.fimm. This test is called California Bearing Ratio (CBR) Test. This
= Tow Plagtc = test is penetration test meant for the evaluation of subgrade strength
Little Clay 5-10 of. roads and pavements. The results obtained by these tests are used
— — - Medium Plastic with the empirical curves to determine the thickness of pavement and
I | Clay Loam 10-20 its component layers.
Page 168 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
Page 169

Abrasion test is a common test method used to indicate aggregate Based from the given options, it is clear that there is a DPWH M.E in
toughness and abrasion characteristics. Conventional triaxial test is a the scenario when sampling is done. However, it doesn’t mean that
common laboratory testing method widely used for obtaining shear the Contractor's ME is not part of sampling procedures. On the other
strength parameters for a variety of soil types under drained or hand, the DPWH Project Engineer is the over-all in-charge of the
undrained condition. Consolidation test, Consolidation of a saturated project, and it is not his primary duty to conduct sampling, though he
soil occurs due to expulsion of water under static, sustained load. The may be the DPWH representative during sampling in case DPWH ME
consolidation characteristics of soils are required to predict the is not around. The answer here is option C.
magnitude and the rate of settlement.
A. 105 to 110 Degree Celsius. It is essential to soil mechanics work
One way to easily identify the CBR test is the 4-day soaking of the that drying ovens are preset to a temperature of 105 to 110 Degree
sample. This is being conducted to know the swell potential of the Celsius, and it is a common knowledge.
sample.6
D. (A and B) Atterberg’s and Sieve Analysis. Soil classification deals
A. How do you obtain the density of soil in the field? In solving this with the systematic categorization of soils based on distinguishing
question, the engineer is expected to know that the density formula is characteristics as well as criteria that dictate choices in use. Soil
Weight over its volume. Based from the choices, the density can be classification is a dynamic subject, from the structure of the system
identified by weighing the disturbed soil removed and obtaining the itself, to the definitions of classes, and finally in the application in the
volume of hole with sand or with other means. All other choices speak field. Soil classification can be approached from the perspective of soil
different tests. as a material and soil as a resource.

59. C. Taking samples of materials and bring them to the laboratory for The most common engineering classification system for soils in North
testing a little bit confusing, however, DPWH Department Order No. America is the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). The USCS
13, Series of 1987, as amended by DO 213, S 2004 has already made has three major classification groups: (1) coarse-grained soils (e.g.
it clear that: sands and gravels); (2) fine-grained soils (e.g. silts and clays); and (3)
a. The sampling and testing of all construction materials for highly organic soils (referred to as "peat”). The USCS further
government infrastructure projects should be stocked at the subdivides the three major soil classes for clarification. It
plant/project sites. distinguishes sands from gravels by grain size, and further classifying
b. For samples to be tested at the DPWH Laboratory, sampling some as "well-graded" and the rest as "poorly-graded". Silts and clays
and testing should be fully supervised by the DPWH Materials are distinguished by the soils' Atterberg limits, and separates "high-
Engineer. plasticity" from "low-pl: " soils as well. Moderately organic soils
a. Where the DPWH Regional and District Laboratories do not are considered subdivisions of silts and clays and are distinguished
have the facilities to perform test on samples of construction from inorganic soils by changes in their plasticity properties (and
materials, testing shall be allowed in testing laboratories/private Atterberg limits) on drying.
institutions accredited by the DPWH which have such testing
capabilities, provided that the testing.
Page 170 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 171
Bitumen emulsion is a mixture of water & bitumen. Hey wait, we
know that bitumen is an oil product and it cannot be mixed with
water. That is why we add an emulsifier (a surface-active agent) with
water before adding bitumen. Addition of emulsifier with water
facilitates breaking of bitumen into minute particles and keeps it
dispersed in suspension.

Thus, we can say that a bitumen emulsion is a liquid product

consisting of three things, (i.e. water + Emulsion + Bitumen) where
droplets of bitumen are suspended in water.

In case of an anionic bitumen emulsion, bitumen particles are electro-

negatively charged which adhere better to aggregates which have
positive charges, whereas for cat-ionic emulsions, bitumen particles
are electro-positively charged. Now days cationic bitumen emulsion is
most commonly used. Cationic emulsions can withstand rain sooner
than anionic ones.

D. All of the above. Important properties of soil as foundation is that

the strength must be increased, compressibility is reduced and
permeability must also be reduced. This can be done by compaction.
% ¢ % > % B B B B D That is why compaction of an embankment material will minimize
——— Sand Separate,% —— future settlement (compressibility), decrease soil permeability,
COMPARISON OF PARTICLE SIZE SCALES increase shear strength and soil stability and increase voids spaces.
Sicve Opening (n Inches U5, Standard Nieve Numbers
PSR b oo
AT LI B 1 | Among the choices, option D suggests all that we have mentioned
e

wson. anavee 0 s o /
above. Thus, the answer is all of the above-mentioned choices.
e = [t e | Vo¥
B. 200 psi. Subsection 307.2.1 Composition and Quality of
Bituminous Mixture states that Bituminous mixture shall have a
(UNIFIED| R
T i SILT OR CLAY.

minimum dry compressive strength of 1.4 MPa (200 psi). The

st R on T e : standard test method for compressive strength of bituminous mix
shall be based on ASTM D1074-02.
[ )
Gratn Nlze I Millileers
By analysis, soil classification using USCS requires sieve analysis and D. 23.22 cm. Average concrete core thickness is just the average of the
measured thickness of eight (8) sides of the core, however, the spec’s
Atterberg’s Limit (LL, PL).
do not allow a variance of 5 mm more than the design thickness. That
is why for this case, the 24 cm shall be treated in the average as 23.5
62. B. Cationic Emulsion. It is a type of emulsified asphalt that works cm.
better with wet aggregates and in cold weather. - Ave. core thickness = 23 (5) + 23.5 (4) 2 cm; Answer.
Page 172 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 173

66. D. Equal or greater than 95%. In pavement construction and based changes in temperature and humidity, you must recalibrate the sand
from DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 307.8.3 before each test.
Compaction, the required density of bituminous mixture based on|
laboratory density of the compacted specimens and rolling shall be 39. B. Hot climate. We use the lower penetration grade or hard asphalts
continued until roller marks are eliminated and a minimum of 97 | duringa climatic condition of hot.
mass percent of the density of the laboratory compacted specimens
prepared in accordance with AASHTO T 166 has been obtained and Penetration value is the vertical distance traversed or penetrated by
that no individual determination be lower than 95 percent when core the point of a standard needle into the bituminous material under
is extracted for acceptance. specific conditions of load, time and temperature. This distance is
measured in one tenths of a millimeter. Penetration test is used for
67. D. Crushed Aggregates Base Course. In the 2013 Edition of DPWH evaluating consistency of bitumen.
Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Item 202
is about Crushed Aggregates Base Course. The Engineer shall be able Penetration grading’s basic assumption is that the less viscous the
to identify that the Blue Book is divided into different parts. Part 1 asphalt, the deeper the needle will penetrate. This penetration depth
starts with “100” Series. These are about embankment. Items 200 is empirically correlated with asphalt binder performance. Therefore,
series tackles about underlying base courses while Item 300 series and asphalt binders with high penetration numbers (called “soft”) are used
above is about surface courses. It must be noted that starting from for cold climates while asphalt binders with low penetration numbers
Item 203, the base course is mixed with additives to be stabilized. So, (called “hard”) are used for warm climates. When the asphalt is hard,
based on the items, all are under Item 200 series though it can be it may take a while to melt it that's why it is very effective in high
concluded that these are all added with additives. temperature area.

68. D. The dry density of the compacted soil or pavement material is a . B. The approval of preliminary samples from the same source or
common measure of the amount of the compaction achieved during th commonly called as approved materials sources shall not be the reason
construction. Knowing the field density and field moisture content, thef not to test the materials from the same location again. Materials from
dry density is calculated. Therefore, FDT is important as a field control the same source does not mean that they have all the same
test for the compaction of soil or any other pavement layer. characteristics. As a materials engineer, it is your job to ensure that
the materials to be incorporated is of high quality. So, approval of
The sand that you use in the sand-cone test must be: preliminary samples from the same source shall not be considered a
a. Any ordinary sand guarantee of acceptance of all materials from the source. Testing of
b. Washed/clean every quantity as stated from Minimum Testing Requirements shall
c. Free Flowing ] be planned and executed properly.
d. Uncemented
e. Passing Sieve No. 10 and Retained Sieve No. 200 . B.6. The minimum testing requirement of concrete hollow block is one
i quality test for every 10,000 units. Specimens: for each test, three
with a constant moisture content while the test is performed. representative units shall be submitted (6 specimens for Q.T. of CHB).
Uniformly graded and well-rounded sand and almost no material finer All units shall be sound and free from surface cracks or others defects
than the No. 200 sieve should be in the sand. that would interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the
strength of the construction. Concrete hollow blocks shall be tested for
This sand is usually purchased in bulk quantities that canbe its Compressive Strength, Absorption and Moisture Content as well as
used for many sand-cone tests performed over extended lengths of| Measurement of Dimensions.
time. The density of the sand may be determined soon after the san
is received; however, since the bulk density of the sand is affected b;
Page 174 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 175
72. C. What should be done on the subbase course with existing moisture approved sprinklers mounted on trucks or by drying out, as required
content of 10% higher than the optimum moisture of the AASHTO in order to obtain the required compaction.
T180 Method D?
As a materials engineer, the best possible solution is to dry out to
Compaction is a process that brings about an increase in soil density reduce moisture, spread to the required loose thickness and compact.
or unit weight, accompanied by a decrease in air volume. There is The working compaction shall have a range of + 2% in moisture
usually no change in water content. The degree of compaction is content or 5% for important work.
measured by dry unit weight and depends on the water content and
compactive effort (weight of hammer, number of impacts, weight of *Optimum water content working range, i.e. + 2%
roller, number of passes). For a given compactive effort, the maximum *Optimum air-voids content tolerance, i.e. + 1.5%
dry unit weight occurs at an optimum water content. *For soils wetter than Woptimum, the target Ay can be used, e.g. 10% for
bulk earthworks, and/or 5% for important work.
As a materials engineer, it's difficult to decide since moisture content §
is a very independent result compare to other materials but taking | D. PI = 6. There are two (2) types of embankment stated in DPWH
into account that 10% more than the optimum MC means the subbase Standard Specifications Volume 2, Subsection 104.2-Materials
course is wet. However, based from the density curve, it tells us that ] Requirement: Suitable and Unsuitable Materials. It states that
before and beyond the Optimum Moisture Content, the dry density is Suitable Material — Material which is acceptable in accordance with
not at maximum. Based from the given choices, the best possible the Contract and which can be compacted in the manner specified in
solution is its practicality. When the base is wet, it is impractical to this Item. It can be common material or rock.
add more water.
Selected Borrow, for topping — soil of such gradation that all particles
Maximum drv density will pass a sieve with 75 mm square openings and not more than 15
100% compaction mass percent will pass the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, as determined
by AASHTO T 11. The material shall have a plasticity index of not
more than 6 as determined by AASHTO T 90 and a liquid Iimit of not
more than 30 as determined by AASHTO T 89.
"E
2< Unsuitable Material - Material other than suitable materials such as:
2 (a) Materials containing detrimental quantities of organic
‘@
c materials, such as grass, roots and sewerage.
3 (b) Organic soils such as peat and muck.
e (c) Soils with liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index
o Optimum moisture content
exceeding 55.
. - o (d) Soils with a natural water content exceeding 100%.
(e) Soils with very low natural density, 800 kg/m3 or lower.
|#——— Dry side Pl Wet side ~ () Soils that cannot be properly compacted as determined by the
Moisture content % FEngineer.
Moisture Content-Dry Density Curve (Example)
A. 0.45, The water—cement ratio is the ratio of the weight of water to
Item 200.3.3 states that the moisture content of subbase material | the weight of cement used in a concrete mix. Abrams'law (also called
shall, if necessary, be adjusted prior to compaction by watering with Abrams' water-cement ratio law) states the strength of a concrete mix
is inversely proportional to the mass ratio of water to cement. As
the water content increases, the strength of concrete decreases.
Page 176 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 177

A lower ratio leads to higher strength and durability but may make| The shape of a compaction curve in a laboratory compaction test of soil.
the mix difficult to work with and form. However, workability can bej Compaction curve generally features an inverted parabolic shape and
resolved with the use of plasticizers or super-plasticizers available a: is used to find the optimum water content that maximizes dry density.
new technologies in the market right now such as Three (3)-day curin
period or the most recent now, the One (1) — day concrete as approved A.
856:100. DPWH
by DPWH BRS. Standard
Specifications Vol
Joinl Sealer
—{wl-
|

So, to make it simple the strength of the concrete can be controlled by 2, Subsection
WC ratio by having more weight of cement than the weight of water. 303.2.2 specifies
Since workability is being taking into account, adding more cement or that penetration -
increasing the cement factor and adding admixtures can be considered grade of asphaltic
to address the to-be encountered problems. Thus, making the lesser material
ratio than the other choices is the answer. appropriate for
sealing of PCCP
B. Parabolic. Compaction of the soil generally increases its shear joints is 85-100. —— Exsting Jont Filler
-
o

strength, decreases its compressibility, and decreases its permeability.

B. trial Mix, It may be confusing that mix design will be proven correct
if we perform strength test, core test and other form of testing,
however, it must be noted that the correctness/effectiveness of all
concrete mix design can be checked by conducting trial mix first.
Max.dry Before a design mix be used in the actual project, trial mix shall be
density conducted. On the other hand, Core test is usually being done for
(ygmax) /~Compaction thickness determination and further investigation of strength of
curve
concrete. Please see Subsection 311.3.20 Acceptance of Concrete.
Zero air voids
(Saturation D. 135 Degrees Celsius. DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2,
= curve)
Subsection 734.1 — Description, states that The Stone Mastic Asphalt
z
2% (SMA) is a gap graded hot mix asphalt surface course laid on the
proposed base in accordance with this specification and in conformity
S5 with the line, grades and typical cross-section shown in the plan within
<] the tolerances specified or established by the Engineer. Subsection
o Optimum
734.2.7 Proportioning of Mixture explains that Cellulose fibers, in
moisture content
(OMC) pellets or loose fiber form, are usually added to the bituminous
mixtures in the amount of 0.3 to 0.4 percent by weight (3 to 4 kgs. per
<—Dryside —%.|<——— Wet side —> metric tonnes) if pure, while 0.33 to 0.45 percent by weight (3.3 to 4.5
(of optimum) kgs. per metric tonnes) is added if bitumen coated. Mineral filler shall
Moisture content (w) — be added to the mixture during the mixing operation in the amount of
one-half'to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass percent dry aggregate basis. The lower
In addition, compaction reduces the voids ratio making it more percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which are predominantly
difficult for water to flow through soil. Compaction curve is a series of calcareous.
samples of the soil are compacted at different water contents, and a
curve is drawn with axes of dry density and water content. The For information, Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA) is a dense wearing
resulting plot usually has a distinct peak. course material which was developed on the continent to overcome the
Page 178 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 179

issue of rutting due to the action of studded tires on road surfaces, the (a) Materials containing detrimental quantities of organic
mineral aggregate skeleton of SMA is gap-graded and the voids are materials, such as grass, roots and sewerage.
filled with a mastic of fine aggregate, filler and binder that complies (b) Organic soils such as peat and muck.
with EN 13108. Due to the high stone content and open nature of the (c) Soils with liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index
aggregate matrix, traffic loads are transmitted through the exceeding 55.
interlocking stone skeleton rather than through the mortar. (d) Soils with a natural water content exceeding 100%.
(e) Soils with very low natural density, 800 kg/m3 or lower.
79. D. Given: Weight in water asphalt specimen = 700 cc (®) Soils that cannot be properly compacted as determined by the
Weight of dry specimen in air = 1200 grams Engineer.
Mass of asphalt cement in SSD = 1203 grams
Calculate the bulk specific gravity of the asphalt specimen: Although we can argue that peat and muck are highly plastic and
We all know that Specific Gravity is Dry Specimen in air / (Mass of under the category of colloids but technically, it is considered
asphalt cement in SSD - Mass of Water). organic.
Density of Specimen = 1200g / (1203-700) g = 2.386
SG =2.386 82, B. The projection of concrete strength increases with age.

80. C. Operator must wear thick clothes. Radiation, in the broadest sense, AGE AGE AGE
simply means energy given off by any object, such as heat energy from 1 Day 7 Days 28 Days
a fire. What we are concerned with more specifically is ionizing 3 Days 14 Days
radiation. This describes particles or waves with enough energy to
ionize the material they pass through (by removing electrons from
atoms). The concept of radiation ‘dose’ is used to quantify the amount
of radiation to which a person is exposed. Doses are measured in
Sieverts. The Sievert (Sv) is the accepted international unit for
measuring the amount of radiation absorbed by the body, and is often
expressed in milliSieverts (mSv), or microSieverts (uSv) (1 mSv = 1000
nsv).

When using a nuclear density gauge, the Operator must be licensed,

meaning he has the training and the skill to use the nuclear
equipment; the Radiation exposure limits must be specified to avoid
overexposure; and most importantly the Unit must be transported in
approved cases to avoid exposure to other people.

81. B. Highly organic soil. Peat and muck is considered highly organic
soil. There are two (2) types of embankment stated in DPWH Standard 0 3 ) 3
Specifications, Vol. 2, Subsection 104.2 - Materials Requirement: Age (Days)
Suitable and Unsuitable Materials. It states that Suitable Material -
Material which is acceptable in accordance with the Contract and Example of Concrete Strength Gaining Curve
which can be compacted in the manner specified in this Item. It can be
common material or rock. Figure above shows the trend of the concrete strength based on a
study by Monjurul HASAN, Ahsanul KABIR, et.al. “Early Age Tests
Unsuitable Material — Material other than suitable materials such as’ to Predict 28 Days Compressive Strength of Concrete”. Thus, testing
Page 180 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 181

of concrete samples may be done at an earlier age for purposes o The total surface area of rough textured angular aggregate is more
determining the trend of its strength development. Using eliminatio: than smooth rounded aggregate for the given volume. By having
testing at an earlier age cannot be the basis of payment; the desig greater surface area, the angular aggregate may show higher bond
can be used depending on the additives added but if general strength than rounded aggregate. However, the higher surface area of
speaking, this cannot be used on all concrete mix unless designed angular aggregate with rough texture requires more water for a given
lastly, curing tank shall be available at all times, and it is tl workability than rounded aggregate. This means that for a given set
responsibility of the materials engineer to secure this. | of conditions from the point of view of water-cement ratio and
1 consequent strength, rounded aggregate gives higher strength.
83. A. 4 sides. The measurement of the thickness of an asphalt core usin,
a caliper is based on four (4) sides only. This is the difference betwee: In a study, for a water-cement ratio below 0.4, the use of crushed
the concrete and the asphalt cores. Thickness determination id aggregate has resulted in strength up to 38% higher than rounded
concrete is measured in nine (9) measurements. aggregate. With an increase in water-cement ratio the influence of
roughness of surface of the aggregate gets reduced, presumably
84, B. 40%. The maximum percentage abrasion loss allowed for paving] because the strength of the paste itself becomes paramount, and at a
concrete coarse aggregate is 40%. ltem 311.2.3 — Coarse Aggrega water-cement ratio of 0.65, no difference in strength of concrete made
states that It shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 whej with angular aggregate on rounded aggregate has been observed.
tested by AASHTO T 96.
We can conclude that the desirable shape and surface texture of
85. D. PDEA. Permit for the procurement of chemicals used for various aggregate particles, based from the choices are: angular and rough-
laboratory testing can be secured from PDEA. This is in accordance textured particles.
with the R.A. 9165 or commonly called COMPREHENSIVE,
DANGEROUS DRUGS ACT OF 2002. B. Viscous solids. In hot condition such as desert under sustained
loads, asphalt cement acts like viscous solids. Viscous liquids like hot
86. B. Marshall Stability Test determines the resistance to deformation of! asphalt are sometimes called plastic because they start flowing, and
a compacted asphalt concrete mix. Marshall stability and flow are they do not return to their original position. On the other hand, in cold
asphalt mixture characteristics determined from tests of compacted climate such as winter or under rapidly applied loads (fast moving
specimens of a specified geometry. In this test, we are following the
trucks), asphalt behaves like an elastic solid. Elastic solids are like
ASTM D6927 — Standard Test Method for Marshall Stability Test. rubber bands; when loaded they deform and when unloaded, they
Aside for Marshall Stability Test, this is also the reference code for return to their original shape.
testing of flow values along with density; air voids in the total mix,
voids in the mineral aggregate, or voids filled with asphalt, or both, 89. A. 0.3mm crack. This is a test criterion for reinforced concrete pipe
filled with asphalt are used for laboratory mix design and evaluation tested in a three-edge bearing test is 0.3 mm crack. Based on
of asphalt mixtures. numerous studies, develop load strain and load deflection information
during three-edge-bearing tests of a representative pipe section up to
87. and rough-textured particles. Generally, angular the formation of both hairline and 0.01-in cracks.
aggregate particles have rough texture-and round aggregate particles
are smooth_ ) textured. These 'propel‘lies along with the 90. B. Procedures done to promote cement hydration. Concrete Curing is
water/cementitious material ratio determine the strength, the maintaining of an adequate moisture content and temperature
w_ork‘abll?ty, and durability of concrete. The gradingor size | in concrete at early ages so that it can develop properties the mixture
distribution of aggregate is an important characteristic because it § was designed to achieve. Curing begins immediately after placement
determines the paste requiremgnt for wpr!&able concrete. The and finishing so that the concrete may develop the desired strength
aggregate component contributes internal friction to shear strength | and durability. Thus, this procedure is done to promote cement
and stability of the bituminous mixture.
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 183
Page 182

hydration, making the concrete develop strength, volume stability, This is a very practical way of practicing taking decisions as a true
resistance to freezing and thawing, and abrasion and scaling. Materials Engineer. It is common knowledge that a material that has
not been tested or part of a group of materials in the program of works
g Temperature of concrete during the period of mixing _whlle m‘ should not be incorporated in the construction works. Thus, the
transport and/or during placing shall not be permitted to rise above: delivered materials shall not be used unless tested. Based from the
DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 311.3.8 During hot given choices, it seemed correct to conduct immediate retesting but it
weather, the Engineer shall require that steps be taken to prevent the would consume another amount of time; replacing the materials with
temperature of mixed concrete from exceeding a maximum the tested ones seemed better, but if we replace it with another
temperature of 320C. untested one, it goes the same. Therefore, it is best to reject the
delivered untested materials and decide that the tested one should be
Although based from the said item, care should be done ‘when used. Based on this scenario, this is the best decision. As a materials
exceeding 32 degrees. However, many tolerances are be‘mg used in the engineer, the quality of every project should be his priority.
field. In practical, precautions should be planned in advance to
counter the effects of a high concrete temperature when the‘ concrete B. 6 to 8. On the pH scale, which runs from zero (very acidic) to 14
placed is somewhere between 25°C and 35°C (77°F and 95°F). (very alkaline), cement is incredibly alkaline, with a pH of 12 to 13.
Consider this: water has a pH of 7 and is considered pH neutral.
Concrate tomperature, °F Human skin is slightly acidic at pH 4.5. That is the reason why
40 60 80 100 Portland cement is dangerous to skin.
T T T T™3310

180} “Basic” pH of about 13, the pH values at exposed surfaces soon fall as
- <300 reactions occur between carbon dioxide from the atmosphere and

:
alkalis in the concrete— a process known as carbonation. Over time,
g
g
i
L
4280 ¢
fronts of carbonated concrete, with pH values of about 8.5, advance
5
2170} H below exposed surfaces.

35 § Table 714.1 - Acceptance Criteria For Questionable Water Supplies

4280 5
£ 0 ]
o hysical Properties
160 |- Slump: 76 mm (3 in.) <4270 Comp strength, min. %
Max. size agg: 37.6 mm (1% In.) Control at 7 days
Time of Setting deviation from control from 1:00 earlier to 1:30 later
0 10 20 30 40 Time of Setting (Gillmore Test)
Concrate temperature, °C Initial No marked change
Final Set No marked change
The Water Requirement of a Concrete Mixture Appearance Clear
with regards to Temperature Color Colorless
Odor Odorless
to the given choices, that 36 Total Solids 500 parts/million max.
So, it is best possible way, according
Degrees Celsius is the correct choice. PpHvalue | Tasw85
92. C. Reject the Materials. As construction work progresses, you noticed According to DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 714.2
that the materials delivered at the project site are different from the The mixing water shall be clear and apparently clean. If it contains
ones tested and that passed the requirements. As materials engineer, quantities or substances that discolor it or make it smell or taste
what would you do? unusual or objectionable, or cause suspicion, it shall not be used unloss
 nd Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
Page 184 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Page 185

service records of concrete made with it (or other infprmat\:]:x) (hydrophilic) and one oil-loving (hydrophobic) end. They make it
indicated that it is not injurious to the quality, shall be Sub]ecf. to the possible for water and oil to become finely dispersed in each other,
acceptance criteria as shown in Table 714.1 and Table 714.2 or as creating a stable, homogenous, smooth emulsion.
designated by the purchaser.
C. Referee Test. When the result of the second test differs from that of
As per DPWH Standard Specifications Table 714.1, pH value of water the first test on a sample representing the same lot of materials, the
to be incorporated in concrete mix shall be 4.5 to 8.5. Or? the othetr third test is done. This is very dependent on what kind of materials is
hand, Water known to be of potable quality may be used without test. being tested. Say compressive test is being conducted for one set
of
three samples, the third test will be called tertiary test. However,
For this question, it is safe to say that the pH value of Option B, 6 and when other materials are considered, say testing of reinforcing steel
8 pH is satisfactory to the requirement. Below or above the range as bars, or concrete cored sample, once a second test is conducted which
stated in Table 714.1 is considered unsatisfactory. is considered the comparison and if failed, a third test is needed to
break the comparison and to confirm which is the true result.
94. C. Ravelling. Scaling, crazing, and pockmarks are all types of PCCP
distress except ravelling which occurs only in asphalt. Its counterpart By analyzing, ACCEPTANCE TEST - The results of this test shall be
to the concrete is scaling, or the exposure of the aggregates due to the basis of acceptance of the materials. RE-TEST OR REFEREE
prolong resistance to traffic. TEST - The results of this test shall be final. In case the result of the
acceptance test is unsatisfactory, the supplier shall have the option to
Scaling is a very common surface defect often a;sociated vnth but not request a re-test at his expense. The delivered material shall be re-
limited to, concrete slabs exposed to weathering and dglclng salts. sampled by authorized government representative in the presence of
Crazing in concrete is the development of a network of ‘fme random the supplier or his representative.
cracks or fissures on the surface of concrete caused by shrlnkage of the
surface layer. Pockmarks occurs when an_ organic material was The Contractor may request referee testing if a "remove and replace"
incorporated to the concrete such that when it hardened, the organic condition is determined based on the Engineer’s test results, or if the
volume will be left open and produce a hole. differences between Contractor and Engineer test results exceed the
maximum allowable difference and the differences cannot be resolved.
C. More cement in the mix. We all know that rich means an al?undant The Contractor may also request referee testing if the Engineer’s test
of something others are lacking, and it should be good‘. Rich mix or fat results require suspension of production and the Contractor’s test
mix is a concrete mixture containing a high ratio of binder to results are within specification limits. Make the request within
5
aggregate, thus providing better spread and_ workability. onelud working days after receiving test results and cores from the Engineer.
If we are going to say that rich mix is rich in water, we can concl uhe
that the mix has doubtfully goof mixture because high water in the Verdict is a decision on a disputed issue. Thus, verdict test is a kind
mix means lower strength due to water-cem ent ratio rel_atlonsh \p. of test that's similar to the referee testing but differs in the way of
Thus, the mix is rich when cement content is high, resulting to low uprising the issue. It may be from a quality control perspective or in
WC Ratio. quality assurance part. Final test is the test being done to finalize an
acceptance of a project. It may be a form of testing in a final inspection.
96. B. MC (%) = (Weight of water in soil) / (Weight of dry soil) * 100 On the other hand, the natural way of testing is usually being done in
o =16g/80g
* 100 sets. A set is composed of three (3) tests. That is why that is called
= 20% Answer tertiary testing. Usually, no matter what the difference of the first two
tests, there should always be a third one to do balance the tests for a
97. D. To enable asphalt and water to mix. Based from the given choicez. set of three.
almost all are considered correct but an Engineer should know an
analyze that Emulsifiers are molecules with one water-loving
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 187
Page 186

99. B. The basic concepts of the Marshall mix design method were
originally developed by Bruce Marshall of the Mississippi Highway
Army. The

PART VIII-A
Department around 1939 and then refined by the U
Marshall method seeks to select the asphalt binder content at a
desired density that satisfies minimum stability and range of flow
values. The basic steps are a) Aggregate selection. b) Asphalt binder
selection. ¢) Sample preparation (including compaction). d) Stability
determination using Marshall Stabilometer. e) Density and voids
calculations. f) Optimum asphalt binder content selection. TEST QUESTIONS
Marshall method for preparing and evaluating trial mixes, aside from
Superpave Gyratory Compactor, is one conventional method of job-
mix design. In this process, aggregates are blended in proportion
meeting the specifications; density of the molded sample is measured
to be able to calculate the void properties: trial mixes are conducted
using various ranges of asphalt content to determine the physical
properties of the samples. So, based from the above-mentioned
procedure, the mixing and compacting temperature for the asphalt
VARIOUS EXAMS IN 2017
cement to be used are obtained from the temperature-viscosity graph
a very
CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'
is not actually considered in the design because job-mix has
wide range of choices that needs to be identified through experience. MATERIALS ENGINEER
WRITTEN EXAMINATION
100. A.220 mm, The permitted
i
variation
G
from
ermi
design .
s crssen
Pemitted varation from design +20mm

+10mm
7 Pemiied variation fiom design 20 mm
thickness of a layer of LEVEL OF SURFACE
aggregate subbase course is Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY
Weasured by 3-m straight-edge 20 mm
+20 mm. Subsection 200.3.5
Permitted vaniation from design
Tolerances
olerances
states
states
4
that, GEREEILES w0
permitted variation from
design is + 20 mm, thickness of layer.

----- END OF EXPLANATIONS----

Page 188 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 189

ACCREDITATION EXAMINATION FOR CONTRACTORS'/CONSULTANTS' CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'

MATERIALS ENGINEER MATERIALS ENGINEER
(ANSWER SHEET) WRITTEN EXAMINATION
Examinee No, Date of Examination VARIOUS EXAMS IN 2017
Score Place of Examination : <O Manila
Examinee's Signatu Note: Choose the BEST answers for these questions as hard as you can. You
may use the ANSWER SHEET from the previous page for answering
INSTRUCTION IN MARKING ANSWERS: the questions. The answer key and the SOLUTIONS with
Shade your answer in each Item. If you wish to change your answer, mark an X on your first answerthy
EXPLANATIONS are on part B of this Chapter. God bless!
shade your new answer and affix your initial.

A B C D A B C D A B COD A B C
Given Weight of Dry Aggregates = 950 grams
|lococo [slococo [mloococo [rlooco Weight of Asphalt = 50 grams
2| OO0 O (njoocoo 52| OO
What is the percent of asphalt by weight of total mix?
OO 7O OO
a. 5%
3OO0 0O |slocoo BIOOOO |B|OCOO
b. 5.26%
LIOO OO ([nloocoo 0 OOOO [nPOOO c. b5.65%
51CO0C00 [NOOCOCO |[sfloocoo (nooo d. 6%
6O OO O OO OO 56. 1O O© O O 8| O OO
What is the significance of the loss on ignition test of cement?
1|O000 |noocoo |aloooo |njooco a. It is a measure of the heat generated when cement is mixed
8| O00O0 noooo (sjoocooco (ajooco with water.
IOOCO0OO0 (NOOOO (oo |uoco oo b. It signifies pre-hydration or moisture uptake of cement
VOOOO 8OO0 (oo O |&|lco
while it is shelved
oo
It is a measure of the resistance of cement when exposed to
NOOOO |¥COOO |00 o |[sk|loo oo fire
RIOOOO (7|O0C0O |(ajco0o |njloooo None of the above
BIOOOO |BOOOO |(BlC0oO0O (wMooooO
BO OO O PO OO
3. Asphalt increases in Marshall Stability Test, the air voids:
O 6O
O OO (8OO0 O]
BLOOOO
Increases
(OO OoO |sjlo0coo |[njoococo
Decreases
6/[OCOOO |anjoooO 66.[O O OO 71O OOO
Remains Constant
NOOOO |nfoocoCO 67.[O O OO 2O OOO Either a or b
BOOOO 80000 (slo0ooo |ajloooo
19O O OO “w|O O oo HOOOO |ufOCDOOO 4. Soil properties can be improved by:
20 /OO0COCO 5. /O O OO 0O OO |5 O a. Adequate Compaction
ANOO OO [6[OOOO [nNfoooO |(sjooCO b. Addition of Binder
2O0OO0O (ooC O NOOO O |7/OOOO c. Maximizing water content
BOOOO (BfOOOO 73|00 OO B8O OOO
d. Stabilization
BOOOO |njooo O NnOOOO [9OOCOO
~25_0C>C>O S_UOOOO EOOOO OO O
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
Page 190 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 191

5. Bituminous mixture shall have a minimum dry compressive 11. Under D.O 98, series of 2016, Revised Guidelines on the
strength of Accreditation of Contractors’ and Consultants’ Materials Engineers,
a. 100 psi which is NOT true in the Limits of Assignment of accredited
b. 200 psi Materials Engineers.
c. 300 psi a. Non-accredited Materials Engineer — Three (3) projects with
d. 400 psi an aggregate cost of not more than P15M
b. Materials Engineer I — Two (2) projects with an aggregate
Too wet mix, over-sanded mix and overworking of concrete during cost of not more than P200M
placing usually result in of concrete pavement. Materials Engineer IT — Two (2) projects with an aggregate
a. Cracking cost of not more than P300M
b. Ravelling Materials Engineer II - Three (3) projects with an aggregate
c. Settlement cost of not more than P250M
d. Scaling
. Slump test is the measure of workability of concrete mixture. Which
DPWH Department Order No. 47, Series of 2015 requires an is NOT the type of concrete slump?
International Roughness Index (IRI) values of not more than a. Shear slump
for both asphalt and pavement for National Primary Roads. b. Collapse slump
a. 2.00 m/Km c. True slump
b. 2.50 m/Km d. False slump
c. 3.00 m/Km
d. 3.5 m/Km . The selection by standard method of a representative portion of a
material for the purpose of ascertaining its characteristics is called:
The maximum compacted thickness per laye)" for both aggregate a. Batching
subbase and base courses (Items 200 and 201) is " b. Sampling
a. 125 mm ¢ Quarrying
b. 150 mm d. Quartering
c. 175 mm
d. 200 mm . From the following data, determine the degree of compaction.
Field density test data:
During asphalt compaction, the rolling speed, whether being used Weight of material taken from hole, kg=4.885
in the vibratory or static mode, should not exceed km/hr. Weight of sand to fill hole, kg =3.885
a. 4-17 Volume of hole, cu.m =0.0028
b. 5-8 Wet unit weight, kg/cu.m =1745
c. 6-9 Dry unit weight, kg/cu.m =1663
d. 7-10 Laboratory Data:
Maximum dry density, kg/cu.m = 2250
10. Which is not included in the three phases of rolling operations in Optimum Moisture Content, % =8.10
asphalt pavement?
a. Breakdown rolling
b. Primary rolling
c. Intermediate rolling
d. Final rolling
Page 192 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 193

15. Concrete samples must be shipped to the laboratory at least d. At maximum moisture content
hours prior to testing.
a. 12 21. The best way to determine the temperature of the delivered asphalt
b. 24 mix is with a dial and armored stem thermometer. The stem should
c. 36 be inserted sufficiently into the mixture to a depth of at least:
d. 48 a. 2inches
b. 4 inches
16. When the top surface of a concrete specimen is rough and not truly c. 6inches
plane, stress concentrations are introduced and the strength of the d. 8inches
concrete is reduced by about:
a. 1/2 - Which of the following provisions is not included in the job-mix
b. 13 formula?
c. 1/4 a. Mixing time
d. 1/5 b. Grading of Aggregates
c. Asphalt cement
17. The sieving process (grain size) does NOT provide information on' d. Temperature at delivery
a. Shape of the soil grains
b. Distribution of the grain sizes 23. Suppose you have a sack of aggregate sample weighing 20 Kg. But
c. Soil classification you only need 5 Kg. for a certain test. In the absence of sample
d. Bothbandc splitter, what will be the best way to get a 5 Kg sample?
a. Geta 5 Kg sample from the middle of the sack
18. Under what climatic condition(s) do we use the lower penetration b. Remove the aggregate from the sack and lay it a pile on a
grade or hard asphalts? clean floor then get the 5 Kg sample from the middle of the
a. Cold climate pile
b. Hot climate c. Perform the quartering procedure
c. Both cold and hot climate d. Getab Kgsample direct from the sack
d. Rainy weather
24. As amaterials engineer, when is the right time to start the sampling
19. Why are undisturbed samples used primarily for determining the and testing of aggregate base course material?
properties of foundation materials? a. Once the material is delivered and stockpiled
a. To retain the structure of material b. As construction work progresses
b. Because it is easier to obtain undisturbed sample than c. Once the source is identified
disturbed samples ) d. After the material was incorporated into the work
¢. Because it is easier to test undisturbed samples than
disturbed samples . + 25. Penetration test for asphalt cement is a measure of:
d. Because it represents the relative strength of the soil strata a. Consistency
when subjected to compression test b. Solubility
c. Ductility
20. For efficient compaction, the embankment materials should at the d. Fluidity
time of rolling be:
a. Dry 26. Which of the following is the thinnest and most fluid of medium
b. Wet curing cutback asphalt?
c. At optimum moisture content a. MC-30
Page 194 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 195
b. MC-70 32. In how many equal layers should a concrete cylinder beam sample
c. MC-250 be molded?
d. MC-800 a. 2
b. 3
27. What differentiates the composition of Item 201 — Aggregate base c. 4
course and Item 200 — Aggregate Subbase Course? d. 5
a. Item 201 contains less binder and smaller size of gravel than
Ttem 200 33. Given: Asphalt content of bituminous mix = 5.5%
b. Item 201 contains more binder and bigger size of gravel than Weight of specimen in air =1200¢
Item 200 Weight of specimen in water =1700¢g
c. Item 201 contains sand and gravel only Weight of specimen in SSD =1205¢g
d. Item 201 contains sand and fine-grained soils only Calculate the bulk gravity of the asphalt specimen.
a. 1.174
28. If the bulk specific gravity of a bituminous mix is 2.243 and the dry b. 1.721
stability is 3,100 Ibs., what will be the approximate wet stability if c. 1576
its Index of Retained Strength (IRS) is 82%? d. 2.376
a. 2,542 lbs.
b. 3,780 lbs. 34. What will possibly be the result of using different brands of cement
c. 5,702 lbs. in concrete paving?
d. 6,953 lbs. a. Different Strength
b. Different Texture
29. Generally, acceptance of concrete pavement is based upon: c. Different color after it has hardened
a. Cores d. No effect
b. Beam samples
c. Bothaandb 35. Retarders are more useful during:
d. Eitheraorb a. Cold weather
b. Hot weather
30. Specimens for compressive or flexural strengths tests shall be c. Freezing weather
removed from the molds at the end of 24 hours and stored in a moist d. Warm weather
condition at a temperature range of ____ until the time of test.
a. 24 to 28 degrees Celsius 36. A transit mixer for road construction was found to have a 6" slump
b. 22 to 26 degrees Celsius of fresh concrete instead of the required 3". What will you
c. 20 to 24 degrees Celsius recommend if you are the assigned Materials Engineer?
d. 18 to 22 degrees Celsius a. Add Portland cement to attain the required 3" slump.
b. Add Portland cement and fine aggregate to attain the
. Undersized reinforcing steel bars that satisfy the tensile and required 3" slump
elongation requirements may be ‘accepted provided that its } c. Reject the concrete mixture
underweight does not exceed: d. Let the concrete mix diverted for pouring on a prepared
a. 3% column for retaining wall of the same project.
b. 5%
c. 6% 37. Quality of factory-produced reinforced concrete pipes may be best
d. 10% established through:
a. Engineer’s Certification
Page 196 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed

b. Inspection Report
c. Test of concrete cylinder samples 43. A mixture of asphalt cement and water with catalytic agent is called:
d. Test of concrete pipe samples a. Joint filler
b. Temperature asphalt
38. Specimens for compressive or flexural strength tests shall be c. Cutback asphalt
removed from the molds at the end of ____ hours and stored in a d. Asphalt cement
moist condition until the time of test.
a. 12 44. ASTM C150 requires that the 28-day strength of mortar made from
b. 24 Type I Portland cement be at least 27.6 MPa. Three specimens were
c. 36 tested: two passed but one failed by more than 20%. What will be
d. 48 the conclusion?
a. Discard the failed result and conclude that the particular
. A one-lane with pavement width of 3.5 meters and shoulder width cement passed the specification.
of 9.5 meter on each side of the pavement was designed to have Perform a re-test since the data is inconclusive
subbase and base courses with a combined thickness of 300 mm. If Get the average of the three and if the average is more than
the thickness of the subbase is 125 mm, the spreading and 27.6 MPa, conclude that the particular cement passed the
compaction of the subbase and base courses shall be carried out in: specification
a. 3 layers over the full width of 4.6 m Conclude that the cement does not pass the specifications
b. 2 layers over the full width of 4.5 m since it failed to give the consistent results
c. 3 layers over the full width of
d. 2 layers over the full width of 3. . The required strength of a concrete beam sample is at least
when tested by mid-point method.
40. When the strength test results of concrete beam samples are not a. 550 psi
acceptable, how many representative core/s shall be taken from each b. 650 psi
member or area of concrete in-place considered deficient in the c. 3,000 psi
newly completed concrete pavement? d. 3,500 psi
a. At least 4 cores
b. At least 3 cores . What documentation should be maintained and kept updated by the
c. At least 2 cores materials engineer during project implementation?
d. Only 1 core a. Minimum testing requirements
b. Materials logbook
4 . The purpose of conducting laboratory CBR test on the fill materials ¢ Quality control handbook
for embankment is to check: d. Materials test result
a. Permeability of the compacted subgrade material
b. Swelling characteristics of the subgrade material - The actual strength concrete in-place in an area presented by failed
c. Bearing capacity of subgrade material beam samples can be determined by means of:
d. All of the above a. Slump test
b. Core test
42. The workability of a bituminous mix is dependent on the: c. Stability test
a. Gradation of aggregates d. Extraction test
b. Temperature of mix
c. Asphalt content . In slip-form construction, what is the slump of concrete used?
d. Shape and texture of aggregates a. Not more than 3 inches
 Ed Page 199
Page 198 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — /

b. 3to4inches a. Joint filler

c. Almost zero b. Emulsified asphalt
d. Any of the above c. Cutback asphalt
d. Asphalt cement
49. From the materials point-of-view, subgrade construction consists shall be:
mainly of: 54. The mortar proportion of stone masonr)"ha
a. Compaction of the top of layer in cuts a. One-part cement, 2-parts sand
b. Compaction of the whole depth of material in embankments b. One-part cement, 3-parts sand
c. Identification and treatment of unsuitable material c. One-part cement, 4-parts sand
d. All of the above d. One-part cement, 1-parts sand
strength, absorption and
50. What penetration grade of asphaltic material is appropriate for 55. How many pipes should be tested fo', pipe?
sealing of PCCP joints? dimension in 300 pcs of reinforced culve’
a. 85-100 a. One
b. 120-150 b. Two
c. 150-200 c. Four
d. not exceeding 90 d. Six
. or each soil. Which of the
51. A set of three (3) beam samples representing a particular section of 56. The moisture-density curve is different A
a concrete pavement failed to meet the flexural strength following statements is/are true? nerally have fairly high
requirement. As a materials engineer, what would you recommend? a. Granular, well-graded soils ¢’ {imum moisture content
a. Monitor the pavement section with strength deficiency maximum densities at low 0
b. Adjust payment corresponding to the strength deficiency of (OMC) 4 OMC than granular, well-
the beam samples b. Clay soils have lower densities &
c. Conduct core test for strength determination on section graded soils ,ve higher densities than
represented by the failed samples to determine the actual c. Granular, well-graded soils h?
strength of the in-placed concrete uniform soils at OMC
d. Submit new beam samples for testing d. of the above
All
unsuitable materials if:
52. Where do we take additional cores when the measurement of any 57. Embankment materials are classified a-’f,o%
core taken from the pavement is deficient in thickness by more than a. The natural moisture content is
25 mm? b. The liquid limit is 40%
a. At no less than 20-meter intervals parallel to the centerline c. The plasticity index is 60 er cubic meter
in each direction from the affected location d. The natural density is 1200 Kg 12
b. At no less than 15-meter intervals parallel to the centerline n tes rf in the
in each direction from the affected location 58. The test which combines a load-deform lt;fian :opeéiiz?r:?ne the
¢. At no less than 10-meter intervals parallel to the centerline lal?oratory with an empirical design yers is known as:
in each direction from the affected location thickness pf pavement base and other 1#
d. At no less than 5-meter intervals parallel to the centerline a. Plate bearing test
in each direction from the affected location b. Moisture-Density Determinatios”
c. California Bearing ratio
53. The asphalt material that is usually classified by its penetration d. Standard Penetration Test
grade is:
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed

b. 3 to 4 inches a. dJoint filler

c. Almost zero b. Emulsified asphalt
d. Any of the above c. Cutback asphalt
d. Asphalt cement
49. From the materials point-of-view, subgrade construction consists
mainly of 54. The mortar proportion of stone masonry shall be:
a. Compaction of the top of layer in cuts a. One-part cement, 2-parts sand
b. Compaction of the whole depth of material in embankments b. One-part cement, 3-parts sand
c. Identification and treatment of unsuitable material c. One-part cement, 4-parts sand
d. All of the above d. One-part cement, 1-parts sand

50. What penetration grade of asphaltic material is appropriate for 55. How many pipes should be tested for strength, absorption and
sealing of PCCP joints? dimension in 300 pcs of reinforced culvert pipe?
a. 85-100 a. One
b. 120-150 b. Two
c. 150-200 c. Four
d. not exceeding 90 d. Six

51. A set of three (3) beam samples representing a particular section of 56. The moisture-density curve is different for each soil. Which of the
a concrete pavement failed to meet the flexural strength following statements is/are true?
requirement. As a materials engineer, what would you recommend? a. Granular, well-graded soils generally have fairly high
a. Monitor the pavement section with strength deficiency maximum densities at low optimum moisture content
b. Adjust payment corresponding to the strength deficiency of (OMOC)
the beam samples b. Clay soils have lower densities at OMC than granular, well-
c. Conduct core test for strength determination on section graded soils
represented by the failed samples to determine the actual c. Granular, well-graded soils have higher densities than
strength of the in-placed concrete uniform soils at OMC
d. Submit new beam samples for testing d. Al of the above

52. Where do we take additional cores when the measurement of any 57. Embankment materials are classified as unsuitable materials if:
core taken from the pavement is deficient in thickness by more than a. The natural moisture content is 50%
25 mm? b. The liquid limit is 40%
a. At no less than 20-meter intervals parallel to the centerline c. The plasticity index is 60
in each direction from the affected location d. The natural density is 1200 Kg per cubic meter
b. At no less than 15-meter intervals parallel to the centerline
in each direction from the affected location 58. The test which combines a load-deformation test performed in the
¢. At no less than 10-meter intervals parallel to the centerline laboratory with an empirical design chart to determine the
in each direction from the affected location thickness pf pavement base and other layers is known as:
d. At no less than 5-meter intervals parallel to the centerline Plate bearing test
op

in each direction from the affected location Moisture-Density Determination

California Bearing ratio
by its penetration Standard Penetration Test
e

53. The asphalt material that is usually classified

grade is:
Page 200 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 201

59. If one of the measurements of a core specimen taken from the a. Every 100 linear meters per lane
concrete pavement is 28.7 cm., what is the corrected measurement b. Every 200 linear meters per lane
to be used in calculating the average thickness of the pavement if c. Every 300 linear meters per lane
the design thickness is 28.0 cm? d. Every 400 linear meters per lane
a. 28.7cm
b. 28.0cm . Quality Control testing is a DPWH project is the responsibility of
c. 285cm the:
d. 29.0cm a. DPWH
b. Contractor
60. Which of the following bituminous material is best recommended for | c. DPWH and Contactor
sealing weakened plane joints? d. Construction Supervision consultant
a. Asphalt cement
b. Emulsified Asphalt 66. What chemical admixture is need to produce a concrete mix with
c. Cutback Asphalt improved slump without additional water?
d. Joint filler asphalt a. Set accelerating admixture
b. Set retarding mixture
61. The test to indicate the temperature wherein asphalt can be heated c. Water reducing admixture
without catching fire is called: d. Fly ash
a. Loss on heating
b. Spot test 67. Samples of aggregate base course material when tested for quality
c. Flash point passed the requirements except grading. What will you recommend
d. Penetration test as a materials engineer?
a. Reject the material
62. It is a single test procedure to determine the suitability of an 1 b. Replace the material
asphaltic concrete mix. c. Accept the material at an adjusted price
a. Penetration d. Reprocess the material by blending
b. Extraction
c. Marshall Stability 68. Three cores taken from a pavement section poured on a single day
d. Immersion-Compression were tested to have strengths as follows:
Core Strength (psi)
63. The moisture-density curve is different for each soil. Which of the 1 3650
following statements is/are true? 2 | 3000 (86% of 3500 psi)
a. Granular, well-graded soils generally have fairly high | - 3 2450 (70% of 3500 psi)
maximum densities at low optimum moisture content Average 3033 (87% of 3500 psi)
(OMC)
b. Clay soils have lower densities at OMCs than granular, well- § If the required strength is 3500 psi, concrete in the area represented
graded soils by these cores:
c. Granular, well-graded soils have higher densities than a. Maybe accepted, subject to price adjustment
uniform soils at OMC b. Considered adequate
d. All of the above c. Considered inadequate
d. May be record, at the initiative of the DPWH
64. What is the frequency of core sampling required on a completed
bituminous pavement?
Page 202 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed

69. What is the minimum soaked CBR value required for base materials a. 40%
obtained at the maximum dry density determined by AASHTO T180 . 50%
Method D? . 60%
a. 26 . 70%
b. 50
c. 75 . The main problem associated with wrong practice of conveying
d. 80 concrete is called:
a. Honeycomb
70. An admixture that tends to reduce incidence of thermal cracking b. Laitance
and to maintain concrete workability during large pours or long c. Segregation
ready-mix hauls is a/an: d. Cracking
a. Water-reducing admixture
b. Retarding water-reducing admixture . The smaller the value of the fineness modulus, the:
c. Air-entraining admixture a. Coarser the material
d. Accelerating admixture b. Finer the material
c. The lighter the material
71. Which of the following is the frequency of sampling of concrete d. The drier the material
beams required by DPWH specification?
a. At least one set of 3 concrete beams every 50-cu. m or . The specification call for a 1:2:4 concrete mix. In a one-bagger mixer,
fraction thereof which of the following amount of water is most likely required for
b. At least one set of 3 concrete beams every 500-cu. m or the mix?
fraction thereof a. 20 liters
c. At least one set of 3 concrete beams every 75-cu. m or b. 5 liters
fraction thereof c. 10 liters
d. At least one set of 3 concrete beams every 750-cu. m or d. 35 liters
fraction thereof % i
. Compaction trials on embankment and base/subbase courses are
72. What is the function of emulsifiers in liquid asphalt? carried out to determine the:
a. To increase mixing ability with aggregates a. Suitable type of compaction equipment to be used
b. To retain water in asphalt for longer periods b. Number of roller passes required
c. To prevent asphalt from hardening . Suitability of the materials
d. To enable asphalt and water to mix d. All of the above

73. Cutback asphalt or emulsified asphalt is usually for: . The optimum moisture content of soil is determined during:
a. Prime coating Laboratory compaction
1l
b. Tack coating b. Compaction of a trial section
c. Seal coating c. Field compaction test
d. Eitheraorb d. Any of the above

74. The index of retailed strength of the compacted bituminous . Test pitting conducted on a prepared base showed that the thickness
mixtures is the ratio of the compressive strength of immersed and of Item 201 — Aggregate base course was deficient by 5 cm. As a
dry bituminous mixture. What is the minimum index of retained materials engineer, what will you recommend?
strength required for bituminous mixtures? a. Reject the prepared section
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1
Page 204 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed — 2™ Ed __Page 205

b. Rework the section Length = 394 mm

¢. Accept the section at an adjusted price due to thickness Height = 194
deficiency Ultimate load = 52,300 lbs.
d. Provide sand cushion to attain the thickness requirement What is the compressive strength of the sample?
a. 2.8 MPa
81. When taking three or more samples of aggregates to be combined for b. 3.9 MPa
one materials sample: c. 4.2 MPa
The small samples must be packed in separate sample bags d. None of the above
®

b. The small samples must be obtained from different lots

¢. The small samples should of approximately equal size 86. Compute the percent variation in a mass of a 19mm
diameter
d. None of the above deformed steel bar with the following laboratory test data:
Length of specimen = 1000 mm
82. A concrete core specimen for thickness determination shall have a Mass of specimen = 2.322 Kg
diameter of at least: Nominal mass 235 Kg/m
a. 75 mm Nominal Area = 284 sq. m
b. 100 mm
c. 125 mm a. 6%
d. 15-mm b. 4%
c. 3%
83. Two concrete cylinder A and B are tested in uniaxial compression, d. None of the above
and if cylinder A is completely saturated while B is dry, which of the
following is true?
a. Both cylinders will yield the same compressive strength 87. A_sample of a Reinforced Concrete Pipe has the following test
data:
provided that all of the factors are the same Dimensions:
b. Whether cylinder A will yield a higher compressive strength Actual Internal Diameter = 915 mm
over cylinder B (or otherwise) is unpredictable Thickness of Wall = 115 mm
¢. Cylinder A will yield a higher compressive strength Laying length = 1000 mm (1m)
d. Cylinder B will yield higher compressive strength Strength Tests:
Load to produce 0.3mm crack = 7435 Kg
84. What is the yield point and tensile strength in MPa of a 16 mm ) Ultimate load = 8160 Kg
diameter deformed steel bar with the following data? What is the load to produce 0.3 mm crack and the ultimate load?
Nominal mass = 1.552 kg/m® a. 84 N/mm and 101 N/m/mm
Nominal area = 199 sq. m b. 80 N/mm and 87 N/m/mm
Yield point load = 15,900 lbs. ¢. 57 N/mm and 66 N/m/mm
Tensile load = 20,800 lbs. d. None of the above
a. 250 MPa and 490 MPa
b. 355 MPa and 465 MPa
c. 380 MPaand 510 MPa 88. If 330 gallons of paints for use in painting of 2-storey school
building
d. None of the above are delivered in the project, 160 gallons are Latex Paint and 140
gallons are flat wall enamel paint. How many gallons will you
85. A load bearing concrete hollow block (CHB) sample was tested submit for quality test for each type of paint?
compression with the following test data” a. 1 gallon each
Width = 150 mm b. 2 gallons each
Page 206 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 207

c. 4 gallons each 95. Which of the following gauge number of G.I sheets will give the
d. None of the above lower thickness?
a. Gauge # 32
89. In the construction of a 2-storey, 6-classroom school building, an b. Gauge # 31
estimated 18,800 units of 4" CHB will be used, how many quality c. Gauge# 26
tests are you going to perform? d. Gauge# 18
a. 4QT
b. 3QT 96. This is the type of paint intended for concrete and other masonry
c. 2QT surface.
d. None of the above a. Enamel paint
b. Later Paint
90. An estimated 15,200 units of corrugated G.I. sheets will be usedvin c. Polyurethane Paint
the construction of resettlement housing project, how many quality d. None of the above
tests are you going to prepare?
a. 13QT - Blended hydraulic cement type 1P requires a compressive strength
b. 10QT requirement of
c. 9QT a. 25 MPa min.
d. None of the above b. 25 MPa max.
c. 28 MPa min.
91. What is the required length of pipe specimen in the determination d. None of the above
of zinc coating of galvanized pipe?
a. 6in. . In Portland cement, the amount of water in the preparation of
b. 4in. mortar cubes can be determined using what water/cement ratio?
c. 2in. a. 0.485
d. None of the above b. 0.458
c. 0.5685
92. What is the phosphorus content requirement for rebars?” d. None of the above
a. 0.06 min.
b. 0.06 max. . Cement stiffening without strength development is called
c. 0.60 max. a. False set
d. None of the above b. Flash set
c. Premature set
93. What test is conducted to clarify reinforcing steel bars into grade? d. None of the above
a. Tensile Strength
b. Yield Strength 100. For RCPC, the laying length used in calculating the strength
c. Elongation values of the barrel pipe is the:
d. All of the above a. Outside length
b. Inside length
94. Which schedule no. of G.I Pipe will give a high wall thickness? c. Standard length
a. Schedule 80 d. None of the above
b. Schedule 40
c. Schedule 20
d. None of the above --END OF QUESTIONS-
Page 208 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed

ANSWER KEY

VARIOUS EXAMS IN 2017

PART VIII-B
CONTRACTORS' and CONSULTANTS'
MATERIALS ENGINEER WRITTEN EXAMINATION ANSWERS AND DETAILED

1L A 26. D 51.C 76. B EXPLANATIONS

2. 27. A 52. D 7. A 1
3. B 28. A 53. D 78. D
4. D 29. C 54. A 79. A
5 B 30. C 55. D 80. B
6. D 31.C 56. D 81. B
= 8 N
A
30,
o06, U
A 3.
VARIOUS EXAMS IN 2017
9. A 34, A 59. C 84. B CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'
10. B 35. B 60. D 85. B
1. B 36, 61. C 8. B MATERIALS ENGINEER
120D
12. 37.D
e o2 C8
62. 87.B
it W RITTEN EXAMINATION
14. A 39. B 64. A 89. C
15. B 40. B 65. B 90. D
16. B 41.D -~ 66.C 91. B
17.:G 42. B 67.D 92. B
18. B 43. A 68. C 93. B
19. A 44.D 69. D 94. A
20. C 45. B 70. B 95. A
21.C 46. B i o) 96. B
22.D 47.B 72. D 97. A
23. C 48.C 73.D 98. A
24. B 49. D 74.D 99. B
2. A 50. A 75. C 100.C
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
Page 210 Page 211
transfer. For further research, please see AASHTO T 105 and ASTM
C 114: Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement.
CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'
MATERIALS ENGINEER B. The total volume of the small pockets of air between the coated
WRITTEN EXAMINATION aggregate particles throughout a compacted paving mixture expressed
VARIOUS EXAMS IN 2017 as a percent of the bulk volume of the compacted paving mixture. The
amount of air voids in a mixture is extremely important and closely
related to stability
Note: Below is the answer and detailed explanations to the questions from and durability. For typical dense-graded
the previous chapter. Enjoy learning! mixes with 12.5 mm (0.5 inch) nominal maximum aggregate sizes air
voids below about 3 percent result in an unstable mixture while air
voids above about 8 percent result in a water-permeable mixture.

In asphalt binder content and air voids, percent

A. 5.00%. There are two ways to solve for the Percentage of Asphalt air voids should
decrease with increasing asphalt binder content.
Content:
A.) By weight of Mix:
D. There are many ways to improve the soil properties. It really
(We.of original sample - Wt.of sample after extraction) depends on how we are going to use it. It is either for road
% Asphalt Content = Wtof Original sample construction, or filling materials on a cut slope and the like. Based
from the given choices, it must be for a road construction. Say we
B.) By weight of Aggregate: upgrade the soil properties by adequate compaction, this is a very
basic way to improve our embankment using maximum compactive
(Wt.of original sample - Wt.of sample after extraction) effort at optimum water content. Additional binder is also applicable
% Asphalt Content = Wt.of sample after extraction but depends upon the grading of the soil. Say if the soil aggregates
have a low plasticity or non-plastic, additional binder is recommended
We are looking for the percent of asphalt by weight of total mix. to increase the plasticity. However, if the soil aggregates are highly
Given: . - ) plastic, additional coarse-grained soil (blending) is advisable.
Weight of Dry Aggregates = 950 grams; Weight of Asphalt = 50 g; Maximizing the water content is being done using the optimum
moisture content at its maximum dry density. However, it is also
Solution: being used in option A — adequate compaction. On the other hand,
Total Mix = Asphalt + Aggregates = 50 g + 950 g = 1000 grams stabilization is also one of the best ways to improve the soil because
Asphalt Mix Percentage = Asphalt/Total Mix we are enhancing not just the physical properties of the soil but also
e ' =50/1000 * 100 = 6.00% Answer. its chemical structure.

B. Loss of ignition (LOI) is not measured by heat generatec} V\;hgn For this case, the answer must be stabilization. When we are talking
mixed with water because in the first place t‘hza test does not inc! uhe about properties of soil, and the best way is to stabilize
it with
water. The cement is exposed to fire but its resistance cannot be chemical admixtures. The soil will be very much improved using
measured. That is because LOI signiftes pre-hydration or moisture stabilization compare to the other available options.
uptake of cement while it is shelved. Portland Cement LOlis |
calculated by heating up a cement sample from 900 — }000°C (1650h— B. 200 psi. Subsection 307.2.1 Composition and Quality of Bituminous
1830°F) until a constant weight is obtained. The welghy lotfls of the Mixture: Bituminous mixture shall have a minimum dry compressive
sample due to heating is then determined. A hlgh loss on 1gx'\mor;c:n strength of 1.4 MPa (200 psi). The standard test method for
indicate pre-hydration and carbonation, wh_xch may be cause 4 y compressive strength of bituminous mix shall be used in ASTM
improper and prolonged storage or adulteration during transport or D1074-02.
Page 212 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
Page 213

6. Scaling.
D. T will explain, one by one the definition or meaning of the Settlement can also be visually detected by vertical displacement of
mentioned options to better understand the common defects of the wearing surface. It starts from cracking, if the foundation is not stable
structures. enough to hold the upper layer, settlement will soon occur.

Buildings and other built structures are moving a}l the ume, but Scaling is a common defect in
usually these movements are so small that it is unnoticeable. concrete pavement and is the
Movement can be caused by defects, movement of the counterpart of ravelling in asphalt
ground, foundation failure, decay of the building fabric, and so on. If pavement. Scaling is local flaking
the movement cannot be accommodated by the strength of the or peeling of the surface of
structure, Cracking will occur. The following are the basic cause of hardened concrete as a result of
cracking in concrete: exposure to different and extreme
a. Ground movement (beneath foundations) caused by clay weather conditions in the area i
shrinkage, land slip, vibration, subsidence, settlement, heave, while it is moist. Generally, it -
sway, and so on. starts as localized small patches, which Sealif (RCGF)
b. Foundation failure due to the decay of soft clay brick, concrete later merge and extend to expose larger areas. Light scaling does not
erosion due to chemical contaminants, and so on. expose the coarse aggregate, whereas moderate scaling exposes the
c. Thermal movement that causes materials to expand aggregate and usually involves the loss of the surface mortar layer.
or contract as temperature increases or decreases. The main cause of scaling is the following:
a. Overworking of the surface during construction
Ravelling can be visually detected by the b. Poor quality aggregates and cement
exposed aggregates present at the surface of c. Sprinkling of water in the surface during finishing work
the pavement. It is the progressive d. Over sanded mix
disintegration of an HMA layer from the e. Too wet mix or high water-cement ratio
surface downward as a result of the
dislodgement of aggregate particles. The Thus, the remedial measures for scaling are:
primary problem with this defect is that loose a. Proper methods of placing, consolidating and finishing concrete
debris on the pavement, roughness, water in pavement construction. Use clean sand and provide good
collecting in the ravelled locations result in drainage.
vehicle hydroplaning and loss of skid b. Removal and replacement of the section with major scaling
resistance. Loss of bond between aggregate By Minor scaling should be monitored for 6 mos., and if further
particles and the asphalt binder as a result of: deterioration occurs, the affected area should be removed or
a. Dust coating on the aggregate particles 2% replaced.
that forces the asphalt binder to bond
Ravelling (Asphalt) C. 8.0 m/Km. DPWH
with the dust rather than the aggregate . Department Order No. 47, Series of 2015
b. Aggregate Segregation. If fine particles are missing from Fhe requires an International Roughness Index (IRI) values of not more
aggregate matrix, then the asphalt binder is only able to bind than 3.0 m/Km for both asphalt and pavement for National Primary
the remaining coarse particles at their relatively few contact Roads.
points. ) o
g Inadequate compaction during construction: High density is Road roughness has been highly recognized as an indicator of road
required to develop sufficient cohesion within the HMA. The condition in terms of road pavement performance and as a major
third figure above shows a road suffering from rav§llmg due to determinant in vehicle operating cost. Poor roughness characteristic
inadequate compaction caused by cold weather paving. of pavement will result to poor riding quality, increase in vehicle
operating cost, increase in accident potential and reduction in
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
Page 214 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 215
still in a workable condition. The use of equipment which results in
pavement life. Presently, road roughness is quantified in terms of
excessive crushing of the aggregate
International Roughness Index (IRD) which was developez_j by the will not be permitted. Further,
World Bank in the 1980s. Henceforth, D.0. 47, Series of 2015 is hereby Subsection 307.3.8 Paragraph 3 states that “Rollers shall move at a
slow but uniform speed with the drive roll or wheels nearest the paver.
provided.
Rolling shall be continued until roller marks are eliminated and a
Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 200.3.3 minimum of 97 mass percent of the density of the laboratory
D. 200 mm. DPWH
compacted specimens prepared in accordance with AASHTO T 166
states that where the required thickness is 150 mm or !ess. the
material may be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the
has been obtained.”
required thickness is more than 150 mm, the aggregate s_ubbase sha]i
As per practice, the rolling speedshould
be spread and compacted in two or more layers of approximately equa. be 3 to 6 km/h. Mass,
thickness, and the maximum compacted thickness of any layer shall
frequency and amplitude are therefore also decisive for
the compaction effect.
not exceed 150 mm. All subsequent layers shall be S[?I'@Hd and For optimal compaction of different layer
Thus, for a 400-mm Y.hlcknesshuf thicknesses bigger tandem vibratory rollers, in most cases with two
compacted in a similar manner.
= 2.67, so that amplitudes and two frequencies, are required. An increased frequency
Aggregate Subbase Course will be divided by 150 mm
will be compacted up to 3 layers. does not mean that the compaction speed can be increased. Even
though the impact spacing can be maintained at a higher speed with
However, Department Order 70, Series of 2016 - Adop‘uon of a higher frequency, the compaction result will suffer. There are also
Compacted Thickness of 200 mm in Item 200 - Aggn‘egate Subbase other problems, a high speed during the initial passes will create a
and Item 201 - Aggregate Base Course in Concrete and bow wave that can result in cracks and/or bumps in the surface.
Course
Asphalt Paving Works of National Roads states Lhat “due to {be Consequently, keep the rolling speed in the 3-6 km/h range. An even
advancements in construction technology wherein compaction lower speed may be required for the initial passes.
equipment of higher compactive effort is already avallxble_’ and in
order to optimize time and effort during l'asd‘ consfrucuan, said However, the actual practice of roller speed for asphalt compaction is
provision needs to be revised and modified accordingly. not included in the options. However, the closest is the 4-7 Km/h.
Supposedly we can’t exceed the 6 Km/h maximum speed but since the
“Henceforth, it is hereby prescribed that the maximum compacted code did not specify, thus 4-7 Km/h is reasonable enough as the
thickness per layer for both aggregate subbase and base courses (Item answer. Other than this is considered high speed.
200 and 201 of the Blue Book, respectively) shall now be 200 mm, to
10. B. Primary Rolling. A study from Royal Institute of Technology,
be spread and compacted in one layer using vibratory rollgr equipm F‘nt
with at least ten (10) metric tons capacity, until the required field (1{1' { Department of Transportation Science, Sweden and also a standard
situ) density of at least 100% of the prescribed maximum firy density practice in asphalt construction stated that the three phases of rolling
is attained. Other provisions of said Items of Work remain the same | operations in asphalt pavement are: a) Breakdown Rolling, b)
and shall be strictly followed. Test requirement on these items shall Intermediate Rolling, and c) Finish or Final Rolling. Thus, among the
be based on the approved revised Minimum Testing Requirements choices, primary rolling is not one of the phases of rolling.
(MTR).”
Breakdown Rolling generally induces the most density gain of any
Thus, for 400 mm thick aggregate base course, the layers will be! roller in the sequence. Breakdown rollers can be of any type but are
400mm/200mm = 2 Layers only. most often vibratory steel wheel and sometimes pneumatic tire. These
are’

A. 4-7 Km/h. Subsection 307.3.2.4 Rollers states that ‘it shall be a. Vibratory Steel Wheel Roller (Mostly)
operated at speeds slow enough to avoid displacement of the b. Rubber Tired Roller (Sometimes / Tender mixes)
bituminous mixture. The number and weight of ra]{arfi SI?HII_ b?\ c. Static Steel Wheel Roller (Rarely)
sufficient to compact the mixture to the required density while it 18 d. Three Wheel Roller (not desired)
Page 216 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 217

As a general rule, every inch additional to slump decreases the

Intermediate rolling - Provides additional compaction using Rubber strength. Additional fine aggregates will also require additional
Tired Roller (Kneading action) and Vibratory Steel thcl»Rolle!‘. amount of paste to cover the aggregates.
While, Finish rolling offers a smooth mat surface using Static Steel
Wheel Roller )
11. B. As per Department Order No. 98, Series of 2016 — Revisec!
Guidelines on the Accreditation of Contractors’ and Consultagts
Materials Engineer, here are the project limits of Accredited Materials
Engineers:

Classification Limits of Assignment Collapse Shear True slump

Materials Engineer I One (1) project costing not Types of slump
more than P150M, or
Two (2) projects, with an Collapse Slump | Shear Slump True Slump
aggregate cost of not more In a collapse slump | In a shear slump the | In a true slump the
than P250M, or the concrete collapses | top portion of the |concrete simply sub-
Three (3) projects, with an completely concrete shears off | sides, keeping more
aggregate cost of not more and slips sideways. or less to shape.
than P200M.
Materials Engineer I1 One (1) project, no cost limit, 13. B. Sampling. Department Order No. 13, Series 1987 that was further
or amended by D.O. 213, Series of 2003, stated that only materials
Two (2) projects, with an conforming to the specification requirements should be allowed to be
aggregate cost of not more used in DPWH projects. In no case should any construction material
than P300M, or be used without prior tests while those that failed to meet any of the
Three (3) projects, with an requirements of the DPWH Standard Specifications should be
aggregate cost of not more rejected. However, there are samples that were being rejected, not
L than P250M. because those were bad quality materials, but sometimes due to
Thus, Materials Engineer I — Two (2) projects with an aggregate cost incorrect method of sampling. That is how important sampling really
of not more than P200M, is incorrect. is.

12. D. False Slump. The slumped concrete takes various shapes and As stated and discussed in this book, there are proper methods of
according to the profile of slumped concrete, the slump is termed as sampling of materials. ASTM D3665 — 12 (2017) covers the
true slump, shear slump or collapse slump. 1f a shear or collapse determination of random locations (or timing) at which samples of
slump is achieved, a fresh sample should be taken and the test construction materials can be taken. For the exact physical procedures
repeated because it does not represent the real or actual slqmg of t_he for securing the sample such as a description of the sampling tool, the
concrete sample. On the other hand, a collapse slump is an md)cah_on number‘of increments needed for a sample, or the size of the sample,
that the mix is too wet. Thus, the concrete shall be rework or the trial reference should be made to the appropriate standard method.
mix needs also to be repeated.
14. A. %Compaction = Dry Density in the filed / Max Dry Density
The use of true slump is indeed recommended. The slump does qot =1663 /2250 * 100 = 74% Answer
determine the strength of concrete but is made by water-cement ratio.
Page 218 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 219

B. 24 Hours. During the first 24 hours, carefully move the specimens specific conditions of load, time and temperature. This distance is
in the molds to the laboratory or curing / testing locations. Exercise measured in one tenths of a millimeter. Penetration testis used for
care in this operation to avoid damage to the beams. DO NOT throw evaluating consistency of bitumen.
or drop at any time. Upon arrival at the testing site, remove the beams
from the molds and store the specimens in saturated limewater at 15 Penetration grading’s basic assumption is that the less viscous the
to 25 Degrees Celsius (60 to 80°F) until the 7 or 28-day testing date asphalt, the deeper the needle will penetrate. This penetration depth
has arrived. DO NOT subject the specimens to water temperatures is empirically correlated with asphalt binder performance. Therefore,
lower than 15°C (60°F). asphalt binders with high penetration numbers (called “soft”) are used
for cold climates while asphalt binders with low penetration numbers
Inadequate curing of the cylinders may result in low strengths. (called “hard”) are used for warm climates. When the asphalt is hard,
Concrete subjected to poor curing conditions in the first 48 hours may it may take a while to melt it that's why it is very effective in high
never develop its potential strength. temperature area.

16. B. 1/3. The top surface of specimen cylinder should have a planeness 19. A. To retain the structure of material. Now, why are we trying to
of within 0.002 in which should be checked by Feeler gauge and acquire the “undisturbed” samples beneath the surface for our
straight edge. The axis of specimen cylinder with perpendicular to top foundation? As a matter of fact, we are using split-spoon sampler for
surface should have angular difference within 0.5°. The reduction of SPT, and it is very difficult to extract undisturbed sample due to many
33% is expected when the surface is not properly finished, and that relative cases such as using the equipment with minimum error or
the load is not uniform. handling the sample itself while preserving its physical properties
such as moist condition. As simple as possible, once the moisture
17. C. Soil Classification. Based on facts, a sieve analysis (or gradation condition loses, the sample becomes disturbed already; that is why
test) is a procedure used to assess the particle size distribution (also many laboratories use moisture cabinet to keep the sample as what it
called gradation) of a granular material. A sieve analysis can be was acquired.
performed on any type of non-organic or organic granular materials
including sands, crushed rock, clays, granite, feldspars, coal, soil, a Disturbed and undisturbed samples of the subsurface materials must
wide range of manufactured powders, grain and seeds, down to a be obtained for laboratory analyses (and/or tested in the field) to
minimum size depending on the exact method. So basically, we will be determine their engineering properties and verify geophysical and in-
able to know the shapes, sizes, and quantity of the sample since we situ exploration results. Undisturbed samples are obtained where it is
have the different sizes of sieves. We can primarily know the necessary to determine the in-place stiffness and strength,
distribution since we have the computation of each weights depending compressibility (settlement), natural moisture content, unit weight,
on every size. The question is looking for the incorrect information on permeability, discontinuities, fractures, and fissures of subsurface
sieving process. Soil classification can also be identified using sieve formations. Even though such samples are designated as
analysis, however, a combination of testing of Atterberg’s limit and "undisturbed," in reality they are disturbed to varying degrees. The
sieving are needed to be able to properly identify the property of a degree of disturbance depends on the type of subsurface materials,
material especially if it is plastic (clayey) or non-plastic (sandy) type and condition of the sampling equipment used, the skill of the
material. Further, clayey materials usually go beyond the No. 200 drillers, and the storage and transportation methods used.
sieve size (colloids and smaller), thus, sieving of clay is not possible.
Option “D” is almost the correct answer since it mentions the relative
18. B. Hot climate. We use the lower penetration grade or hard asphalts strength of the soil strata, however, it must be noted that an
during a hot climatic condition. undisturbed sample does not undergo compression test (depends if it
is rock or clay) easily because there are other tests such as
Penetration value is the vertical distance traversed or penetrated by consolidation test which is beneficial to know than compression
the point of a standard needle into the bituminous material under testing only.
Page 220 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
Page 221
20. C. At optim: moisture content. For efficient compaction, the 21. C. 6 inches (160 mm). Normally the temperature of the completed
embankment materials should at the time of rolling be at optimum asphalt concrete mixture is taken in the truck. The inspector
should
moisture content (OMC) because it optimizes the water at maximum always let the truck drivers know what he is doing
so the truck
dry density (MDD). That is the reason why in Field Density Testing, remains stationary during mix inspections. The best way
to determine
we need to identify the OMC because it is that state that MDD is at the temperature of the asphalt mix is with a dial and armore
d — stem
highest. The graph of Moisture content vs the Dry Density will explain _thermometer, The stem should be inserted sufficiently deep at
least 6
the process of optimizing the compaction effort: 1l?ches or 150 mm, into the mixture, and the material should
be in
dn‘ecf contact with the stem. In the figure below, we can see the
location of where the stem-thermometer is being used to identif
y the
temperature of the mix.

(Getting the Temperature of the asphalt mix)

WMoiuwe comers)

We can notice that four samples have been tested using AASHTO T
180. When placing soils as fill materials, it is important to achieve
suitable compaction, primarily in order to reduce the susceptibility of
a soil to settlement. The ability to attain acceptable levels of
compaction is reliant on the moisture content of the soil being placed
along with the compactive effort achievable from the plant used. In
order to monitor compaction of soils placed on site, in-situ density
testing is frequently undertaken. Results of this in-situ testing are 22. D. T mperature Delivery. A good asphalt concrete pavement
compared to theoretical maxima derived in the laboratory on samples requires more than asphalt, aggregates and equipment.
It also
of the material being placed. Sub-samples of a material are compacted requires knowledge, skill, and workmanship. Part of this
knowledge
into a mold using a specified compactive effort provided by one of a and skill is the ability to blend aggregates to meet a specifie
d target,
2.5kg (light) rammer, a 4.5kg (heavy) rammer or a vibrating hammer. know‘n_ as the jgb-mix formula. Asphalt concrete
requires the
combining of two or more aggregates, having different
gradations, to
The dry density is calculated for each moisture content and plotted produce an aggregate blend that meets gradation specifi
cations for a
against this moisture allowing a curve to be drawn through the particular asphalt mix.
resultant points. The peak of this curve provides the theoretical
maximum dry density and the optimum moisture content at which to In its .simplest form, a job-mix formula consists of two parts:
a.) The
place the soil to obtain this density. Combined Gradation of the aggregates to be used in the production
of
the asphalt concrete mixture. b.) The Asphalt Content
necessary to
In road construction, it is important to conduct FDT on the field and produce a satisfactory mix meeting all the specification
requirements.
using the OMC before concrete pouring because in that state, we can Mathgmatical procedures are available to determine
an optimum
be sure that the compaction has reached the required degree of combination of aggregates, but the “Trial and Error Method”
guided
compaction. by a certain amount of reasoning is the most practical
procedure to
Page 222 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed
Page 223
determine a satisfactory combination and the one we will on the quantity of the sample to be incorporated. Say, a source has
demonstrate. been identified, it is not immediately the materials to be used because
tests must be done to know if the source needs to be blended with clay
From the question, part of the job-mix formula is the gx:admg of or be added with binders such coarse-grained materials.
aggregates since it will be the independent amount tbgt will be the
basis of asphalt cement content. The mixing workability of as];h}alt Once the materials passed the required grading and plasticity, quality
concrete is dependent on the temperature of the mix, cbus,. mixing control procedures will be repeated for every identified quantity. As
time is very critical. On the other hand, since the question is about such, sampling and testing will be conducted repeatedly as the project
job-mix formula where we are still looking for the correct am_ount r_Jf progresses. It is not a one-time testing.
asphalt for a given aggregate, option D, temperature of the delwexvfly is
not included in job-mix formula because it is already pre-determined A. Consistency. the penetration test is an empirical test used to
specially noted on the DPWH Standard Specifications, Items 30,7 to measure the consistency of asphalt cement. Generally, the penetration
310. Further, depending on the design, the temperature of the mix is of a bituminous substance may be defined as distance in hundredths
being monitored as frequently as possible. to which a standard needle penetrates the material under known
conditions of time, loading and temperature. This testis used for
23. C. Perform the quarterin, e. When a large sample is being evaluating the consistency
of asphalt material before and after heating.
reduced, we usually use the mechanical splitter to take sx_naller
samples. However, in the event that splitter is not available, Penetration test is a commonly adopted test on asphalt to grade the material in
quartering is being used to split and reduce the sample. terms of its hardness. An 80/100 grade bitumen indicates that its
penetration value lies between 80 & 100.Grading of asphalt helps to
assess its suitability in different climatic conditions and types of
construction. In the Philippines, due to our tropical climate, we are
using MC 60/70 asphalt cement.
Grains mixed Cone flattened
for quartering First division

Rapid curing (RC) Modiur curing (MC) l Stow curing (S6)__|

Distilato usod Naphtha | Korosana | Diowol
or oi
—g Unos Tack coat and surtaca | Primocoatand readymado | Dust palliative and donso 1|
S P > @‘A:“ L —
. | drossing | pothola patching mix gradod bituminous mixou
Vicoully gradan | RC-70
homogenized RC-260
Dpposite quarters for mixing| sample | RC-800
| Ac-3000
Repeat operation up to get the right weight |
In the figure above, the Medium Curing (MC) used Kerosene as
In the figure above, one huge sample of grains or materi‘al.~ ‘was Distillate and is being used for prime coat, and ready-made pothole
stockpiled. It was then flattened and divided in two ) dxvxslons, patching mix.
forming into four (4) divided samples. We are going to pick the 2
opposite material and reject the other two. Thus, we can get the In the next figure from IS: 217-2009, the kinematic viscosity of the
reduced and homogenized sample. given options starts from 30 to 800. The kinematic viscosity
characterizes flow behavior. The method is used to determine the
24. B. As the construction work progresses. The right time to start the consistency of bitumen as one element in establishing the uniformity
sampling and testing of aggregate base course material is depending of shipments or sources of supply. The specifications are usually at
Page 224 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 225

temperatures of 60 and 135°C as per ASTM D2170, Standard Test Course is 50 mm while the Item 201 allows maximum size of 50 mm
Method for Kinematic Viscosity of asphalts (bitumen). and 37.5 mm for Gradings A, and B, respectively.

Therefore, the thinnest and most fluid of MC Cutback asphalt is the Thus, we can tell that Item 201 contains less binder (PI is 6) and has
higher number of MC. - smaller grading requirements than Item 200. It contains binder such
as clay and coarse aggregates that is why it does not ONLY contain of
R R ( moso [ Tmc7o | Mczs0 | mMca00
sand and gravel, or sand and fine-grained soils.
Kinematic viscosily at
60 C. contistokuss 30-60 70-140 1 250-600 | 800- 1600
Flash point, Pensky Martens, *C_ minimum a8 38 ; 665 | 65 &
28. A. Index of Retained Strength (IRS) = Wet Stability/Dry Stability x
Rosic by volume, minimum 50 | 55 | 67 |
Viscosty
of dwiilaton resdus
at 60 °C_pomon | 300-1200 | 300-1200 | 300-1200 | 300-1200 100
IRS =82/100 * Dry Stability * 2.243 = Wet Stability
=0.82 * 3100 * = 2542 lbs.
27. A. We can differentiate the Item 200 - Subbase Course and Item 201
— Subbase Course using a table. C. The acceptance of concrete pavement in the Philippines is based on
the passing of required flexural testing throughout the construction of
Table of Difference of Items 200 and 201 the project. Once the project has been 100% completed (at least 90%),
[ ITEM 200 ITEM 201 the contactor may send a formal letter to the implementing office that
| Abrasion loss 50% max 50% max they intend to take a final inspection for acceptance. The one-year
Plastic index 12% max 6% max warranty period will also commence after this inspection. During the
Liquid limit 356% max 256% max final inspection, coring will be conducted to determine the required
Permitted variation from thickness of pavement. In the event that the concrete sample
design THICKNESS +20mm +10mm representing the concrete laid or poured failed to pass the flexural
OF LAYER test, coring will also be conducted.
Permitted variation from
design LEVEL OF +10mm, -20mm -5mm, -10mm
C.
20-24°C. When molds are removed from a concrete cylinder or beam
SURFACE
sample, the next stage is curing (ASTM C 31, “Standard Practice for
Permitted surface
irregularity 20mm Smm Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field”). The
measured by 3-m advantage of an ASTM standard is that when the procedures are
straight edge properly followed, the results will be consistent. Even if you don't like
Permitted variation from the results, at least it will be almost the same for all cylinders made
design cross fall or +0.3% +0.2% with that concrete. The cylinders are immediately placed where they
camber are going to stay until the concrete sets. During this phase, what C 31
Permitted variation from calls initial curing, the cylinders can stay in this location for up to 48
design longitudinal 5% £0.1% hours but must be kept at a temperature between 60° and 80° F (15.5
grade over 25m — 26.67 Degrees Celsius) and in a moist environment.
length -
California Bearing Ratio 30% min 80% min
The cylinders can be transported to the test lab no sooner than “eight
hours after final set.” They should be padded, not allowed to freeze,
Based from the Table above, we can easily differentiate that Item 201 and kept moist during transport, which cannot take longer
is better that Item 200 in general. Let's take a look at Plastnc‘ Index, than four
hours. When the cylinders arrive at the lab, the molds are removed,
the Item 200 has a high value compare to the Item 201, mea_r?mg.the
and the cylinders are stored submerged in a water tank or in a room
item 200 has a high plasticity. From DPWH Standard Specifications with 100% humidity—final curing. The temperature has to be kept at
Table 200.1, the maximum size of aggregate allowed for Subbase 73+£3° F ((21 — 24.44 Degrees Celsius)). It must be noted that we
Page 226 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol.
1.1 - 2 Ed Page 227

mentioned 15.5 to 26.67 degrees temperature of curing, that is for tolerable numbers, however, cement brands with more setting time
concrete sample that is going to be stored in a certain location othe; (both initial and final) show lower strength. Relationships
between
than curing tank. It is further explained that the tcmperature}(‘) the setting time and compressive strength of mortar are
proposed and
curing tank after 24 hours must be 21 to 24 de_grees. Ba‘sed on the can be used to predict the compressive strength of cement from
the
question and the available options, we are choosing 20 to 24 Degrees data of setting time.
Celsius.
Therefore, it is essential to test the cement before use. By observin
g
31. C. 6%. Undersized reinforcing steel bars that satisfy ;he tensile a?d the strength gaining rate, one can decide the line of action for
further
elongation requirements may be accepted proyldgd thatv ltsi construction work.
underweight does not exceed 6%. Under the Philippine Flftw“na
Standards (PNS) 49:2002, Subsections 6.2.3, 6.2.3, and 6.25, ‘the B. Hot Weather. A retarder is a chemical agent that slows down
a
tolerance on the mass of one piece of steel bar shall be +6 mm. «and chemical reaction. For example, retardersare used to
slow the
“the tolerance on the mass of one lot of steel bars shall be #4 mm”. chemical hardening of plastic materials such as wallboard,
concrete,
and adhesives. Cement setting times can be adjusted with retarders
.
32. A. 2 Layers. According to ASTM C 31, Making & Cu?in‘g Concr?te Cement retarders control the time when a slurry will set hard, keeping
Specimens in the Field states when rodding beams, f)ll in 2 layers for the slurry viscous and pumpable in expected wellbore temperat
ures
beam widths 6 — 8 inches (rod once for every 2 sq. in. of top surface and for the amount of time required to place the slurry.
area of beam). For more than 3 layers, fill in 3 or more equal layers, Retarding plasticizing admixtures not only delaying the setting
of the
but not to exceed 6" depth (rod once for every 2 sq. in. of top surface cement but are also efficient plasticizing water-reducers.
area of beam).
In the past years, concrete is poured in the evening because
it is the
When vibrating beams, fill in 1 layer for beam widths 6 — 8 inches, 2 perfect time where drying of concrete is not abrupt
or fast. Now,
or more layers for widths greater than 8 inches. Insert vibrator concrete is poured on a laid base course even though the project
site is
uniformly until the surface of the concrete has become relatively far from the concrete batching plant or the project is in a hot
climate
smooth and large air bubbles cease to break through the top surface area. The minimum 90-minute mixing time of concrete
before pouring
can be extended to a designed length of time. There are so many
33. D. 2.376. As per AASHTO T166 — 05, here is the solution. categories of retarders depending on the ambient temper
ature of the
Given: Asphalt content of bituminous mix =5.5% area. Generally, it is being used in a hot weather because it
prolongs
Weight of specimen in air =1200 ¢ the fluidity or workability retention of concrete by delaying the
setting
Weight of specimen in water = 700_g time and increase initial workability.
Weight of specimen in SSD =1205¢
36. C. Reject the concrete mixture. The slump does not determi
ne the
Bulk SG=A/(B-C) strength of concrete but is made by water-cement ratio.
As a general
rule, every inch additional to slump decreases the strength. Additio
nal
A = Weight in grams of the specimens in AIR fine aggregates will also require additional amount of
paste to cover
B = Weight in grams, Surface Dry the aggregates. Choice D states that diverting the deliver
ed concrete
C = Weight in grams, in Water to the prepared retaining wall forms, however, retaining walls
shall
SG =1200 g/ (1205 — 700) = 2.376 (Answer) use Class A concrete with slump 2 to 4 inches. Thus, one of
the best
choices is the addition of Portland Cement only, although
the strength
34. A. Different Strength. The result of using different brands of cement will not be controlled.
in concrete paving could result to different concrete strengths. There
are so many research conducted for the past' 30 years to Yer‘ify its If you reject a load, it will take some time before another
one arrives
differences. Though it is noted that the variations are within the to your jobsite and in the meantime, you are paying for
nonproductive
Page 228 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1
- 2" Ed Page 229

labor. If you are on a commercial or public project whe_re samples a}:e another option is to spread the load low, placing concret
e with the
tested for strength and other characteristics by a testing ce_anter. the proper slump on top of it. This can work if the concret
e still has
choice might be very easy—others will reject the load. But if yn;x firs structural integrity.
on a residential project where no one will know, whalt do you do? Aph
if you are a decorative concrete contractor, how will concrete wit Your decision about whether to accept or reject concrete will also
excessive slump affect your work? depend on just how wet the mix is. Many specifications permit
slump
variances of 1 inch. If the slump exceeds 1% inches from
what was
When there is too much water in the concrete, there is greater ordered, reject it.
shrinkage with the possibility for more cracks ) z?nd r_educedf
compressive strength. As a general rule, every a_d(imonal inch 10 37. D. Test of Concrete Pipe Samples. As mentioned in this book,
slump decreases strength by approximately 500 psi. bu.' for examp e, “Minimum sample for testing” and the Minimum Testing
if you ordered 5-inch slump concrete and received 7‘/: lpches, a mix Requirement for Reinforced Concrete Pipes, the minimum of testing
designed to be 4000 psi would end up being 2500 psi. Th:g represegts shall be one (1) sample, 1 meter in length, for every 50 pes of pipes, or
a serious loss in strength, especially if you were placmg exterior 2% of the total number of pipes. This is the first criteria. However
, as
concrete in a freeze/thaw climate where the standard requirement is per Item 500, there are other limitations such as 1-set of 3 concrete
4000 psi for proper durability. cylinder samples for not more than 25 pipes cast in the
field, and 1-
inspection report for each size for more than 25 pipes cast
in the field;
Excessive slump also can result from accidentally addngg too _much including the mortar materials as stated in Item 405.
water-reducing admixtures or super-plasticizers to a mix. This can
result in aggregate segregation and a serious loss oft strength. Ther; These tests were mentioned in the options, and that would
be very
is no question about rejecting this concrete. But if the overduseu confusing because there is no option about “All of the above”.
However,
admixture isn't high enough to cause segregation, the concrete wil the analysis is to think what test is the most efficient in
terms of the
eventually set and achieve a higher than expected compressive concrete pipe. And that is testing the concrete pipe itself.
strength.
38. B. 24 Hours. As per ASTM C31, “Standard Practice for Making
and
Your first impulse is probably to place the concrete anyw:a\y, Th_xs Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field”, Remove the
specimens
option gets the best productivity from labor and doesn't stra}x]n from the mold at the end of 24 + 4 hours and store in a moist condition
relations with your ready-mix producer. The risk, hov\fe_ver, is that the at 60°F to 80°F with free water maintained on all surfaces
of the
work is compromised, and the resulting lower durability might force cylinder until time of shipment for testing. Do not expose
specimens
you to remove and replace at some point in the future. to dripping or running water.

Another solution is to send the load back to the plant and_ add more 39. B. 2 layers over the idth of 4.5 m. Department Order 70, Series
Portland cement to “dry it up.” Sometimes more aggregate is added as of 2016 - Adoption of Compacted Thickness of 200 mm in Item 200
-
well. But there is unpredictable chemistry between concrete Fhat is Aggregate Subbase Course and Item 201 - Aggregate Base
Course in
starting to hydrate and newly added material. One outcome is tl?lat Concrete and Asphalt Paving Works of National Roads states
that
the concrete passes through the initial set phase very quickly, ‘due to the advancements in construction technology
wherein
reducing the time you have to complete your wor}(. If you are stamp{ng compaction equipment of higher compactive effort is alread)
ly available
patterns in concrete, you may not be able to finish your decorative and in order to optimize time and effort during road construc
tion, said
applications. provision needs to be revised and modified accordingly.”
Thus, the
125-mm Subbase will be compacted and the remaining 175mm
will be
If one load of concrete is too wet in a sequence. of loadsj you should compacted also up to its 100% designed degree of compaction.
On the
reject that load because the result will be sigmf)cantly different from other hand, compaction on the base and base course shall
extend 0.5m
the others. If there is more than one load involved in a placement,
Page 230 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 —2nd
— 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examinat
ion Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™
Ed Page 231
on both sides (1/2 width of the roller), that is why the 3._521_onee"1:;1: mixture of sand and asphalt emulsion to fillthe crack. Cracks
carriageway will be added by 1.0 meter for the shoulder = 4.5 m s and joints 1/4" or greater shou
ld be cleaned of any incompressible
material including old sealant.
40. B. At least 3 Cores, DPWH Standard Specification V?lumere'.zé
Subsection 311.3.20 Acceptance of concrete _statgs thatb cor};:ctEd On the other hand, by examining
the options we can also notice that
deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria manyf e rerests asphalt is dependent on the temperat
ure of the mix. When in normal
unless the Contractor can provide evidence, by means o cm‘euh:s is, temperature in the Philippines,
asphalt cement is hard. Furtherm
that the quality of concrete ;epre?;ned bye:::teisetce:fie:e:han e cutback asphalt is simply a comb ore,
ination of asphalt cement and
e in place. At least three (3) repres 0 : petroleum solvent. Like emulsion
s, cutbacks are used because
?:liee]:ll?::m eacl; member or area of concrete in Place that 1sEcon_sxd§:esi reduce asphalt viscosity for lower they
temperature uses (tack coats, fog
deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by the' n:gm: g seals, slurry seals, stab ilization material).
that there will be at least impairment of strength gf the str ;c \::re .Wlth
obtaining and testing of drilled cores shall be in accordan 44, D. ASTM C150 requires that the 28-d
ay strength of mortar made from
AASHTO T 24" Type I Portland cement be at least 27.6
MPa. Three specimens were
tested: two passed but one failed by
more than 20%. What will be the
41. D. All of the above. The California Bearing Ratio test is a t,esttmes(l;xltl conclusion?
for the evaluation of subgrade strength of roads and parelx)nent:.r of
sample was subjected to the following procedures(at the lal l(_)rati Z o‘f DPWH Standard Specifications
Vol 2, Subsection 311.3.20 Acce
compaction at its optimum moisture content: b.) app! 1(31: 01 o of Concrete states that the ptance
strength level will be cons
surcharge (to the sample) to represent the estimated tl-n; neg:nd satisfactory if the averages of idered
all sets of three consecutive stre
pavement over the subgrade c.) soaking the sample for foPr ays»Thi‘E test results equal or exceed the ngth
specified strength f. and no indi
then d.) forcing a plunger into the sample to a depth ,Of l.scn‘]m;;-.eam strength test result is deficien vidual
t by more than 15% of the spec
test is called California Bearing Ratio}(}C?R} ’I;lest. ’I(;hls :sznel:ts e strength f.. Thus, the Material ified
s Engineer shall conclude that
i
for the evaluation of subgrade strength o roa s and pa’; " cement does not pass the spec the
ifications since it failed to give
results obtained by these tests are used w!th the empmc}al curv?;hti: consistent results, the
determine the thickness of pavement and its component aykers.nt #
test is conducted to know the bearing capaég}éqf the emb;r‘;e}r:;e!]d{ng On the other hand, the contract
or can appeal that the concrete
ust be noted that for road construction,
i i s require strength may pass the required by
means of core tests. The concrete
:;n the type of embankment: 4% for subgrade, 30% for Subbase, and in the area represented by the core will be consider
80% for Base Course. average strength of the cores is ed adequate if the
equal to at least 85% of, and if
core is less than no single
75% of, the specified strength f.
Swell test is also conducted to verify the gwell poteptialdzf; tg:
embankment. Further, permeability of water is not permitte If the strength ofcontrol specimens does not meet
underlying base courses to minimize the future defects. the subsection, and it is not the requirements of
feasible or advisable to obtain cores from
the struc ture due to structural cons
iderations, payment
42, B. Temperature of mix. The workability of a bituminous mixt hxa concrete will be made at an of the
» . . adjusted price:
dependent on the temperature of the mix. The hotter the mix, the
more workable mold/lay with its maximum laying temperature. Deficiency in Strength of Percent of Contract —[
Concrete Specimens, %
43. A Joint Filler. By definition, catalytic agenlt is t;\e at;CEIeran\??sj?ife: Price Allowed
Less than 5 |
i
chemical reaction by y the action
i of a ca talyst. Further,
1 em 100
5 to less than 10 | 80
asphalt is a mixture of asphalt cement and water and is usuatllyiulseog 10 to less than 15
in joint fillers. This is typically using a rubberized tar materia | 70
Page 232 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 —
2 Ed Page 233
15 to less than 20 60 allow slip form pavers to produce very smooth riding
surfaces (IRI on
20 to less than 30 50 the order of 0.90 m/km or less).
25 or more 0
(This table is under Subsection 311.3.20) D. All of the above. The “subgrade” is the insitu
material upon which
the pavement structure is placed. Although there is a
tendency to look
45. B. 650 psi. DPWH Standard Specification, Volume 2, Subsection at pavement performance in terms of pavement struct
ure and mix
311.2.12 states that ‘¢he Engineer shall determine from laboratory design alone, the subgrade can often be the overri
ding factor in
tests of the materials to be used, the cement content and tbble pavement performance,
proportions of aggregate and water that will pzjvduce _Worké; e
concrete having a slump of between 40 and 75 mm if not vibrated or Subgrade materials are typically characterized by (1) their
resistance
between 10 and 40 mm if vibrated, and a flexural strength of not less to deformation under load, in other words, their stiffness
or (2) their
than 3.8 MPa when tested by the third-point method or 4‘.5 MPa when bearing capacity, in other words, their strength. In
general, the more
tested by the mid-point method at fourteen (14) days in 'amordanc[e; resistant to deformation a subgrade is, the more
load it can support
with AASHTO T 97 and T 177, respectively: or a compressive stz'engt_ before reaching a critical deformation value. Typically, it is the
of 24.1 MPa for cores taken at fourteen (14) days and tested in compaction of top layer in cuts, or whole depth of material in
accordance with AASHTO T'24.” embankments, and more often, it is the identification
and treatment
of unsuitable material.
46. B. Materials Logbook should be maintained and ].(ept up@ated by tl_-ne
materials engineer during project implementat\pn. It is statedl‘m A. 85-100. DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 903.2.2
Ministry Order No. 80, series of 1978, Accomplishment of Quality specifies that penetration grade of asphaltic material
appropriate for
Control Logbook. sealing of PCCP joints is 85-100.

47. B. Core Test. DPWH Standard Specification Volume 2, Subsection 51. . Conduct st for strength determination on section represented
311.3.20 Acceptance of concrete states that “concret_e deemed to be ?k?t the failed samples to determine ual strength of the in-placed
acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected unless he concrete. When a set of three (3) beam samples representing a
Contractor can provide evidence, by means of core tests, thatl the particular section of a concrete pavement failed to meet
the flexural
quality of concrete represented by failed test results is acceptable in strength requirement, it is the right of the Contractor take
it further
place. by conducting of core test. As a Materials Engineer of
the Contractor,
it is part of the job to minimize loses.
48. C. Almost Zero. Slip-form paving is defined as a process used to
consolidate, form into geometric shape and surface finish a cqncrefie DPWH Standard Specification Volume 2, Subsection 3811.3.20
mass by pulling the forms continuously through and surrounding the Acceptance of concrete states that “concrete
deemed to be not
plastic concrete mass. Low-slump concrete (on the order of 0 — 75 mm acceptable using the above criteria may be
rejected unless the
(0 - 3 inches)) is necessary =o that the fresh concrete is able to hc‘>ld 1;5 Contractor can provide evidence, by means of
core tests, that the
shape once the slip form paver has passed. Low slumpvconcrete can el quality of concrete represented by failed test results
is acceptable in
made with less water and usually has highe? compression and flexu:;xla place.
strengths than comparable high slump mixes. Large jobs ggne;a y
require high production rates in order to be profitable. Sl(;p :‘o/x}‘]m 52. D. At no less than 5 meters intervals parallel to
the centerline in each
paving production rates are typically in the range of 65_7 108 xtn r. direction from the affected location.
(85 — 131 yd¥hr.) for mainline paving. That translates u‘no be we(et(;
70 — 90 m/hr. (230 — 300 ft./hr.) of 3.66 m (12 ft.) wide, 250 mm ll DPWH Standard Specification Volume 2, Subsection 311.3.22.2
inch) thick PCC surface course. Automation and computer control Tolerance in Pavement Thickness states that when the
measurement
of any core is less than the specified thickness
by more than 26 mm,
Page 234 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Refer
ence Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Page 235
the actual thickness of the pavement in this area will be determined composed of one part of Portland Cement and two parts of fine
by taking additional cores at no less than 5 m intervals parallel to the aggregate by volume and sufficient water to make
the mortar of such
center line in each direction from the affected location until a core is consistency that it can be handled easily
and spread with a trowel.
found in each direction, which is not deficient in thickness by more Mortar shall be mixed only in those quantities requi
than 25 mm. The area of slab for which no payment will be made shall red for immediate’
use. Unless an approved mortar mixing machi
be the product of the paving width multiplied by the distance along ne is used, the fine
aglgregate and cement shall be mixed dry
the center line of the road between transverse sections found not in a tight box until the
deficient in thickness by more than 256 mm. The thickness of the mlxtu}fe. assumes a uniform color, after which, water
shall be added as
remainder of the segment to be used to get the average thickness of the mixing continues until the mortar attains the
proper consistency.
each lot shall be determined by taking the average thickness of Mortar that is not used within 90 minutes after the
water has been
additional cores which are not deficient by more than 25 mm. added shall be discarded. Re-tempering of mortar will not be
permitted.
53. D. Asphalt Cement. Penetration Grade Bitumen is a standard
bitumen usually used as a Paving Grade Bitumen essential for road
and for the production of asphalt pavements with D. f‘Bc& According to the Minimum Testing Requi
construction rement for Item 500
superior properties, and it's very important once it bounds the — Pipe Culverts, for every 50 pieces of pipes,
test for strength,
aggregates and creates a unique cohesion and stability to the 'absorption and dimension shall be done. An altern
ative to these tests‘
bituminous mix. It is the vertical distance traversed or penetrated by xs‘ 1-set consisting of 3 concrete cylinder sample
material under s for not more than 25
the point of a standard needle into the bituminous pipes cast in the field, and 1-Inspection Report
specific conditions of load, time and temperature. This distance is for each size for not
more than 25 pipes cast in the field. Thus, there
measured in one tenths of a millimeter. should be 300/50 = 6
pes of pipes to be tested for strength, absorption,
and dimension.
Penetration test is used
for evaluating 56. D. All of the above. The aim of the test is to establish the
maximum
consistency of bitumen. dry density that may be attained for a given
soil with a standard
It is not regarded as amount of compactive effort. When a series
of samples of a soil are
suitable for wuse in compacted at different water content the plot
connection with the usually shows a distinct
peak. The idea is this:
testing of road tar )
because of the high Maximum drv density
surface tension exhibited poory e 100% compaction
APTER
S SECONDS,
by these materials.

Dry density kN/m® —»

Penetration value on bitumen is a measure of hardness or consistency
of bituminous material. An 80/100 grade bitumen indicates that its
penetration value lies between 80 & 100. Therefore, the testing is on
a raw material before mixing with other materials. Therefore, this test
is for asphalt cement.
Optimum moisture content

54. A. DPWH Standard Specification, Volume 2, Subsection 506.2.2

Mortar (Stone Masonry) states that mortar for the masonry shall be e Dry side ———pte—— wet side ——»|
Moisture content %
Page 236 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 —
2% Ed Page 237
a. Samples representing a certain embankment material will be tested })een. removed) and so the compactive effort is in
effect applying undrained
in the laboratory to identify different optimum moisture content oading and so the void volume does not decrease; as the water content
(OMO) and attaining the maximum dry density (MDD) using this mcreasfes the compacted density achieved will
decrease, with the air content
curve: remaining almost constant.

The black dots on the curve are the series of tests conducted to be P4 ey o
able to plot the curve.

b. Once the OMC and MDD are identified in the laboratory, it will then
be simulated in the actual construction. The laid embankment
material will be compacted at the moisture content previously
identified as the OMC. By doing this, we will be able to compact the
embankment at its maximum dry density.

To discuss the compaction on the field, it is a process that brings about

an increase in soil density or unit weight, accompanied by a decrease in air Wort
volume. There is usually no change in water content. The degree of Effect of soil type:
compaction is measured by dry unit weight and depends on the water ¢ Well-graded granular soils can be compacted to higher
densities
content and compactive effort (weight of hammer, number of impacts, than uniform or silty soils.
weight of roller, number of passes). Clays of high plasticity may have water contents
over 30% and
achxe.ve similar densities (and therefore strengths) to those of lower
For a given compactive effort, the maximum dry unit weight occurs at plasticity with water contents below 20%.
an optimum water content. The higher the dry density, the stronger and less As the % of fines and the plasticity of a soil increases,
the compaction
compressible the soil will be. The Proctor compaction test is a laboratory curve becomes flatter and therefore less sensitive to moisture
method of experimentally determining the optimal moisture content at content. Equally, the maximum dry density will be relatively low.
which a given soil type will become most dense and achieve its maximum
dry density.
P4
40 sivvoids
el
For clays, recently excavated and generally saturated lumps of clayey soil ‘graded

have a relatively high undrained shear strength at low water contents and
are difficult to compact. As water content increases, the lumps weaken and
soften and maybe compacted more easily. For coarse soils, the material is
clay:low
unsaturated and derives strength from suction in pore water which collects Iplasticit
at grain contacts. As the water content increases, air void decreases, and gl
///-\
hence effective stresses decrease. The soil weakens and is therefore more
uniform sand
easily compacted. For both coarse and clay soils, at relatively high-water W
contents, the compacted soil is nearly saturated (nearly all of the air has The degree of compaction achievable on site depend
s mainly on:
Page 238 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination
Reference Vol. 1.1. — 2" Ed
P; age 239
Compactive effort: type of Equipment + Number of passes
Load
Water content: can be increased if dry, but vice-versa
Type of soil: higher densities with well-graded soils; fine soils have
higher water contents

Therefore, based from this discussion and the above-mentioned graph, we

can conclude that a.) Granular, well-graded soils generally have fairly high
maximum densities at low optimum moisture content (OMC); b.) Clay soils
have lower densities at OMC than granular, well-graded soils; and c)
Granular, well-graded soils have higher densities than uniform soils (Sand)
at OMC. So, it must be all of the above.

57. C.The Plasticity Index is 60

DPWH Standard Specification Volume 2 (Blue Book), Subsection
104.2 Materials Requirement of Embankment, Paragraph number 2
states that Unsuitable Material — Material other than suitable
materials such as! Flexible Pavement Design Proc
edure:

a) Materials containing detrimental quantities of organic materials, Sakulation of total thickness (T):
such as grass, roots and sewerage. lo:ldni;l}:; ChTfl below, fo_r a givgn
CBR value of soil subgrade and whee
select appropriate thick curve valu l
e of “combined thickness of
b) Organic soils such as peat and muck. surface, base and sub-| ine” whi oy
pavement, base line” which will give the total thickness of
¢) Soils with liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index
exceeding 55.
T L S0EN 80

d) Soils with a natural water content exceeding 100%.

e) Soils with very low natural density, 800 kg/m3 or lower. ol | , | =1 H
) Soils that cannot be properly compacted as determined
Engineer.
by the
= 200
T—
_E‘-ls kN \’ihvlil toad),

58. C. California Bearing Capacity. The test which combines a load-

H 1]
9 soop—t | .
deformation test performed in the laboratory with an empirical design é, ium troffic
82 ¥N Wneel load)—]
chart to determine the thickness pf pavement base and other layers is &
known as “California Bearing Ratio”. Flexible pavement design by
i
€ 400
AP beovy trattic
CBR method is used to determine the total thickness of pavement. 5
(5543 IN wheet teod)

The following data required for flexible pavement design: a) CBR value of ; 500 At
soil subgrade; b) CBR value of sub base course; ¢c) CBR value of base course;
d) Wheel load in Kg or KN. 600¢

7(’04 ] 1
Page 240 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ nd Ed Materials Engineer Examination Refer
ence Vol 1.1 — 2™ Ed
Page 241
ulation of sub base course thickness (tab)* . than 5 mm will be considered as the
specified thickness plus 5 mm
g;lfisi:g the same chart, for a given CBR value of sub base course material and measurement which are Jess than
the specified thickness by more
d fc i S8 of pfivex_nent Wi hich ) is above
heel load, read the thickness b the soil than 25 mm shall not be included in
the average. When the average
:ll:b b:l;: It is denoted as (Tsb), which is highlighted by circle in the below thickness for the lot is deficient,
the contract unit price will be
figure. But since we have to find teb., the thickness of subbase course: adjusted for thickness in accordance with paragrap
h (3 below).
tab =T — Tsb
60. D. Joint filler asphalt. To seal a joint adequ
ately means
must be
provided to exclude water and foreign
matter from the top and bottom
T [S’J surface course and also the ends. Consideration of provi
ding the best possible type of
joint filler material for expansion joints
needs stimulation. Since the
primary purpose of the joint filler is to preve
T . il b KT.s_tz ) base course nt infiltration of foreign
matter when the slabs are contracted and to
support the joint-sealing
compound at the top, the material
should have the greatest possible
i sub hase course resilience combined with the prope
;] tsh) rty of minimum extrusion under
cyclic pressures. The bituminized
fiber joint fillers commonly used
today have excellent non-extruding
properties but possess little
Calculation of base course thickness (tb): ) resil
ience,
Siarilcilar to the above procedure, from the CBR value of base course and wheel
load read the value of thickness of pavement which is above th‘efbase :nl)]ur}s;z DPWH Department Order 91, Series of 2016 or commonly
(). From this we can find out the value of ty= Tu — t. There oref, oL “Proper Application of Asphalt Seal called
values of pavement are known and cross section of pavement is as follows. ant on Transverse Contraction I
Weakened Plane, Construction, and
Longitudinal Joints of Concrete
Pavements” states that “the asphalt
7 sealant to be used shall either be
hot-poured joint filler (Subsection 311.2
.7 Joint Fillers) or blown or
T is
surface course oxidized asph alt (Bitumen R-Grade 1 15/15) and shall
conform to
" - AASHTOM 173 to be applied on all
types of concrete pavement joints
in accordance with Subsection 311.
base course 3.17 (Sealing Joints) of the DPWH
T Te Standard Speci
tb fications for Highways, Bridges and Airpo
rts, Volume
11, 2012 Edition”,
I sub base course 61.
) tsh), C. Flash Point. The flash point is one
measure of the tendency of the
test specimen to form a flammable mixtu
re with air under controlled
laboratory conditions. It is only one
59. C. 28.50 cm. If one of the measurements of a core specimen taker Lfro\: of a number of properties that
should be considered in assessing the
the concrete pavement is 28.7 cm., the corrected measur_efm;nd :i 2 overall flammability hazard of
a material.
used in calculating the average thickness of the pavement if t| I ed ;é 50
thickness is 28.0 cm, is 28.50 cm. In other ‘words, the r_neas;:}ek s .
Flash point is used in shipping
cm pavement will be treated as 28.50 cm since the design thicknes: and safety regulations to define
flammable and combustible materials.
28 cm only. Consult the particular
regulation involved for precise defin
itions of these classifications.
DPWH Standard Specification Volume 2 (Blue Book? Subsecttll;:é
Flash point can indicate the possible
311.3.22.2 Tolerance in Pavement Thickness (Paragraph 2) s_ta;:-svd“a] presence of highly volatile and
flammable material in a relatively
in calculating the average thickness of the'p'avemelr:t, fnblvinwe nonvolatile or nonflammable
material. For example,
an abnormally low flash point
measurements which are in excess of the specified thickness by on a test
specimen of engine oil can indicate gasol
ine contamination.
Page 242 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination
Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2% Ed
Page 243
66.
This test method shall be used to measure and describe the properties
of materials products, or assemblies in response to heat and a test
flame under controlled laboratory conditions and shall not be used to
describe or appraise the fire hazard or fire risk of materials, products,
or assemblies under the actual fire conditions. However, results of
this test method may be used as elements of a fire risk assessment
that takes into account all of the factors that are pertinent to an uset;’;?’;g admixtures, which slow the
assessment of the fire hazard of a particular end use. setting rate of concrete, are
e Hlm;lteract the accelerating effect of hot weather
on concrete
Whichgx.na;(g 'elrnperatures often cause an increased rate
The fire point is one measure of the tendency of the test specimen to workabls dzifigacx]ng and finishing of hardening
difficult. Retarders keep concrete
support combustion. " ‘ing plac
A ement and delay the initial set
retarders also function as wate of ct oncrete.
r reducers and may entrain
62. C. Marshall Stability. We can identify the suitability of a material on some al\i/i'oisnt
the first phase of designing it. In asphalt mix design, we are using
Marshall Stability Test to simulate the actual load on the road. The
Marshall method seeks to select the asphalt binder content at a
desired density that satisfies minimum stability and range of flow 5 ; 3
ez;::::c? g?m;;;e'tte its {lydrauon process ranges from
values. The Marshall stability and flow test provides the performance e 0.22 to 0.25. The
é
addit ional wa
water in the mixture is needed for
prediction measure for the Marshall mix design method. The stability vf:;x;etce;piamtng and fi.mshmg (wor ease of
‘eas
kability of concrete). Reducing the
portion of the test measures the maximum load supported by the test ki t::n 1112 avx_mxcure‘may result in a stiffer mixture,
which
specimen at a loading rate of 50.8 mm/minute. Load is applied to the workability and increases potential
specimen till failure, and the maximum load is designated as stability. placement problems,
o
During the loading, an attached dial gauge measures the specimen’s :hg t:;sq 3&1:; l:vantd, Water-reduci 1
ng admixtures (WRA) usually
plastic flow (deformation) due to the loading. The flow value is i ater content for a concrete mixt reduce
recorded in 0.25 mm (0.01 inch) increments at the same time when the L ure by abou t 5 to 10
. sequently, concrete containing a water-reducing
maximum load is recorded. ure needs less water to reach a
required slump than untreated
63. D. All of the above. Please see Item 56.

64. A. DPWH Standard Specification Volume 2 (Blue Book) Subsection

307.3.10 Acceptance, Sampling, and Testing states “At least one, but
not more than three samples shall be taken for each full day’s
7
operation. If no core samples were taken during the day’s operation, m};ein‘;se:;:f \?/RA is" defm. e_d as
Type A in ASTM C 494.
WRA affects
core samples shall be taken from the completed pavement for every Wme ry (:1 tl;esh upropertxes of concrete
100 L. M. per lane. The contractor shall supply and furnish new by reducing the amount of
used by 5% to 12% while maintain
material to backfill boreholes left by the samples taken.” ing a certain level of

B. Quality Control testing is a DPWH project is the responsibility of

the Contractor's Materials Engineer. There are two types of Quality
Implementer in a construction project. Quality Control is for the Commonly used WRA is lignosulfonates and hydrocarboxylic
contractors, and Quality Assurance is for DPWH Civil Engineers. (HC)'
 Page 244 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol, 1.1 - 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examin
ation Reference Vol, 1.1
-2"Eq
"E 245
compared to the lignosulfonates. Rapid bleeding is a problem for Deficiency in Strength of
concrete treated with HC acids. Concrete Specimeng:, %
Per;;x:: fn(i‘::et;a“
WRA has been used primarily in hot weather concrete placing,
Less than 5 | 100
5 to less than 10 |
pumping, and tremie. Careful concrete placement is required, as the 80
10 to less than 15 | 70
initial setting time of concrete will take place an hour earlier. It is also
15 to less than 20 ]
shown that the use of WRA will give a higher initial concrete | 60
20 to less than 30 |
]
compressive strength (up to 28 days) by 10% compared to the control 50
mixture. Other benefit of using WRA is that higher concrete density 25 r more | 0
is achieved which makes the concrete less permeable and have a (This table is under Subsection 311.
3.20)
higher durability.
Therefore, for this particular question,did not mention since it
67. D. Reprocess the material by blending. Sample of aggregate base anything aboutut the appeal of the contractor,
inadequit,e,
we should consider it
course material when tested for quality passed the requirements
except grading. What will you recommend as a Materials Engineer? 69. D. 80. DPW
Mot Rqu.Standard . :
Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 201.2
When the base course material failed to meet the grading
requirement, the materials shall not be categorized as subbase or base
course unless grading is correct. We are in the process of correcting it.
We cannot reject the material immediately and replace it with the new
and untested one. Thus, it is best to reprocess the grading by blending
with other sizes of aggregates and test it again for acceptance. 70. i k . ixt Cracking of macromole
obtained by three dxfferen@ app cules can be
68. C. DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 311.3.20 roaches: thermal-, catalytic-
s
and hydro-
Acceptance of Concrete states that the strength level will be , also known as pyrolysis, consists of
considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive T in an inert atmosphere,
vx:;cr}:::n};)lecules thermal bon promotin
strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength f and no d scission to a variety of low
e g d ydrocarbons, Ret moleculag
individual strength test result is deficient by more than 15% of the arding admixture: 3, which
Weefl: concrete, are used slow the setting
specified strength f. Thus, the Materials Engineer shall conclude that t_o counteract the accelerat
1,—.; erdon concrete sett ing effect of hot
the concrete did not pass the specifications since it failed to reach the gng. High temperatures
icreased rate of ofte n cause an
85% minimum strength of an individual flexural strength test. hardening which makes placing and finishing
during placement and
On the other hand, the contractor can appeal that the concrete elay
rise In temperature, thus 1 cracking is caused by
strength may pass the required by means of core tests. The concrete it can be reduced by using
retarders. v
in the area represented by the core will be considered adequate if the
T C. DPWH
average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85% of, and if no single Stand
core is less than 75% of, the specified strength f'.. Specimens states

If the strength of control specimens does not meet the requirements of

the subsection, and it is not feasible or not advisable to obtain cores
from the structure due to structural considerations, payment of the
concrete will be made at an adjusted price:
Page 246 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol.
1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 247
operations. Cylinder samples shall not be used as substitute for a. It is vital that the prime coat is clean and dry
before installing a
determining the adequacy of the strength of concrete. tack coat.
b. The higher the viscosity of the tack layer, the more
shear strength
Thus, 330 sq. m x 0.230 m = 75.9 cu. m. And based from the given the overall structure will have.
options, the testing shall be at least one set of 3 concrete beams every . Diluted, slow-set emulsions are the most typical style
of applying
75-cu. m or fraction thereof. a tack coat.

72. D. To enable asphalt and water to mix. Based from the given choices, Technically, compared to cut back asphalt primes, emulsi
on primes
almost all are considered correct but an Engineer should know and are environmentally friendlier. Though we also use
emulsion for tack
analyze that Emulsifiers are molecules \yith one water-lovmg coats, but it must be slow-setting emulsion that is diluted
with water
(hydrophilic) and one oil-loving (hydrophob{c) end. They make 1‘t before application.
possible for water and oil to become finely d_xspersed in each other,
creating a stable, homogenous, smooth emulsion. Asphalt emulsions are the most widely used materials for
tack coats
instead of cutback asphalt or hot bituminous binders due
to the fact
73. D. Aprime coatis an application of a low viscosity asphalt to a that! (a) they can be applied at lower temperatures compar
ed to
granular base in preparation for an initial layfr (or surface _cour:e cutback asphalt or hot bituminous binder, (b) they are
layer) of asphalt. A prime coat is mainly respon_sxble for protecting the environmentally friendly as they do not contain harmful volatile
substrate of a construction project before additional layers are added. solvents and (c) they are safer to use as they are not flamma
ble and
In asphalt preparation, they can also act as a binde‘r with secondary pose a health risk to workers.
and tertiary compounds, creating a bette_r adhesxog between th]e
layers. Prime coat asphalt acts as an initial .sealer in the aspha't In other words, prime coat is used if asphalt pavement is to be
laying process to block the other layers from moisture, dust and debris constructed on a base course or PCCP; while tack coat is used for
before additional coating installations. itional asphalt overlay. And cutback or emulsion is used as
the material to
a. It provides temporary waterproofing but must haye addx_nona use as prime or tack coat.
compound layers in order for the floor, wall, or ceiling coating to
perform long-term waterproofing duties. 74. D. 70. DPWH Standard Specifications Subsection 307.2.1 Composition
b. The asphalt prime coat must completely penetrate the base and Quality of Bituminous Mixture states that the mixtur
e shall also
surface in order to be effective. » ) have an index of retained strength of not less than
70 when tested by
c. A prime coat must completely cure before an additional layer is AASHTO T 165.
incorporated.
d. Ttis vpital to be aware of weather conditions when apply an asphalt For aggregates ha ving maximum sizes over 25 mm,
AASHTO T 165
prime coat. In the case of wet weather, this step should be will be modified to use 150 mm x 150 mm cylindr
ical specimens. The
postponed to avoid runoff into the water supply. 150 mm (cylinders will be compacted by the proced
ures outlined in
AASHTO T 167 modified to emplo, oy 10 repetitions of a molding load of
On the other hand, a tack coat is applied after the prime coat, to form 9.6 MPa, with no appreciable holding time after each applic
ation of
an adhesive bond between the tack coat and the next layer of'coatmg. the full load.
The tack coat prevents slippage and may sometimes fun_ctlon as a
more long-term sealer to protect the substrate from n?olsture and C.
Segregation. Honeycombs are hollow spaces and cavities left in
bacteria. For asphalt prime coat systems, the tack coat is one of the concrete mass on surface or inside the concrete mass
where concrete
most vital parts of the process, as it connects the subsequent layers could not reach. Honeycombs which are on sides are
visible to naked
and forms the base of those layers’ strength. eyes and can be detected easily as soon forms
are removed. Honey
combs which are inside mass of concrete can only
be detected by
Important things to remember about installing a tack coat are: advanced techniques like ultrasonic testing ete.
Page 248 nd
Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol.
1.1 - 2" Ed Page 249
H oneycomb is due to non-reaching of ¢ Poorly proportioned mix, where suffi
cient matrix is not there to
concrete to all places due to which " bind the aggregates
cavities and hollow pockets are : ¢ Dropping concrete from more
than 1m,
created, main reasons are: * Vibrating concrete for a long time.

a. Improper vibration during ‘:y"\“!" ol To minimize segregation in

concrete:
concrete. HES g & * Segregation can be controlled by mai
ntaining proper proportioning the
b. Less cover to reinforcement bars sy mix.
Use of very stiff concrete (this can * By peculiar handling, placing, tran
Honeycombs sporting, compacting and finishin
g,
be avoided by controlling water as per ¢ By using air entraining agents, adm
ixtures and pozzolanic materials in
slump test). . . . N " the mix segregation controlled to
some extent.
d. Presence of more percentage of bigger size of aggregate in concrete als
prevents concrete to fill narrow 76. B. Finer M: ial. The Fineness modulus (FM) is an
spaces between the figure obtained empirical
by performing a sieve analysis to determine
reinforcement rods. particle size distribution, or grading, the
of the aggregate sample. This is
by adding the total percentage of the
sample of an aggregate retained
On the other hand, Laitance in on each of a specified series of sieve
s and dividing the sum by 100.
construction is a weak layer of Technically, aggregate of the same
fineness modulus will require the
cement and aggregate fines on same quantity of water to produce a
mix of the same consistency and
a concrete surface that is give a concrete of the same strength.
ASTM C 33 requires the FM of
usually caused by an over wet fine aggregate to be between 2.3
and 3.1. The higher the FM, the
coarser the aggregate. The lower the FM,
the finer the mater
ial. Fine
aggregate affects many concrete prope
rties, including workability.
Usually, a lower FM results in more
paste, making concrete easier to
Laitance in Construction
finish.

mixture, overworking the mixture, 77. A.

Lit20 ers, In designing a concrete mix,
we often use ACI 211, which
improper or excessive finishing or requires many tests of aggregates
but very few on cement. That is
combination thereof. because it is assuming that we are using
the highest quality of cement
while in reality, instead of using
Portland Cement Type 1, we are
Segregation in concrete is gommonly using the cheaper cement price in
the market which is Type 1P. For
thought as separation of some size groups ) this case, the use of 1:2:4 mix, not only
fastening the design timetable
of aggregates from cer;xlent mo;;s:{x;:; Segregation but also offer the relative strength
we need.
i locations wit] corresp ) N
:ds:fliac:::cies of these materials in other locagons, T'};"evpnmé;i}e:a;'si}?: To answer the question of mixture
of cement, FA, and CA plus water is very
segregation in concrete is the differen_ce; in speci 1; fi;agl/c e easy. We only need to think of the stren
gth and workability (slump). When
constituents, specific gravity of cement is in betvyeen fi; s the slump is low, the strength is high.
The relationship of strength and
aggregate it lies between 2.6-2.7g/cc due to the§e \:l'lfferencesLla g workability is dependent of water-cement ratio.
In practice, concrete with
separates from the matrix and causes segregation in concrete. Wwater-cement ratio starting from 0.50
and up can be considered as workable,
Belo w that range requi
res admixtures. Say, a bag of ceme
nt weighs 40 Kg.
Some other factors causing segregation in @ncret& We will multiply the 40 Kg to 0.50 wate
r-cement ratio is 20 Kg. Say 1 Kg =
e Transporting concrete mixes for long distances. 1 Liter, thus, water is 20 L.
 Page 250 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 —m
— 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Refe
rence Vol. 1.1 ~ 21 Ed
_Page 251
78. D. Compaction trials on embankment and base/subbase courses are away. If we are on the governme
nt side, we can accept the section at
being done in the laboratory by determining the opt:mfimdrq:stt\}xz an adjusted price due to thick
ness deficiency. However, if we are in
content at maximum dry density using proctor test. We ax; oi ;g]able contractor’s side, we ca n rework the laid base cours
not to identify the equipment to be used because’;‘t 1st alxz:sglr?éa o
e material.
ini practice
i with
i the use of Modified
ifi Proct tor Test, 81. D. There are many types of samp ling procedures. It may be for the
\/lefhod D. To simulate the compaction effort needed sucg as g:x:rslgzr purpose of taking samples for labo
ratory testing, job control, or for
;of roller passes
I to be able to reacl h the . maximum dry L f acceptance. The samples may be from
a flowing aggregate streams or
compaction trials on embankment are carned_ out to detelx;mégienz]:le bins, conveyor belt, stockpile or transportation units, and from
Suitability of Materials. DPWH Standard Spec;ficaugn 20 3 B “; roadway base courses.
Subsection 200.3.4 states that the purpose of‘the trial section: e
check the suitability of the materials, the efficiency of the eq(;ns i Sampling is the process of selecting
a part (sample), which will be used
and the construction method which is proposed to be use azirial to judge the whole lot. For this parti
cular question, the purpose could
Contractor. Therefore, the Contractor must use the s;me n‘_An work’ be for laboratory testing and job contr
ol since the quest ion is about
equipment and procedures that he propolfes to us; fofr t] eev)::;) e of.' combination of materials, In samp
ling material from stockpiles, it
One trial
i section
i of about 500 m2 shall be m ade for ‘ very difficult to ensure unbiased is
samples, due to the segregation
material and/or construction equipment/procedure proposed for use which often occurs when material
is stockpiled, with coarser particles
rolling to the outside base of the
pile.
79. A. Laboratory
A. Laborat i
compactiction. Optimum Moisture Content: (OMC) is
being determined using AASHTO T180‘. Met‘hod D. Thlshmezli]::};i If sampling from roadway, we can take sample units selected by a
test is intended for determining the relauons}_up bgtween tlde nfxa ‘iven random method from the construction. Obtain
least three at
content and density of soils when compacted in a g]ven'm}(: ?4_7g ven approximately equal increments,
selected at random from the unit
size with a 4.54-kg (10-1b) rammer dro]?ped f}*om a heig| 1210 i:h p being sampled, and combine to form
a field sample whose mass equals
(18 in), Method D—A 152.40-mm (6-in.) diameter m}:) . wi ol or exceeds the minimum recommended.
Take all incremen
ts from the
material passing 19.0-mm (0.75-in). O_ne method for _t“e ;s:grmme roadway for the full depth of the
material, taking care to exclude any
control of the compaction of such soils is to use a test fil tobte termine underlying material. Clearly mark
the specific areas from which each
the required degree of compaction ._anc? a method t)o ‘0, a ] increment to be removed; a metal
template placed over the area is
compaction. Then use a method specification 'onm)l‘ the )(,t:mtl’(w. en definite aid in securing approximatel a
y equal increment weights.
by specifying the type and size of compaction eqmpmu: i & n o
thickness, and the number of passes. These are all being done i > So, by analyzing, we can't take
samples and pack it in separate bags.
laboratory. We can take sam) ples from different lots.
By the way, “LOT” means a
sizable isolated quantity of bulk material
from a single source,
80. B. Test pitting is usually being done by ]f)PW::I_. Qluall:']ts};i:is:;ar}zi assumed to have been produced by the
same process (for example, a
Unit (QAU) - the i
inspectors, and or Fil nal t day’s production or a specific mass or volume); howev
er, the standard
Accepta%cAe/Completion of the project. Now, if the t§s§ed loc:t]o_n lanclg? sampling did not mention any meth
od about this aside from taking
the thickness required and approved in the plan, it is the ec:is)_ot . samples from top, middle, and bottom of a stock
pile or taking it at a
the DPWH Materials Engineer to give remedy on the note i eu, uniform increment if conducted from
a conveyor or bins because we
However, as a materials engineer of the contractor, we are comn:g S are sampling in representation
of a whole lot. Taking samples
with a different approach by reworkinghthedlald en;l_)anktr:eBP‘?\?H approximately equal “size” is also at
not convincing since sampling is
i
doing the requiredi one. On the ot her hand,! according 3 ! really done at random and as much
as possible unbiased.
i
Standard Specification ion ition
2013 Edition Subsection
b 201.3.5 Tolerances,
)
the i
permitted iati
variation from design i t! hickness of layer is 10 ; mm, For this case, the answ
er is none of the above. FOR MOR
meazing we have already exceeded the tolerance. As my experlepz;i INFORMATION regarding Sampling E
, may we refer you to go back to
depending on which perspective, we can answer the question rigl one Part of this book, “Method of Soil
Sampling”,
 Page 252 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2" Ed Materials Engineer Exa
mination Reference
Vol. 1.1 - 2 Ed
the cem, ent paste can _Page 253
shrink
i , which leads to cracki
82. B. 100 mm. DPWH Standard Specifications 2013 Edition, Subsection curling, ng and possibly
307.3.10 - Acceptance, Sampling and Testing (asphalt cores) states
that the contractor shall cut full depth samples as directed, from the Let us taki € an example on
finished pavement, for testing. Samples shall be neatly cut by saw or concret p. basici
core drill. Each sample shall be at least 150 mm x 150 mm or 100 mm
diameter full depth. At least one, but not more than three samples
shall be taken for each full day’s operation. For PCCP, concrete cores
diameter is usually 150 mm, but 100 mm is also accepted.

83. . Cylinder
A will yield a high ressive st h. 84. .35
s :3
-/ . Find Y and T:
The importance of proper curing cannot be overstated. It can literally G; ant

make or break a concrete product, in spite of the most technologically y;:fi{n point
Nominal
load =mass = 1.552
15,900 Ibs.; ke/m3;
TensileNominal
| g area ==199
19 sq. mm; ;
advanced batching systems. Adding water to Portland cement starts Solution: oad = 20,800 Ibs.
a chemical reaction called Aydration. As hydration proceeds over time,
the Portland cement and water are transformed into beneficial yp= 159000
15900 ib N
caleium silicate hydrate compounds. These compounds are the glue
P 22081b7kg * 9817 = 70738.78 N
that hold the aggregates together, creating the hard, solid material we Thus, Yield Strength = Yol ilsis = 7073878 N / 199 m
know as concrete. Curing is the process of maintaining moisture levels - m
inside cast concrete so that hydration can continue. As long as free = 3565 MPa
moisture and un-hydrated cement exist inside the concrete, the
strength, hardness and density will gradually increase.
_ 208001 N
2.2051b/kg * %81 Ky = 9253877 N
Practically speaking, curing is simply the process of keeping the Thus, Tensile Strength =T, / Apom =99538.77 N/ 199 e
hardened concrete moist so that it can continue to gain strength. As . m
the concrete gets stronger and denser, its porosity decreases. This is =465 MPa
important, because early on the concrete is much more porous than 85. B.3. :
when it's older and has hydrated longer. Porous concrete loses
moisture to evaporation quickly, and this can lower internal moisture Ultimate load = 52,300 besength =394 mm; Height = 194 mm; ‘
levels and stop hydration. If the concrete dries out, it stops gaining Solution: : ‘\‘
strength. This is why it is so important to cover your concrete right
after casting and keep it moist. _ sy2v2051b/kg X9.81@:232681,63N
I
H
Another factor that will influence the curing time is temperature.
¢=P/A=232681.63
fe= =939
N/(150 mm * 394 mm) = 3.94 MPa
4
Colder concrete gains strength much slower than warmer concrete.
Strength is often the focus, because it's the obvious property that has 86. B. 4%. Given for a 19
to develop in order for the concrete to be stripped, handled and mm steel bar:
Length of specimen = 1000
processed. Concrete that is too weak will crack, chip or be too soft to mm; M. Mass of f specim
i en = 2.322 K g/m
Nominal mass = 2.9.235 5 Kg/Kg/m;m:
process with diamond tools. But insufficient curing can also lead to N Nominal Area = 284sq.
m ;
other problems, such as curling and cracking. If curing stops too soon, Solution:
the moisture in the concrete can evaporate. If the concrete hasn't
gained enough strength to resist the forces generated during drying,
 Page 254 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2 Ed Pl'g 255

According to PNS 49:2002 — Steel Bars for Concrete‘Reinforcement. 1 Quality Test (Q.T.) — 100 gallons/100 pails or fraction thereof;
Subsection 6.2.4 The tolerance on the mass of one piece of steel bar Sample to be submitted should be the actual representative of the
shall be +6%. sample to be used in the project: 1 Gallon (1-4 liter-can) or 1 pail (1-20
liter-can) whichever is used.
Nom Mass — Sample Mass
% Deviation = — NemMa x100% Since there are 160 Gallons of Latex Paint, so there must be 2 — QT or
2 gallons. For 140 Gallons of flat wall enamel, the number of tests
2,235K7n£ = Z.EIZZL‘Z shall be 2 — QT or 2 Gallons also. That makes two (2) Gallons each
% Deviation = e M % 100% paint.
223557
89. C.2-QT. The minimum testing requirement shall be 1— Quality Test
% Dev = -3.89% say "4% (Q.T.) - for every 10,000 units or fraction thereof; For each test, three
representative units shall be submitted (6 specimens for Q.T. of CHB).
B. Actual Internal Diameter = 915 mm; Thickness of Wall = 115 mm;
All units shall be sound and free from surface cracks or others defects
87.
Esying length = 1000 mm (1m); Strength Tests: Load to produce 0.3mm
that would interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the
crack = 7435 Kg; Ultimate load = 8160 Kg strength of the construction. Concrete hollow blocks shall be tested for
its Compressive Strength, Absorption and Moisture Content as well
Strength, P, to Produce 0.3 mm crack (fi/mm) as Measurement of Dimensions.
Load to Prod 0.3mm crack 9.81
= Laying Length (m) x Actual Internal Diameter (mm) So, for a 2-storey, 6-classroom school building that has an estimated
18,800 units of 4" CHB will be used, we are going to perform
7435 +9.81 N 18,800/10,000 = 1.8 say 2 — Quality Tests or a total of 12 specimens of
Strength,P = —_———=179.71 — /mm CHB.
1.00m x 915 mm 79.7 m/
Load to Prod 0.3mm crack = 9.81 90. D. Let us define the Sheet with Specifications from PNS 67: 1986 —
Ultimate Load, Pu = Specification for Galvanized Steel Sheets and Coils. It is a galvanized
Lay Length (m) x Actual Internal Diameter (mm)
flat or corrugated metal product cut to the standard or specified length
8160 * 9.81 N and has a nominal base metal thickness ranging from 0.2 to 1.6 mm
Strength, P = —=87.49
100 £ 915 87. —m/mm and flat width of 760 to 1220 mm. The Minimum Tests for this is 1 —
Quality Test (Q.T.) - for every 1,000 sheets or fraction thereof.
88. B.2 gallons each. Let's first define the different kinds of paint. LATEX
PAINT - intended for use on concrete or other masonry surfaces. For the estimated 15,200 units of corrugated G.I. sheets for the
FLAT LATEX PAINT - a paint made from emulsions of polymer in construction of resettlement housing project, we will be using
water as binder with suitable pigment which is substantially free from 15200/1000 = 15.2 or 16 Quality Tests. That is not stated in the
gloss (lusterless finish). ENAMEL PAINT - intended for use on V\{ood options, so the answer is option D, None of the Above.
surfaces, a special type of paint made with varnish as the veh)cl_e.
FLAT WALL PAINT - for interior use, a paint made from alkyd resin 91. B.
4in. Galvanized Steel Pipe is a straight, tubular product of uniform
as binder with suitable pigment which is substantially free from gloss. circular cross-section primarily use for the transport of fluids. The
GLOSS/SEMI-GLOSS ENAMEL - for exterior use, a paint made_ from specification is based on DPWH Standard Specifications for
alkyd resin as binder with suitable pigment which has sheen, shine or Highways, Bridges, and Airports (Vol. II), 2013 Edition, Items 712 —
luster. Structural Metal, Steel Pipe; and ASTM A-53, Standard Specification
for Pipe, Steel Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
The minimum testing requirement for paints is: Seamless.
 Page 256 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 257

The test specimens for determinations of weight of coating shall be cut Paint — for interior use, a paint made from alkyd resin as binder with
approximately 4 inches in length with the minimum number of tests suitable pigment which is substantially free from gloss. Gloss/Semi-
of two specimens for the determination of weight of coating shall be Gloss Enamel — for exterior use, a paint made from alkyd resin as
taken, one from each end of one length of galvanized pipe selected at binder with suitable pigment which has sheen, shine or luster.
random from each lot of 500 lengths or fraction thereof, of each size.
97. A. 25 MPa. Min, As per ASTM C — 595, The original reason for the use
92. B. 0.06 Max. Phosphorous Content is the test used to evaluate the of pozzolanic portland cement (Type 1P) was the improved durability
ductile properties of steel bars. It is under the specification of combined with economy. The portland-pozzolan cement can generally
AASHTO
M 31 (ASTMA - 615/A- 615 M) —Standard Specification for be used wherever ordinary portland cement is not usable under
Deformed and Plain Billet — Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement normal condition. Type 1P is used in concrete with low-heat
and PNS 49 - Specification for Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. characteristics and in concrete requiring good chemical resistance.
Under these specifications, the required Phosphorus Content is 0.06
Maximum. DPWH Department Order 133, series of 2016 states that Portland-
Pozzolan Cement Type IP meeting the requirements of AASHTO M
93. B. Yield Strength. We can easily identify the grade using tension tests. 240M - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cement and
PNS 49, Subsection 4.2 states that each class of steel bar shall be ASTM C595 - Standard Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of \/lortar
graded according to its minimum yield strength. It is where the load Containing Hydraulic Cement, shall be allowed for use.
on original cross-sectional area, when at constant loading speed,
begins a brief interval during which the test specimen elongates while For both Portland Cement Type I and Portland-Pozzolan Cement fi}:{;
the load remains constant or decreases and after which, the increase IP trial mixes shall be done and shall meet the specification
of load with increase of elongation resumes. requirements for concrete. The AASHTO / ASTM provisions pertinent
to the use of Portland-Pozzolan Cement Type IP shall be adopted.
94. A. Grade 80. For Grade 40 (ksi), the wall thickness is 0.091 in (2.31
mm); and for Grade 80, wall thickness is 0.126 in (3.20 mm). Therefore, the strength requirement of Type 1P is 13 MPa, 20 MPa,
Therefore, Grade 80 is the answer. and 25 MPa, for 3, 7, 28 days and must be designed, approved, and
passed the required tests. Thus, the compressive strength shall also
A.
Gauge
# 32. Though common knowledge, few people know why the be 25 MPa as stated in ASTM C 595 and ASTM C 109.
thickness of steel diminishes as the gauge increases (i.e.: 16-gauge
steel is thicker than 20-gauge steel). The explanation comes from the 98. A. W/C = 0.485. In testing the cement, there are eight (8) basic tests
early development of a steel gauge measurement system in which the we need to conduct: Specific Gravity, Fineness Test, Normal
control measurement was based on a 1” thick steel plate. The 1” Consistency, Time of Setting, Autoclave Expansion, Air Content,
thickness of the steel was measured in diminishing fractions such as Chemical Analysis, and Compressive Strength. To determine the

:l
1/14" thick, 1/16" thick, 1/20” thick, and so on. The bottom number of compressive strength of cement, mortars using 2 in. or 50 mm per side
the fraction became an easy identifier and eventually was adopted as are used. To start the test, prepare a standard mortar using the
the “gauge number.” Thus, 1/16” became 16 gauge and 1/20" became proportion of one-part cement to 2.75 parts of standard sand. For the
20 gauges. amount of mixing water, use a water-cement ratio of 0.485 for all
Portland cement. The mortar will then be placed into the mortar mold
96. B. Latex Paint. Let’s define the different kinds of paint. Latex Paint — in two layers. Tamp the mortar mix in the mold, each layer 32 times
intended for use on concrete or other masonry surfaces. Flat Latex in four rounds of 8 adjoining strokes per round.
Paint — a paint made from emulsions of polymer in water as binder
with suitable pigment which is substantially free from gloss 99. B. Flash set. Though we barely know the chemical characteristic of
(lusterless finish). Enamel Paint — intended for use on wood surfaces, cement, however, it is important that we have the basic knowledge of
a special type of paint made with varnish as the vehicle. Flat Wall the chemical reaction of cement to the other materials which will be
Page 258 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — i“ Ed Page 259

incorporated in our concrete mix. One of these is the setting time. It is

the change of cement paste from plastic to stiff solid state, whereas,
hardening is the gaining of strength with hydration. The setting and
hardening stop as soon as the concrete becomes dry.

We are talking about the rate of hydration as soon as we think of

PART IX-A
cement mixing with water. There are many chemical reactions to this
scenario. However, there are times that our concrete hardens or
stiffens but no strength develops: and this is called flash setting. TEST QUESTIONS
100. C. Standard Length. Laying length, also called fitting gain, is the
distance from the bottom of the socket to the centerline of the
intersecting pipe. Lay length is defined as the distance required to
complete one revolution of the strand around the diameter of the
conductor. When a conductor has more than one layer, it usually refers
to the lay length of the outer layer. This is confusing because we also
mentioned outer layer as the lay length. However, the engineer shall
note that the laying length of Class II Reinforced Concrete Pipe, VARIOUS EXAMS IN 2018
according to AASHTO M170 M — 94 or ASTM C76-90a — Standard
Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and
CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'
Sewer Pipe, is 990 mm minimum, regardless of the design diameter MATERIALS ENGINEER
size such as 600 mm, 750 mm, 900 mm, 1050 mm, 1200 mm, with side
variation of 16 max. WRITTEN ACCREDITATION
EXAMINATION
--=--END OF EXPLANATIONS-----
 Materials Engineer Examination
Page 260
S Materials Engineer
Matenials Engineer Examination
Examination Reference
Reference Vol. 1.1 M
Vol. 1.1 Ed
—- 227 F¢ Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2 gg
ACCREDITATION EXAMINATION FOR CONTRACTORS'/CONSULTANTS' CONTRACTORS' AND CONSUL
_Page 261
TANTS'
MATERIALS ENGINEER MATERIALS ENGINEER WRIT
(ANSWER SHEET) TEN
ACCREDITATION EXAMINATIO
Examinee No. : Date of Examination N
VARIOUS EXAMS IN 2018
Score ] Place of Examination : < ___ Manila
Examinee’s Signature
INSTRUCTION IN MARKING ANSWERS: sk answeciian the questions. The
Shade your answer in each Item. If you wish to change your answer, mark an X on your fi answer k
EXPLANATIONS are
shade your new answer and affix your initial.

A B C D A B C D A B COD A B CD
1. What is the layer thickness
[(loccco of each shotcrete applicati
wloocoo mloocoo [Hlocoo to? on be limited
2L|ICOO0O0 OO0 O |(alooc0o |njloococo a. Minimum 75 mm
I OCO000
b. Maximum 75 mm
[soooo |(sjoocooco |rnlococo
¢ Minimum 50 mm
LIOOOO MO0 |l |nloocoo d. Maximum 50 mm
519000 [noooo (sloococo |(noocooo
LI OO OO IO OO O 6O
O OO (8| OOOO Stone Mastic Asphalt shal
l be placed at a tem per
1O00CO noocoO |(aloocoo |ajococo ature not less than:
a. 107 Degree Celsius
BlO0O00O nOo00o0 (sjloco0co (sloocoo 115 Degree Celsius

o
ICOO0O ([nfoooo |(sfloocoo |(uloocooco 125 Degree Celsius

ao
VWOOOO |BOOCOO (OO |(sloooo 135 Degree Celsius
NOOOO (kKoo O |ajco0o |(wloooo
ROOOO (foooo |(afcoo0co |(wloococo 3. A transit mixer for road con
struction
was found to have a 6" slu
BIOOCOO B[O OO O 83O OO0 88| O O OO of fresh concrete instea
d of the required 3". mp
recommend if you are What will you
BIOCOOO VOO0 (oo (wmloooo the assigned Materials
a. Engineer?
Add Portland cement to att
BLIOOOO ([woooO |(slocoo |(sloooo ain the required 3" slump.
b. Add Portland cement
6OOOO (OO0 O and fine aggregate to
|[sjoocoo |ajlcooco required 3" slump attain the
VOO OO (o0 o0Oo (a0 |ajloococo Reject the concrete mix
ture

e
BOOOO (sfO00o0CO (sjloocoo
d. Let the concrete mi x diverted
|alococo for pouring on a prepared
column for retaining
BOOOO |ufocooo 689.[O O O O 910002 wall of the same project
WOOOO |(slOO0OCO 00O OO [65|OCOO 4. ASTM C150 req uires that the 28-da; y stre
NOOOO ([6OOOO [nfoooo |(sjoooo Type I Portland cement ngth of mortar made from
be at least 2 7.6 MPa.
20000 (ooC O nIOOOO |nfocooO tested: two passed but Three specimens were
one failed b; y more than 20%.
BOOOO (sjoCcOO BIOOOO |sfOoOOO
the conclusion? What will be
BOOOO [HOCOOO |[njoocoo BQOOOg
B5[OOOO (oo OCO LOOOO EOOO
Page 262 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 263

that the particular d. Allow the use of the available aggregates on stockpile and
a. Discard the failed result and conclude
cement passed the specification. wait for the result of the Final Inspection for Acceptance,
and if fails, institute immediate remedial measures.
b. Perform a re-test since the data is inconclusive
Get the average of the three and if the average is more than
In slip-form construction, what is the slump of concrete used?
27.6 MPa, conclude that the particular cement passed the
specification a. Not more than 3 inches
d. Conclude that the cement does not pass the specifications b. 3to4 inches
since it failed to give the consistent results c. Almost zero
d. Any of the above
5. As construction work progresses, you noticed that the materials
delivered at the project site are different from the ones tested and
A concrete beam fails within middle third at 6,250 Ibs. The flexural
that passed the requirements. As materials engineer, what would
strength of the sample is:
you do?
a. 781.25 psi
a. Authorize the use of the material
b. 520.83 psi
b. Conduct immediate retesting of the materials for
c. 911.46 psi
verification purposes
d. 221.05 psi
Reject the materials
a e

Replace the materials

10. The following can be used to help stabilize slope except:
a. Vetiver grass hedgerows
Sample of aggregate base course material when tested for quality
passed the requirements except grading. What will you recommend b. Legumes
as a Materials Engineer? c. Grass cover
a. Reject the material d. Coconut Tree
b. Replace the material

e
c. Accept the material at an adjusted price 11. What is the phosphorus content requirement for rebars?
d. Reprocess the material by blending a. 0.06 min.
b. 0.06 max.
c. 0.60 max.
As the materials engineer, you were tasked to be at the batching
d. None of the above
plant for inspection of the concrete batch that will be delivered to
your project. Based on the design mix, you noted that the designed
maximum size of aggregate is 50 mm, however, you noticed that only 12. What is the maximum percent carbon content of a 16-mm diameter
3/4” maximum aggregate size is the only available on the batching steel bar?
plant’s stockpile. What will you do? a. 0.26
a. Allow the use of the available size of aggregate but b. 0.27
emphasized that the minimum strength must meet c. 028
b. Wait for the 2-inches maximum aggregate size to arrive in d. 0.29
the batching plant before proceeding
¢. Do not allow the use of the available aggregates on stockpile
 i 00 v N i A a0 O S S T N 0 AV i N e A

Page 264 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 265

13. What is the minimum thickness of Coconet as prescribed in DPWH c. 310

Standard Specifications Item 622 — Coconet Bio-engineering d. 3.15
technology as amended by Department Order 142, Series of 2016
that superseded the Department Order 41, Series of 2010? 19 . In pile driving, what is the minimum penetration of pile in firm
a. 5.0+0.5mm materials?
b. 12.5+0.5 mm a. 1
c. 10.0+ 1.0 mm b. 3
d. 15.0+ 1.5 mm c. b
d. None of the above
14. The following are tests for the quality of water as stated in Item 714,
except . 20. What is the maximum percentage permitted for fly ash as partial
a. Chloride replacement of Portland Cement?
b. Sulfate a. 15%
c. Alkalies b. 20%
d. Sodium ¢ 256%
d. Fly ash is not a partial replacement of cement but an
15. What is the sieve number that indicates the fine aggregates for additional mixture for concrete.
concrete?
a. Retained sieve no. 8 21. Cellulose fibers, either pure or bitumen coated should be used as
b. Passing sieve no. 4 additives to Stone Mastic Asphalt to inhibit the loss of bituminous
c. Passing sieve no. 3/8 binder by drainage from the aggregate. What percentage (by weight)
d. Passing sieve no. 8 will both cellulose fibers, in pellets form, shall conform to when pure
cellulose fiber is utilized?
16. As much as possible, placement of reflectorized thermoplastic a. 0.30-0.40 (3.0-4.0 kgs/m.t.)
rumble strips shall be limited to the following locations except: b. 0.33-0.43 (3.3-4.3 kgs/m.t.)
a. Pedestrian crossings c. 0.34-0.44 (3.4-4.4 kgs/m.t.)
b. Bicycle routes d. 0.35-0.45 (3.5-4.5 kgs/m.t.)
c. Residential areas
d. Urban areas 22. What is the minimum requirement for non-reinforced concrete pipe?
a. 1 Pipe
17 What is the Department Order that states the accreditation of b. 2 Pipes
asphalt and concrete batching plants? c. 3 Pipes
a. Department Order No. 252, Series of 2002 d. 4 Pipes
b. Department Order No. 253, Series of 2003
c. Department Order No. 252, Series of 2003 23. What is the CBR Value of subgrade?
d. Department Order No. 253, Series of 2002 a. 3%
b. 4%
18. What is ideal specific gravity of Portland Cement Type 1? c. 5%
a. 3.00 d. 6%
b. 3.05
 i 00 v N i A a0 O S S T N 0 AV i N e A

Page 264 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 265

13. What is the minimum thickness of Coconet as prescribed in DPWH c. 310

Standard Specifications Item 622 — Coconet Bio-engineering d. 3.15
technology as amended by Department Order 142, Series of 2016
that superseded the Department Order 41, Series of 2010? 19 . In pile driving, what is the minimum penetration of pile in firm
a. 5.0+0.5mm materials?
b. 12.5+0.5 mm a. 1
c. 10.0+ 1.0 mm b. 3
d. 15.0+ 1.5 mm c. b
d. None of the above
14. The following are tests for the quality of water as stated in Item 714,
except . 20. What is the maximum percentage permitted for fly ash as partial
a. Chloride replacement of Portland Cement?
b. Sulfate a. 15%
c. Alkalies b. 20%
d. Sodium ¢ 256%
d. Fly ash is not a partial replacement of cement but an
15. What is the sieve number that indicates the fine aggregates for additional mixture for concrete.
concrete?
a. Retained sieve no. 8 21. Cellulose fibers, either pure or bitumen coated should be used as
b. Passing sieve no. 4 additives to Stone Mastic Asphalt to inhibit the loss of bituminous
c. Passing sieve no. 3/8 binder by drainage from the aggregate. What percentage (by weight)
d. Passing sieve no. 8 will both cellulose fibers, in pellets form, shall conform to when pure
cellulose fiber is utilized?
16. As much as possible, placement of reflectorized thermoplastic a. 0.30-0.40 (3.0-4.0 kgs/m.t.)
rumble strips shall be limited to the following locations except: b. 0.33-0.43 (3.3-4.3 kgs/m.t.)
a. Pedestrian crossings c. 0.34-0.44 (3.4-4.4 kgs/m.t.)
b. Bicycle routes d. 0.35-0.45 (3.5-4.5 kgs/m.t.)
c. Residential areas
d. Urban areas 22. What is the minimum requirement for non-reinforced concrete pipe?
a. 1 Pipe
17 What is the Department Order that states the accreditation of b. 2 Pipes
asphalt and concrete batching plants? c. 3 Pipes
a. Department Order No. 252, Series of 2002 d. 4 Pipes
b. Department Order No. 253, Series of 2003
c. Department Order No. 252, Series of 2003 23. What is the CBR Value of subgrade?
d. Department Order No. 253, Series of 2002 a. 3%
b. 4%
18. What is ideal specific gravity of Portland Cement Type 1? c. 5%
a. 3.00 d. 6%
b. 3.05
Page 266 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 267

24, If one of the measurements of a core specimens taken from a

concrete is 28.7 cm, what is the corrected measurement to be used 29. Why are undisturbed samples used primarily for determining the
in calculating the average thickness of the pavement if the design properties of foundation materials?
thickness is 28 cm? a. To retain the structure of material
a. 28.0cm b. Because it is easier to obtain undisturbed sample than
b. 28.7cm disturbed samples
c. 285cm c. Because it is easier to test undisturbed samples than
d. 29.0cm disturbed samples
d. Because it represents the relative strength of the soil strata
when subjected to compression test
25. What is the equipment being used to test the reflectivity of road
signs?
a. Retro-reflectometer 30. The purpose of conducting laboratory CBR test on the fill materials
b. Dynamic Cone Reflectometer for embankment is to check:
c. Falling Weight Reflectometer a. Permeability of the compacted subgrade material
d. Rebound Reflectometer b. Swelling characteristics of the subgrade material
c. Bearing capacity of subgrade material
26. DPWH Department Order No. 47, Series of 2015 requires an d. All of the above
International Roughness Index (IRI) values of not more than ____
for both asphalt and pavement for National Primary Roads. 31 A mixture of asphalt cement and water with catalytic agent is called:
a. 2.00 m/Km a. Joint filler
b. 2.50 m/Km b. Temperature asphalt
c. 3.00 m/Km c. Cutback asphalt
d. 3.5 m/Km d. Asphalt cement

27. To facilitate finishing, forms used on ornamental work, railing,

32. Department Order 126, Series of 2017 commonly called the DPWH
parapets and exposed vertical surfaces shall be removed in not less
than ___ nor more than 48 hours, depending upon weather
Standard Specification for Item 743 - Geofoam as an Alternative
conditions. In order to determine the condition of concrete in Embankment Material states that geofoam is made of what kind of
columns, forms shall always be removed from them before the material?
removal of shoring from beneath beams and girders. a. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS)
a. 12 b. Expanded Polyethylene (EPE)
b. 24 c. Expanded Polymer (EP)
c. 36 d. Expanded Polypropylene (EPP)
d. 8
33. A one-lane with pavement width of 3.5 meters and shoulder width
of 9.5 meter on each side of the pavement was designed to have
28. A new technology used in the non-destructive testing of the quality subbase and base courses with a combined thickness of 300 mm. If
and strength of concrete is through a/an: the thickness of the subbase is 125 mm, the spreading and
a. Nuclear density gauge compaction of the subbase and base courses shall be carried out in:
b. Geiger counter a. 3 layers over the full width of 4.5 m
c. Ground radar b. 2 layers over the full width of 4.5 m
d. Ultrasonic tester
Page 268 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 269

c. 3layers over the full width of 3.5 m 38. The width of Item 743 — Geofoam as an alternative embankment as
d. 2 layers over the full width of 3.5 m stated in D.0. 126, Series of 2017 shall be:
a. Not less than 305 mm
b. Not more than 305 mm
c. Not less than 1219 mm
34. DPWH Standard Specifications Item 618 as stated in Department d. Not more than 1219 mm
Order 31, Series of 2010 - Reflectorized thermoplastic rumble strips
shall have the following dimension:
a. Height = 5 mm to 15 mm; Width = 50 mm to 100 mm; 39. Concrete paver as stated in Department Order No.2, Series of 2013
Spacing = 300 mm to 500 mm are for projects whose cost of Item 311 — Portland Cement Concrete
b. Height = 4 mm to 13 mm: Width = 100 mm to 150 mm; Pavement is Php 50.00 Million and above. Department Order 128,
Spacing = 300 mm to 500 mm series of 2018 states the amendment of DO 11, Series of 2014 for
c. Height = 5 mm to 15 mm; Width = 100 mm to 150 mm; farm to market roads with road way of __ meters where closure to
Spacing = 200 mm to 500 mm traffic during construction is not allowed, since the paving machine
d. Height = 4 mm to 13 mm; Width = 50 mm to 100 mm; will occupy the roadway width.
Spacing = 200 mm to 500 mm a. 3
b. 4
35. This is a type of cement for concrete that is expected to be deposited Z g
in water.
)
a. Class B
b. ClassC 40. The result of the International Roughness Index (IRI) survey on an
c. ClassP asphalt road is 3.80 m/Km. What is the percent price adjustment to
d. Class Seal the Item cost as stated in D.O. 137, Series of 2016 as an amendment
to DO 47, series of 2015?
o
36. Vibratory compaction (8-10 tonnes tandem roller) shall only be used E' 51)83/0
i H 2 b
after the static rollers have been applied and when the temperature e 15%
of the mixture is sufficiently high. Vibratory rolling shall be limited d’ No
. . payment
to a maximum of __ pass/es at a mixture temperature of not less
than __°C.
a. 360 41. A concrete beam was tested at midpoint at 6,250 lbs. The flexural
b. 5100 strength of the sample is:
c. 31100 a. 781.25 psi
d. 560 b. 520.83 psi
| c. 911.46 psi
37. A single compressive strength test result is the average result from | d. 221.05 psi
2 cylinders cast from the same load and tested at 28 days. What is
the percentage of the specified design strength at specified test age
will the installed shotcrete construction be removed and replaces? 42. If 330 gallons of paints for use in painting of 2-storey school building
are delivered in the project, 160 gallons are Latex Paint and 140
a. At less than 75%
b: At less than 85% “ gallox_xs are fla‘t wall enamel paint. How many gallons will you
c. At less than 90% | submit for quality test for each type of paint?
d. At less than 95% a. 1gallon each
Page 270 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2 Ed Page 271

b. 2 gallons each b. 40%

c. 4 gallons each c. 50%
d. None of the above d. 60%

43. The test which combines a load-deformation test performed in the

laboratory with an empirical design chart to determine the 48. The correctness/effectiveness of all concrete mix design can be
thickness pf pavement base and other layers is known as: checked by conducting:
a. Plate bearing test a. core test
b. Moisture-Density Determination b. trial mix
c. California Bearing ratio c. strength test
d. Standard Penetration Test d. soundness test

44. Tensile strength, yield strength, and elongation are the common 49. In hot climate under sustained loading, asphalt cements behave
required tests to determine quality of: like:
Viscous liquids
Aluminum guardrails

o
Viscous solids
Galvanized steel sheets and coils
poose

Reinforcing steel bars

Elastic solids

ae
Steel pipes Soft solids

45. Which of the following provisions is not included in the job-mix 50. Consolidation test is usually performed on
formula? samples.
Mixing time a. Disturbed
Grading of Aggregates b. Undisturbed
poop

Asphalt cement c. Consolidated

Temperature at delivery d. Compacted

46. The sand used in the field density test in determining the volume of
hole using sand cone method must be cleaned, dry and passing sieve ---END OF QUESTIONS--
number:
a. 30
b. 40
c. 200
d. 10

47. The maximum percentage abrasion loss allowed for paving concrete
coarse aggregate is:
a. 30%
Page 272 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2" Ed Page 273

ANSWER KEY

VARIOUS EXAMS IN 2018 PA RT IX' B

CONTRACTORS' and CONSULTANTS'
MATERIALS ENGINEER WRITTEN EXAMINATION ANSWERS AN D DETAILED

i B 5 G EXPLANATIONS
2. D 27. A
3. C 28.D
4. D 29. A
5. C 30.D
6. D 8L A
r 8 g VARIOUS EXAMS IN 2018
e @D ‘ CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS'
1. B 36. D MATERIALS ENGINEER
e Bra WRITTEN EXAMINATION
14.D 39. B
15. B 40. B
16.D 41. A
17. B 42.B
18.D 143.C
19.B 44.C
20. B 45.D
21. A 46.D
22. B 47. B
23. B 48. B
24.C 19. B
>
IS
Page 274 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed P'E 275

CONTRACTORS' AND CONSULTANTS' 3. C. Reject the concrete mixture. The slump does not determine the
MATERIALS ENGINEER strength of concrete but is made by water-cement ratio. As a general
rule, every inch additional to slump decreases the strength. Additional
WRITTEN EXAMINATION fine aggregates will also require additional amount of paste to cover the
VARIOUS EXAMS IN 2018 aggregates. Choice D states that diverting the delivered concrete to the
prepared retaining wall forms. However, retaining walls shall use Class
Note: Below is the answer and detailed explanations to the questions from A concrete with slump 2 to 4 inches. Thus, one of the best choices is the
the previous chapter. Be sure to understand the discussion as addition of Portland Cement only (although the strength will not be
possible as you can. Always remember to go back to principles/basics. controlled).
Enjoy learning!
Your decision about whether to accept or reject concrete also will depend
on just how wet the mix is. Many specifications permit slump variances
1 D. 50 mm. of 1 inch. If the slump exceeds 1% inches from what was ordered, reject
DPWH Standard Specifications Subsection 514.3.4 Shotcrete the mix.
Application states that layer thickness of each shotcrete
4. D. ASTM C150 requires that the 28-day strength of mortar made from
application shall be limited to 50 millimeters. Thicker
Type 1 Portland cement be at least 27.6 MPa. Three specimens were
applications may be approved if the Contractor can demonstrate
tested: two passed but one failed by more than 20%.
that no sloughing or sagging is occurring. If additional thickness
is required, the applied surface shall be broomed or scarified and DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 311.3.20 Acceptance
allow the layer to harden. of Concrete states that the strength level will be considered satisfactory
if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal
D. 135 Degrees Celsius. or exceed the specified strength f.. and no individual strength test result
DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 734.1 — Description is deficient by more than 15% of the specified strength f.. Thus, the
states that The Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA) is a gap graded hot mix Materials Engineer shall conclude that the cement does not pass the
asphalt surface course laid on the proposed base in accordance with this specifications since it failed to give the consistent results.
specification and in conformity with the line, grades and typical cross-
section shown in the plan within the tolerances specified or established On the other hand, the contractor can appeal that the concrete strength
by the Engineer. Item 734.2.7 Proportioning of Mixture explains that may pass the required by means of core tests. The concrete in the area
Cellulose fibers, in pellets or loose fiber form, are usually added to the represented by the core will be considered adequate if the average
bituminous mixtures in the amount of 0.3 to 0.4 percent by weight (3 to strength of the cores is equal to at least 85% of, and if no single core is
4 kgs. per metric tonnes) if pure, while 0.33 to 0.45 percent by weight less than 75% of, the specified strength f.
(3.3 to 4.5 kgs. per metric tonnes) is added if bitumen coated. Mineral
filler shall be added to the mixture during the mixing operation in the If the strength of control specimens does not meet the requirements of
amount of one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass percent dry aggregate basis. the subsection, and it is not feasible or not advisable to obtain cores from
The lower percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which are the structure due to structural considerations, payment of the concrete
predominantly calcareous. will be made at an adjusted price:

Unlike with the typical asphalt which has laying temperature of 107°C, Deficiency in Strength
the mixture shall be placed at a temperature of not less than 135°C and of Concrete Specimens, Per;;x:: (215’?:?“
a maximum of 180°C measured in the truck before dumping into the %
spreader. Less than 5 100
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 277
Page 276 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed
for the new stockpile and additional space in the plant. For this case,
5 to less than 10 80
the materials engineer should have designed the concrete mix for
10 to less than 15 70
maximum size of 3/4” sieve prior to concrete pouring on that day.
15 to less than 20 60
20 to less than 30 50 Ideally, we cannot allow the use of the available aggregates on stockpile as
25 or more 0 stated in Option C. Re-designing the mix can be done but additional costs
(This table is under Subsection 311.3.20 - Acceptance of Concrete will be spent on the side of the contractor because his equipment and man-
power are already on site and are just waiting for the concrete mix batch to
5. C. Reject the Materials. As construction work progresses, you noticed arrive. Practically, we allow the use of such materials on stockpile but the
that the materials delivered at the project site are different from the
concrete strength requirement must be met. If the strength test fails, the
ones tested and that passed the requirements. As materials engineer, one at fault will be the materials engineer himself. So, the most practical
what would you do? solution is just wait for the 2-inches maximum aggregate size to arrive
because it is what the mix design and trial mix were based on.
This is a very practical way of practicing taking decisions as a true Materials
Engineer. It is common knowledge that a material that has not been tested The bottom line is, the materials engineer should always check the available
or part of a group of materials in the program of works should not be materials so that his mix design will always fall on what is right and
incorporated in the construction works. Thus, the delivered materials shall economical on the side of the contractor without jeopardizing the project
not be used unless tested. Based from the given choices, it seemed correct to quality. Materials Sources as per D.0. 41, series of 2006 and as stated in the
conduct immediate retesting but it would consume considerable amount of approved materials map of every implementing office shall be the basis of
time: replacing the materials with the tested ones seemed better, but if we knowing the sources of aggregates for our project construction.
replace it with another untested one, the effect would be the same.
Therefore, it is best to reject the delivered untested materials and decide 8. C. Almost Zero. Slip-form paving is defined as a process used to
that the tested one should be used. Based on this scenario, this is the best consolidate, form into geometric shape and surface finish a concrete
decision. As a materials engineer, the quality of every project should be his mass by pulling the forms continuously through and surrounding the
priority. plastic concrete mass. Low-slump concrete (on the order of 0 — 75 mm
(0 — 3 inches)) is necessary so that the fresh concrete is able to hold its
6. D. Reprocess the material by blending. shape once the slip form paver has passed. Low slump concrete can be
Sample of aggregate base course material when tested for quality made with less water and usually has higher compression and flexural
passed the requirements except grading. What will you recommend as strengths than comparable high slump mixes. Large jobs generally
a Materials Engineer? require high production rates in order to be profitable. Slip form paving
production rates are typically in the range of 65 — 100 m¥hr. (85 — 131
When the base course material failed to meet the grading requirements, the yd¥hr.) for mainline paving. That translates into between 70 — 90 m/hr.
materials shall not be categorized as subbase or base course unless grading (230 — 300 ft./hr) of 3.66 m (12 ft.) wide, 250 mm (10 inch) thick PCC
is correct. We are in the process of correcting it. We cannot reject the surface course. Automation and computer control allow slip form pavers
material immediately and replace it with a new untested one. Thus, it is to produce very smooth riding surfaces (IRI on the order of 0.90 m/km
best to reprocess the grading by blending with other sizes of aggregates and
or less).
test it again for acceptance.
9. B. Computation: F = 6,250 lbs.
7. B. In the first place, the use of %” sieve is widely being used in today’s P = FL/bd?= (6,250%18) / (6*62)
market due to its economical and practical solutions both for vertical P =520.83 psi; Answer
and horizontal structures construction. On the side of the batching
plant, they will use the available aggregates on stockpile rather than Take note that we used 18” instead of the beam size of 21”. Be reminded
using the design mix of the materials engineer and spend more money that during testing of the beam, either midpoint or third-point loading,
Page 278 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Page 279

the supports (Resultant Forces) sit on the two edges of the bean: 16. D. Urban areas. As much as possible, placement of reflectorized
approximately 1.50 inches from the edges on both sides. That makes 21 thermoplastic rumble strips shall be limited to rural locations and shall
— 1.5” (2 Supports) = 18”. not be installed near residential areas because of the noise it can
generate. It should not be placed through pedestrian crossings or on
10. C. Grass cover. The following can be used to help stabilize slope such as
bicycle routes as stated in DPWH Standard Specifications Subsection
the loss rate of the solid and liquid nutrients were also much lower than
that of the style-grass and control plot. The vetiver grass hedge can not 618.3.1.1 - Reflectorized Thermoplastic Rumble Strips.
only resist erosion but promotes tree growth as well. Legumes can be
used as benching for slope together with nitrogen fixing cover crop. 17. B. Department Order No. 253, Series of 2003, otherwise known as
Coconut tree can also be used in slope protection such as coco logs. Thus, Accreditation of Asphalt and Portland Cement Concrete Batching
grass cover is the only choice we cannot use as slope protection because Plants.
it doesn’t penetrate well to deeper soil nor protect the slope it
stands/leans on.
18.
11. B. 0.06 Max. Phosphorous Content is the test used to evaluate the ductile.
properties of steel bars. It is under the specification of AASHTO M 31 19. B.3.
(ASTM A - 615/A- 615 M) — Standard Specification for Deformed and DPWH Standard Specifications Subsection 400.3.3 Pile Driving (Piling)
Plain Billet — Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; and PNS 49 - states that Piles shall be used only in places where the minimum
Specification for Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. Under these penetration of 3 m in firm materials, or 5 m in soft materials can be
specifications, the required Phosphorus Content is 0.06 Maximum.
obtained. Whereas soft upper stratum overlies a hard stratum, the piles
12. A. 0.26%. DPWH Standard Specifications Volume 2, 2013 Edition shall penetrate the hard materials at sufficient depths to fix the ends
Subsection 712.1.2 Structural Steel stated that structural carbon steel rigidly.
for riveted, bolted or welded construction shall conform to Structural
Steel, AASHTO M 183. Table 2 — Chemical Requirements stated in Full length piles shall be used where practicable. Splicing of piles when
AASHTO M 183 stated that reinforcing steel with diameter up to 19 mm permitted, shall be in accordance with the provisions of Subsection
is 0.26%. Reinforcing steel bar with diameter ranges between 19 mm to 400.3.7 and 400.3.8. All piles shall be continuously driven unless
38mm is 0.27%. otherwise allowed by the Engineer. Piles shall not be driven unless
required strength is reached/attained.
13. C.10.0 + 1.0 mm. DPWH Standard Specifications Item 622 — Coconet
Bio-engineering technology as amended by Department Order 142, . B. 20%. Fly Ash, if specified or permitted as a mineral admixture and
Series of 2016 that superseded the Department Order 41, Series of 2010 not exceeding 20% partial replacement of Portland Cement in concrete
states that the minimum thickness of Coconet is 10.0 + 1.0 mm. mix shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 618. Fly ash use in
concrete improves the workability of plastic concrete, and the strength
14. D.
Sodium. DPWH Standard Specifications Subsection 714.2 — Chemical and durability of hardened concrete. Fly ash use is also cost effective.
Limitation for Wash Water states that chemical requirements that need When fly ash is added to concrete, the amount of Portland cement may

to be tested for water are chloride, sulfate as S04, Alkalies as (Na20 + be reduced.
0.658 K20), Total Solids (all in PPM).
21. . 0.30-0.40 (3.0-4. s/m.t.).
15. B. Passing Sieve No. 4.
DPWH Standard Specifications Subsection 734.2.5 Stabilizing
Additives (Stone Mastic Asphalt) states that cellulose fibers, either pure
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed Page 281
Page 280

or bitumen coated should be used as additives to Stone Mastic Asphalt 26. C. 8.0 m/Km. DPWH Department Order No. 47, Series of 2015 requires
to inhibit the loss of bituminous binder by drainage from the aggregate. an International Roughness Index (IRI) value of not more than 3.0
Both cellulose fibers, in pellets form, shall conform to 0.30-0.40 (3.0-4.0 m/Km for both asphalt and pavement for National Primary Roads.
kgs/m.t.) when pure cellulose fiber is utilized.
Road roughness has been highly recognized as an indicator of road
22. B. 2 Pipes. ) condition in terms of road pavement performance and as a major
Minimum requirement/s for quality test of non-reinforced concrete pipe determinant in vehicle operating cost. Poor roughness characteristic of
is 2 pipes or 0.5% of total number of pipes. pavement will result to poor riding quality, increase in vehicle operating
cost, increase in accident potential and reduction in pavement life.
23. B. 4%. Presently, road roughness is quantified in terms of International
The California bearing ratio (CBR) is a penetration test for evaluation Roughness Index (IRI) which was developed by the World Bank in the
of the mechanical strength of natural ground, subgrades and base 1980s. Henceforth, D.O. 47, Series of 2015 is hereby provided.
courses beneath new carriageway construction. The minimum CBR
Values for Base Course, Subbase Course and Subgrade are 80%, 30% That’s the requirement, however, D.0. 137, Series of 2016 amended the
and 4%, respectively. existing D.O. 47, series of 2015. The IRI of 3.0 to 3.5 m/Km is still
considered acceptable with 100% payment for the particular item.
24. C. 28.50 cm. If one of the measurements of a core specimen taken from
the concrete pavement is 28.7 cm., the corrected measurement to be 27. A. 12. DPWH Standard Specifications Subsection 407.3.14 Removal of
used in calculating the average thickness of the pavement if the design Forms and Falsework states that forms used on ornamental work,
thickness is 28.0 cm, is 28.50 cm. In other words, the measured 28.70 railing, parapets and exposed vertical surfaces shall be removed in not
cm pavement will be treated as 28.50 cm since the design thickness is less than 12 nor more than 48 hours, depending upon weather
28 cm only. conditions to facilitate finishing.

DPWH Standard Specification Volume 2 (Blue Book) Subsection 28. D. Ultrasonic Tester.
311.3.22.2 Tolerance in Pavement Thickness (Paragraph 2) states that The Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity (UPV)
in calculating the average thickness of the pavement, individual test is performed for strength
measurements which are in excess of the specified thickness by more determination of concrete. It involves
than 5 mm will be considered as the specified thickness plus 5 mm and measuring the velocity of sound
measurement which are less than the specified thickness by more than travelling through the concrete. Since
25 mm shall not be included in the average. When the average thickness concrete is a multiphase material,
for the lot is deficient, the contract unit price will be adjusted for velocity of sound in concrete depends
thickness in accordance with paragraph (3 below). on the relative concentration of its
constituent materials, degree of
5. Retro-reflectometer.
A. compacting, moisture content and the
Using a retro reflectometer is the only way to objectively evaluate if a amount of discontinuities present.
road marking or a road sign provides the minimum retroreflection level This technique is applied for
stated in a standard — and thus provides the best possible guidance to measurements of composition (e.g. to
safe driving under various driving conditions. The retro reflectometer monitor the mixing materials during construction and to estimate the
measures nighttime retroreflection of traffic signs, high visibility depth of damage caused by fire), strength estimation, homogeneity,
clothing, license plates and reflective tapes. It is a handy instrument for elastic modulus and age, to check presence of defects, crack depth and
use on the roads and in production. thickness measurement. Generally, high pulse velocity readings in
concrete are indicative of good quality concrete.
Page 282 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 283

On the other hand, a density gauge is being used to ensure proper discontinuities, fractures, and fissures of subsurface formations. Even
compaction for the foundation of a school construction project. A nuclear though such samples are designated as "undisturbed," in reality they
density gauge is a tool used in civil construction and the petroleum are disturbed to varying degrees. The degree of disturbance depends on
industry, as well as for mining and archaeology purposes. It consists of the type of subsurface materials, type and condition of the sampling
a radiation source that emits a cloud of particles and a sensor that equipment used, the skill of the drillers, and the storage and
counts the received particles that are either reflected by the test transportation methods used.
material or pass through it. By calculating the percentage of particles
that return to the sensor, the gauge can be calibrated to measure the Option “D” is almost the correct answer since it mentions about the
density and inner structure of the test material. It is the radioactive relative strength of the soil strata, however, it must be noted that an
source that measures density and is located at the base of the source undisturbed sample does not undergo compression test (depends if it is
rod. The actual radioactive material is fused into a dry pellet about the rock or clay) easily because there are other tests such as consolidation
size of a pebble. test which is beneficial to know than compression testing only.

On the other hand, the Geiger counter is an instrument used for 30. D. All of the above. The California Bearing Ratio test is a test meant for
detecting and measuring ionizing radiation used widely in applications the evaluation of subgrade strength of roads and pavements. Soil
such as radiation dosimetry, radiological protection, experimental sample was subjected to the following procedures at the laboratory a.)
physics and the nuclear industry. compaction at its optimum moisture content: b.) application of
surcharge (to the sample) to represent the estimated thickness of
Finally, Ground-Penetrating Radar (GPR) is a geophysical method that pavement over the subgrade c.) soaking the sample for four days; and
uses radar pulses to image the subsurface. This nondestructive method then d.) forcing a plunger into the sample to a depth of 2.5mm.
uses electromagnetic radiation in the microwave band (UHF/VHF
frequencies) of the radio spectrum, and detects the reflected signals from This test is called California Bearing Ratio (CBR) Test. This is a
subsurface structures. GPR can have applications in a variety of media, penetration test meant for the evaluation of subgrade strength of roads
including rock, soil, ice, fresh water, pavements and structures. In the and pavements. The results obtained by these tests are used with
right conditions, practitioners can use GPR to detect subsurface objects, the empirical curves to determine the thickness of pavement and its
changes in material properties, and voids and cracks. component layers. The reason we conduct this test is to know the
bearing capacity of the embankment. It must be noted that for road
29. A.To retain the structure of material. Now, why are we trying to acquire construction, CBR is required depending on the type of embankment:
the “undisturbed” samples beneath the surface for our foundation? As a 4% for subgrade, 30% for Subbase, and 80% for Base Course.
matter of fact, we are using split-spoon sampler for SPT, and it is very
difficult to extract undisturbed sample due to many relative cases such Swell test is also conducted to verify the swell potential of the
as using the equipment with minimum error or handling the sample embankment. Further, permeability of water is not permitted to the
itself while preserving its physical properties such as moist condition. underlying base courses to minimize the future defects.
As simple as possible, once the moisture condition loses, the sample
becomes disturbed already: that is why many laboratories use moisture 31. A Joint Filler. By definition, catalytic agent is the acceleration of a
cabinet to keep the sample as what it was acquired. chemical reaction by the action of a catalyst. Further, emulsified asphalt
is a mixture of asphalt cement and water and is usually used in joint
Disturbed and undisturbed samples of the subsurface materials must be fillers. This is typically using a rubberized tar material or mixture of
obtained for laboratory analyses (and/or tested in the field) to determine sand and asphalt emulsion to fill the crack. Cracks and joints 1/4" or
their engineering properties and verify geophysical and in-situ greater should be cleaned of any incompressible material including old
exploration results. Undisturbed samples are obtained where necessary sealant.
to determine the in-place stiffness and strength, compressibility
(settlement), natural moisture content, unit weight, permeability,
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 208
Page 284 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed
and Seal. Each class shall be used in that part of the structure as called
On the other hand, by examining the options we can also notice that for on the Plans. The classes of concrete will generally be used as follows!
asphalt is dependent on the temperature of the mix. When in normal
temperature in the Philippines, asphalt cement is hard. Cutback
Class A — All superstructures and heavily reinforced substructures. The
asphaltis simply a combination of asphalt cement and petroleum
used because they important parts of the structure included are slabs, beams, girders,
solvent. Like emulsions, cutbacks are
for lower temperature uses (tack coats, fog columns, arch ribs, box culverts, reinforced abutments, retaining walls,
reduce asphalt viscosity
and reinforced footings.
seals, slurry seals, stabilization material).
Class B — Footings, pedestals, massive pier shafts, pipe bedding, and
nded Po EPS) or with only a small amount of
gravity walls, unreinforced
DPWH Standard Specifications Item 743 - Geofoam as an Alternative
reinforcement.
Embankment Material shall consist of furnishing and installing
expanded polystyrene (EPS) geofoam as an alternative embankment precast R.C. piles and
Class C — Thin reinforced sections, railings,
material. It shall be in accordance with the lines, grades and dimensions
cribbing and for filler in steel grid floors.
in the Plans and Specifications. Subsection 743.2.1 states that
Expanded Polystyrene (EPS)- A type of foamed plastic formed by the
Class P — Prestressed concrete structures and members.
expansion of polystyrene resin beads in a molding process. On the other
hand, Subsection 743.2.2 states Geofoam - A block or planar rigid
Seal — Concrete deposited in water.
cellular foam polymeric material used in geotechnical engineering
applications.
. D. 3; 100
Vibratory rolling shall be limited to a maximum of 3 passes at a mixture ‘
33. B. 2 layers over the full width of 4.5 m. Department Order 70, Series of
temperature of not less than 100 °C.
2016 - Adoption of Compacted Thickness of 200 mm in Item 200 -
Aggregate Subbase Course and Item 201 - Aggregate Base Course in
. C. At less %
Concrete and Asphalt Paving Works of National Roads states that “due
Shotcrete construction: A single compressive strength test result is the
to the advancements in construction technology wherein compaction
average result from 2 cylinders cast from the same load and tested at 28
equipment of higher compactive effort is already available and in order
days. Remove and replace concrete if the compressive strength test
to optimize time and effort during road construction, said provision
results are less than 90 percent of specified design strength at the
needs to be revised and modified accordingly.”
specified test age.
Thus, the 125-mm Subbase will be compacted and the remaining
. A. Width of not less than 305 mm.
175mm will be compacted also up to its 100% designed degree of
compaction. On the other hand, compaction on the base and base course
shall extend 0.5m on both sides (1/2 width of the roller), that is why the . B. 4 meters
3.5m one-lane carriageway will be added by 1.0 meter for the shoulder
. B.90% (3.51 to 4.00 m/Km)
=4.5 meters.
. A. Computation: F = 6,250 lbs.
P = 3FL/2bd? = 3*(6,250%18) / (2*6*62)
P =781.25 psi; Answer
- D. Take note that we used 18" instead of the beam size of 21". Be reminded
DPWH Standard Specifications Vol 2, Subsection 405.1.2 states that
that during testing of the beam, either midpoint or third-point loading,
Five classes of concrete are provided for in this Item, namely-A, B, C, P edges of the beam
the supports (Resultant Forces) sit on the two
Page 286 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™ Ed / Materlals Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2" Ed Page 287
approximately 1.50 inches from the edges on both sides. That makes 21" In its simplest form, a job-mix formula consists of two parts: a.) The
- 1.5” (2 Supports) = 18". Combined Gradation of the aggregates to be used in the production of
the asphalt concrete mixture. b.) The Asphalt Content necessary to
42. B. 2 gallons each. Let’s first define the different kinds of paint. LATEX produce a satisfactory mix meeting all the specification requirements.
PAINT - intended for use on concrete or other masonry surfaces. FLAT Mathematical procedures are available to determine an optimum
LATEX PAINT - a paint made from emulsions of polymer in water as combination of aggregates, but the “Trial and Error Method” guided by
binder with suitable pigment which is substantially free from gloss a certain amount of reasoning is the most practical procedure to
(lusterless finish). ENAMEL PAINT - intended for use on wood determine a satisfactory combination and the one we will demonstrate.
surfaces, a special type of paint made with varnish as the vehicle. FLAT
WALL PAINT - for interior use, a paint made from alkyd resin as binder From the question, part of the job-mix formula is the grading of
with suitable pigment which is substantially free from gloss. aggregates since it will be the independent amount that will be the basis
GLOSS/SEMI-GLOSS ENAMEL - for exterior use, a paint made from of asphalt cement content. The mixing workability of asphalt concrete is
alkyd resin as binder with suitable pigment which has sheen, shine or dependent on the temperature of the mix, thus, mixing time is very
luster. critical. On the other hand, since the question is about job-mix formula
where we are still looking for the correct amount of asphalt for a given
The minimum testing requirement for paints is: aggregate, option D, temperature of the delivery is not included in job-
1 Quality Test (Q.T.) — 100 gallons/100 pails or fraction thereof: sample mix formula because it is already pre-determined specially noted on the
to be submitted should be the actual representative of the sample to be DPWH Standard Specifications, Items 307 to 310. Further, depending
used in the project: 1 Gallon (1-4 liter-can) or 1 pail (1-20 liter-can) on the design, the temperature of the mix is being monitored as
whichever is used. frequently as possible.

Since there are 160 Gallons of Latex Paint, so there must be 2 — QT or 46. D,
10. The sand used in the field density test in determining the volume
2 gallons. For 140 Gallons of flat wall enamel, the number of tests shall of hole using sand cone method must be a) any ordinary sand, b) free
be 2 — QT or 2 Gallons also. That makes two (2) Gallons each paint. flowing, ¢) Uncemented, d) Washed (Clean), e) Passing 10, retained 200.
Note: It's not just Ottawa/Maroto Sand.
43. C.
California
Bearing Capacity. The test which combines a load-
deformation test performed in the laboratory with an empirical design A7 B. 40%. The maximum percentage abrasion loss allowed for paving
chart to determine the thickness pf pavement base and other layers is concrete coarse aggregate is 40%. ltem 311.2.3 — Coarse Aggregate
known as “California Bearing Ratio”. Flexible pavement design by CBR states that it shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when
method is used to determine the total thickness of pavement. tested by AASHTO T 96.

44. C. Reinforcing Steel Bars. Tensile strength, yield strength, and 18, B. Trial Mix. The correctness/effectiveness of all concrete mix design can
elongation are the common required tests to determine quality of be checked by conducting trial mix. Before a design mix can be used in
reinforcing steel bars. Those are its basic tests. the actual project, trial mix shall be conducted. On the other hand, core
test is usually being done for thickness determination and further
45. D. Temperature at Delivery. A good asphalt concrete pavement requires investigation of strength of concrete. Please see Subsection 311.3.20
more than asphalt, aggregates and equipment. It also requires Acceptance of Concrete (Portland Cement Concrete Pavement).
knowledge, skill, and workmanship. Part of this knowledge and skill is
the ability to blend aggregates to meet a specified target, known as the 19. B. Viscous solids. In hot climates such as desert subject to sustained
job-mix formula. Asphalt concrete requires the combining of two or more loads, asphalt cement acts like viscous solids. Viscous liquids like hot
aggregates, having different gradations, to produce an aggregate blend asphalt are sometimes called plastic because one they start flowing, they
that meets gradation specifications for a particular asphalt mix. do not return to their original position. On the other hand, in cold
climate such as winter or under rapidly applied loads (fast moving
 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 — 2™
Page 288 Materials Engineer Examination Reference Vol. 1.1 - 2™ Ed Ed Page 289

trucks), asphalt behaves like an elastic solid. Elastic solids are like
rubber bands; when loaded they deform and when unloaded, they return
to their original shape. END NOTE
And now, you have completed reading and studying our MERfC
Undisturbed. Consolidation test is usually performed on Undist_urbed
50. B.
1.1 - 2nd Edition, a continuation reference of our Volume 1.0.
E Volume
samples. This is to determine the settlements due t_o primary We thank you
and wish you the best in your upcoming ME Written examination.
consolidation of soil by conducting one-dimensional test. This has to be We hope
this book would serve as your stepping stone to become
undisturbed sample so that we will be able to know an‘d have an 1r:lea a Construction
Materials Engineer. Always remember: ENGINEERS DO
about the actual simulation that happens beneath the soil by controlling NOT GUESS.
the stress.
We would also like to thank those who assisted us in finishing this
reference.
We couldn’t have done this without them.
=== END OF EXPLANATIONS ---
The DPWH Specifications for Highways, Bridges, and Airports Volume 2
(Blue Book) serves as the sole basis of this reference. The Author will offer
more reference books in the near future. Be sure to like our
Facebook Page
at fb.me/MaterialsEngineer24.

Please be informed that Blue Book Volume 3 (Vertical Structu

res) is being
updated and the BRS are having deliberations with Engineers in various
fields on the Items of series 1000s of the said Volume 3; while Blue
Book
Volume 4 (Quality Assurance) is already being made by the BRS
with
coordination with the other DPWH Bureaus (BOD, BOC, BQS,
DPWH
Implementing Offices, and other private construction compani
es). On the
other hand, Volume I (Contracts) which is a part of R.A. 9184
also known as
Government Procurement Law is also being studied for revision.

We are glad to assist you. God bless and Good Tuck!

JR. Cuna